Suzuki Automobile 2010 Grand Vitara User Manual

ENGLISH  
14.5 mm  
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION  
Fuel recommendation:  
Brake and clutch fluid:  
See page 1-1  
DOT3  
Engine oil recommendation:  
Automatic transmission fluid:  
Engine oil with “Starburst” symbol  
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309  
For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.  
Tire cold pressure:  
See the “Tire Information Label” located on the  
driver’s door lock pillar.  
Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%  
Suzuki Blue: Cyan 100%, Magenta 70%  
takumi Blue: Cyan 100%, Black 85%  
Black  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This owner’s manual applies to the GRAND VITARA series:  
79K035  
NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the GRAND VITARA series.  
© 2009  
All rights reserved.  
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or  
mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Suzuki Motor Corporation.  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUZUKI  
MOTOR  
CORPORATION  
IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITH  
YOUR SUZUKI:  
FOREWORD  
believes in conservation and protection of  
Earth’s natural resources.  
Your SUZUKI multipurpose vehicle is  
designed and built to be capable of per-  
forming both on pavement and off road.  
You should therefore remember that your  
vehicle is distinctly different from ordinary  
passenger cars in handling as well as in  
structure. As with other vehicles of this  
type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-  
rectly may result in loss of control or an  
accident. Be sure to read “Important Vehi-  
cle Design Features to Know” and the “on-  
pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines  
which follow. It is very important to familiar-  
ize yourself with the proper operation of  
this vehicle before you start driving.  
Please review the New Vehicle Warranty  
Information booklet supplied with your  
SUZUKI. Should you have a question or  
problem regarding the warranty or service  
of your vehicle, please take the following  
action:  
To that end, we encourage every vehicle  
owner to recycle, trade in, or properly dis-  
pose of, as appropriate, used motor oil,  
coolant, and other fluids, batteries and  
tires.  
Consult the Service Manager and the  
Owner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer-  
ship. Explain your problem and ask for  
their assistance in resolving your problem.  
The Owner of the dealership is in the very  
best position to assist you as he or she is  
vitally concerned with your continued satis-  
faction.  
If you are still in need of additional informa-  
tion, or if you are dissatisfied, request that  
your dealer arrange a meeting with your  
District Service Manager.  
All information in this manual is based  
on the latest product information avail-  
able at the time of publication. Due to  
improvements or other changes, there  
may be discrepancies between informa-  
tion in this manual and your vehicle.  
If, after doing so, you still require further  
assistance, and you purchased your  
SUZUKI in the continental United States,  
please contact the American Suzuki Cus-  
tomer Relations Department by telephone  
at 1-800-934-0934 or in writing at:  
SUZUKI  
MOTOR  
CORPORATION  
reserves the right to make production  
changes at any time, without notice and  
without incurring any obligation to  
make the same or similar changes to  
vehicles previously built or sold.  
American Suzuki Motor Corporation  
Automotive Customer Relations  
3251 East Imperial Highway  
Brea, CA 92821-6795  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada  
please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-  
tomer Relations Department by telephone  
at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in  
writing at:  
IMPORTANT  
WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE  
Please read this manual and follow its  
instructions carefully. To emphasize spe-  
cial information, the symbol  
words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE  
have special meanings. Pay special atten-  
tion to the messages highlighted by these  
signal words:  
and the  
Suzuki Canada Inc.  
Customer Relations  
100 East Beaver Creek Road  
Richmond Hill, On  
L4B 1J6  
In the event you require assistance related  
to your SUZUKI, while temporarily travel-  
ling in either the United States or Canada,  
you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus-  
tomer Relations Department directly of the  
country in which you are temporarily oper-  
ating your vehicle.  
WARNING  
Indicates  
a
potential hazard that  
could result in death or injury.  
75F135  
The circle with a slash in this manual  
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-  
pen”.  
CAUTION  
Indicates  
a
potential hazard that  
could result in vehicle damage.  
Please be certain to provide us with the fol-  
lowing information: the model, Vehicle  
Identification Number, mileage, accesso-  
ries involved, event dates, your concern,  
and any other comments which you may  
have. When we receive your correspon-  
dence, we will be pleased to contact the  
Owner of your dealership and assist in  
resolving your concern.  
NOTE:  
Indicates special information to make  
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.  
For owners outside the continental United  
States, please refer to the distributor’s  
address listed in your Warranty Information  
booklet.  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODIFICATION WARNING LEAK DETECTION PUMP  
NOTE:  
WARNING  
Your vehicle has a pump to regularly check  
the vehicle’s evaporative emission control  
system for leaks. This check is performed  
approximately five hours after the engine is  
turned off. During this leak check, you may  
hear a sound coming from the vehicle for  
several minutes. This sound is normal and  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica-  
tion could adversely affect safety,  
handling, performance or durability  
and may violate governmental regula-  
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-  
mance problems resulting from  
modification may not be covered  
under warranty.  
CAUTION  
Improper installation of mobile com-  
munication equipment such as cellu-  
lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)  
radios may cause electronic interfer-  
ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-  
tem, resulting in vehicle performance  
problems. Consult your SUZUKI  
dealer or qualified service technician  
for advice on installing such mobile  
communication equipment.  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great value  
that will give you years of driving pleasure.  
This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learn  
about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.  
Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.  
Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.  
In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend you  
read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.  
When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-  
tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE STATION GUIDE  
1. Fuel (see section 1)  
2. Engine hood (see section 5)  
3. Tire changing tools (see section 8)  
4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow>  
(see section 7)  
1
5. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick  
<Red> (see section 7)  
6. Engine coolant (see section 7)  
7. Windshield washer fluid  
(see section 7)  
8
6
8. Battery (see section 7)  
5 (4A/T)  
10  
9. Tire pressure (see Tire Information  
Label on driver’s door lock pillar)  
10. Spare tire (see section 8)  
2
(5A/T)  
4
5
2
3
7
9
79K135  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
BEFORE DRIVING  
1
California Proposition 65 Warning  
2
WARNING  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
DRIVING TIPS  
3
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-  
ents, and certain product compo-  
nents contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to  
cause cancer and birth defects or  
other reproductive harm.  
4
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
APPEARANCE CARE  
5
6
7
8
9
GENERAL INFORMATION  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
SPECIFICATIONS  
10  
11  
12  
13  
INDEX  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS  
EXTERIOR  
EXAMPLE  
1. Rear Window Wiper (P.2-81)  
2. Engine Hood (P.5-63)  
3. Windshield Wiper (P.2-79)  
4. Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors  
(if equipped) (P.5-78)  
1
2
3
4
5
5. Radio Antenna (P.5-8)  
6. Spare Wheel (P.8-3)  
7. Tailgate (P.2-3)  
8. Fuel Filler Cap (P.5-62)  
9. Outside Rearview Mirror (P.2-17)  
10. Door Locks (P.2-1)  
6
7
8
9
10  
79K001  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS  
INTERIOR  
EXAMPLE  
1. Interior Light (P.5-64, P.7-40)  
2. Seat Belts (P.2-26)  
1
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
3. Coat hooks (if equipped) (P.5-70)  
4. Side Curtain Air Bags (P.2-46)  
5. Sun Visor (P.5-64)  
6. Overhead Console Box (if equipped)  
(P.5-71)  
7. Spot Light (P.5-66, P.7-41)  
8. Inside Rearview Mirror (P.2-17)  
9. Luggage Compartment Cover  
(P.5-74)  
10. Rear Seats (P.2-22)  
11. Side Air Bags (P.2-46)  
12. Parking Brake Lever (P.3-7)  
13. Front Seats (P.2-18)  
14. Gearshift Lever (P.3-11)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
79K132  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
EXAMPLE  
1. Power Window Controls  
(if equipped) (P.2-15)  
1 2  
3
4
35  
6
7
4
1
2. Power Mirror Control (if equipped)  
(P.2-18)  
3. Remote Audio Controls (if equipped)  
(P.5-56)  
4. Front Air Bags (P.2-45)  
5. Cruise Control (P.3-26)  
6. Hazard Warning Switch (P.2-79)  
7. Heating and Air Conditioning System  
(P.5-1)  
8. Fuel Lid Opener Lever (P.5-62)  
9. Front Seat Heater (if equipped)  
(P.2-21)  
10. Accessory Socket (if equipped)  
(P.5-66)  
8
190  
191  
120  
79K003  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
EXAMPLE  
1
2
3
4
1. Lighting Control Lever (P.2-75)/  
Turn Signal Control Lever (P.2-78)  
2. Instrument Cluster (P.2-54)  
3. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever  
(P.2-79)/Rear Window Wiper and  
Washer Switch (P.2-81)  
4. Rear Window Defroster and Outside  
Rearview Mirrors Defroster Switch  
(if equipped) (P.2-82)  
5. Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)  
(P.2-78)  
6. Engine Hood Release Handle  
(P.5-63)  
7. Horn (P.2-82)  
8. Ignition Switch (P.3-3)  
9. Transfer Switch (if equipped) (P.3-15)  
10. “ESP OFF” Switch (if equipped)  
(P.3-34)/Hill descent control Switch  
(if equipped) (P.3-35)  
65  
76  
78  
89  
190  
101  
79K136  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location of Warning Messages: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,  
14  
LOCATION OF WARNING  
MESSAGES  
6
Read and follow all of the warnings (labels  
etc.) on your vehicle. Make sure you  
16  
4
understand all of them. Keep them on the  
5
14  
15  
vehicle. Do not remove the messages for  
any reason. If a label comes off or the  
messages become difficult to be read,  
have it corrected by your SUZUKI dealer.  
13  
1. Air bag warning labels  
(on both sun visors)  
14  
13  
14  
13  
2. Rollover warning label  
3. Passenger seat belt warning label  
4. Jacking warning label  
5. Jacking warning label  
6. Fuel filler cap message  
7. Transfer switch warning label  
1
Driver  
Passenger  
3
8. Brake fluid cap message  
9. Engine cooling fan warning label  
10. Radiator cap warning label  
11. Air conditioner warning label  
2
12  
7
12. Battery label  
13. Side air bag warning label  
14. Rear outboard seat belt warning label  
15. Rear center seat belt warning label  
16. Luggage compartment cover warning  
label  
8
9
11  
10  
79K115  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1  
65D394  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fuel Recommendation: 1, 2  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
Gasoline Containing MTBE  
Fuel Pump Labeling  
Fuel Recommendation  
Unleaded gasoline containing MTBE  
(methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used in  
your vehicle if the MTBE content is not  
greater than 15%. This oxygenated fuel  
does not contain alcohol.  
In some states, pumps that dispense oxy-  
genated fuels are required to be labeled for  
the type and percentage of oxygenate and  
whether important additives are present.  
Such labels may provide enough informa-  
tion for you to determine if a particular  
blend of fuel meets the requirements listed  
above. In other areas, pumps may not be  
clearly labeled as to the content or type of  
oxygenate and additives. If you are not  
sure that the fuel you intend to use meets  
these requirements, check with the service  
station operator or the fuel supplier.  
Gasoline/Ethanol blends  
Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol  
(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol,  
may be used in your vehicle if the ethanol  
content is not greater than 10%.  
Gasoline/Methanol blends  
Fuels containing 5% or less methanol  
(wood alcohol) may be suitable for use in  
your vehicle if they contain cosolvents and  
corrosion inhibitors. Do NOT USE fuels  
containing more than 5% methanol under  
any circumstances. Fuel system damage  
or vehicle performance problems resulting  
from the use of such fuels are not the  
responsibility of SUZUKI and may not be  
covered under the New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty.  
NOTE:  
60A004  
To help clean the air, SUZUKI recom-  
mends you use the oxygenated fuels.  
However, if you are not satisfied with the  
driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle  
when you are using an oxygenated fuel,  
switch back to the regular unleaded gaso-  
line.  
Your vehicle requires regular unleaded  
gasoline with a minimum rating of 87 pump  
octane ((R + M)/2 method). In some areas,  
the only fuels that are available are oxy-  
genated fuels.  
Oxygenated fuels which meet the mini-  
mum octane requirement and the require-  
ments described below may be used in  
your vehicle without jeopardizing the New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to spill fuel containing  
alcohol while refueling. If fuel is  
spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up  
immediately. Fuels containing alco-  
hol can cause paint damage, which is  
not covered under the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty.  
NOTE:  
Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain  
oxygen-carrying additives such as MTBE  
or alcohol.  
1-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BEFORE DRIVING  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1  
Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-1  
Keyless Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry  
System Transmitter ............................................................. 2-4  
Theft Deterrent Light ........................................................... 2-15  
Windows .............................................................................. 2-15  
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-17  
Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-18  
Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-22  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-26  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-43  
Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-54  
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-55  
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-65  
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-65  
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-65  
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-66  
Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-66  
Information Display (if equipped) ...................................... 2-67  
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-75  
Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-78  
Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-78  
Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-79  
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-79  
Tilt Steering Lock Lever ..................................................... 2-82  
Horn ...................................................................................... 2-82  
Rear Window Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirrors  
2
60G404  
Defroster (if equipped) Switch ........................................... 2-82  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Keys: 8  
Spare Tire Nut Lock: 5  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Ignition Key Reminder  
Keys  
Door Locks  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the  
ignition switch when the driver’s door is  
opened.  
WARNING  
EXAMPLE  
Always lock all doors when driving.  
Locking the doors helps to prevent  
occupants from being thrown from  
the vehicle in the event of an acci-  
dent. It also helps prevent unin-  
tended opening of the doors.  
Side Door Locks  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
54G489  
Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical  
keys. Keep the spare key in a safe place.  
One key can open all of the locks on the  
vehicle.  
Rear  
The key identification number is stamped  
on a metal tag provided with the keys.  
Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose  
your keys, you will need this number to  
have new keys made. Write the number  
below for your future reference.  
Front  
60A009  
To lock a front door from outside the vehi-  
cle:  
KEY NUMBER:  
• Insert the key and turn the top of the key  
toward the front of the vehicle, or  
Turn the lock knob forward and close the  
door.  
2-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To unlock a front door from outside the  
vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of  
the key toward the rear of the vehicle.  
Driver’s side  
EXAMPLE  
Power Door Locking System  
(if equipped)  
UNLOCK  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
LOCK  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
Rear  
79K005  
Front  
Front passenger’s side  
64J003  
64J002  
LOCK  
UNLOCK  
You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-  
ing the tailgate) simultaneously by:  
Turning the key in the driver’s door lock,  
or  
To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn  
the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob  
rearward to unlock the door.  
• Pushing the power door locking switch  
located on the door panel of either front  
door.  
To lock a rear side door from outside the  
vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and  
close the door.  
(when using the key)  
To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the  
key in the driver’s door lock, and turn the  
key to the LOCK side.  
79K006  
To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert  
the key in the driver’s door lock and turn  
the key to the UNLOCK side twice.  
2-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
(when using the power door locking  
switch)  
To lock or unlock all the doors simulta-  
neously, depress the front or rear of the  
switch respectively.  
Child Lock System (rear doors)  
Tailgate  
You can lock or unlock the tailgate by using  
the key in the driver’s door lock.  
NOTE:  
(2)  
When, in parked condition on a road, the  
tailgate is open and hides the lights, it is  
necessary to indicate the presence of the  
vehicle, for example by means of a warn-  
ing triangle or other devices according to  
national requirements for use on the road.  
NOTE:  
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-  
less entry system, you can also lock or  
unlock all doors by operating the remote  
controller/transmitter. Refer to “Keyless  
Start System Remote Controller/Key-  
less Entry System Transmitter” in this  
section.  
(1)  
If you cannot unlock the tailgate due to a  
discharged battery or malfunction, follow  
the procedures below to unlock the tailgate  
from inside the vehicle.  
1) Remove the luggage compartment  
cover.  
2) Fold the rear seat forward for easier  
access. Refer to the “Folding Rear  
Seats” section for details on how to fold  
the rear seat forward.  
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-  
less start system, you can also lock or  
unlock all doors by pushing the request  
switch on the door handle. Refer to “Key-  
less Start System Remote Controller/  
Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in  
this section.  
79K009  
(1) LOCK  
(2) UNLOCK  
Each of the rear doors is equipped with a  
child lock which can be used to help pre-  
vent unwanted opening of the door from  
inside the vehicle. When the lock lever is in  
the “LOCK” position (1), the rear door can  
only be opened from outside. When the  
lock lever is in the “UNLOCK” position (2),  
the rear door can be opened from inside or  
outside.  
WARNING  
Be sure to place the child lock sys-  
tem in the “LOCK” position whenever  
children are seated in the rear.  
2-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Keyless Start System Remote  
Controller/Keyless Entry  
System Transmitter  
(2)  
Type A  
Type B  
(1)  
64J202  
64J203  
3) Remove the cap (1) by hand.  
5) Push down on the emergency lever (2)  
using a jack handle or a flat blade  
screwdriver. To lock the tailgate, push  
up on the emergency lever (2).  
4) Break the vinyl using a jack handle or a  
flat blade screwdriver to access the  
emergency lever (2).  
66J111  
Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-  
less start system remote controller (Type  
A) or a keyless entry system transmitter  
(Type B). The remote controller has a key-  
less entry system and a keyless start sys-  
tem. The transmitter has only a keyless  
entry system. For details, refer to the fol-  
lowing explanations.  
WARNING  
To avoid injury, do not use your fin-  
ger to push the emergency lever.  
After using the emergency lever, be sure to  
see your SUZUKI dealer.  
2-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button  
(2) function  
You can lock or unlock all doors (including  
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating  
the remote controller near the vehicle.  
NOTE:  
Keyless Start System Remote  
Controller (Type A)  
• The maximum operating distance of the  
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),  
but this can vary depending on the sur-  
roundings, especially near other trans-  
mitting devices such as radio towers or  
CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.  
The remote controller enables the following  
operations:  
You can lock or unlock the doors by  
operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons  
on the remote controller. Refer to the  
explanation in this section.  
You can lock or unlock the doors (includ-  
ing the tailgate) by pushing the request  
switch on the door handle of each door  
or the tailgate. For details, refer to the  
explanation in this section.  
You can start the engine without using  
an ignition key. For details, refer to “Igni-  
tion Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR  
VEHICLE” section.  
To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-  
ton (1).  
To unlock the driver’s door, push the  
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.  
To unlock other doors, wait a second or  
two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)  
a second time. If you “double-click” too  
fast, the doors will not unlock.  
• The door locks cannot be operated with  
the remote controller if the ignition switch  
is in a position other than “LOCK”, or the  
ignition key is inserted in the ignition  
switch.  
If any door is open, you cannot lock the  
door by operating the remote controller,  
however unlock the door.  
The turn signal lights will flash once when  
the doors are locked.  
You cannot lock the door unless all of the  
doors are closed completely.  
When the doors are unlocked:  
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,  
ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-  
sible for a replacement. Be sure to have  
your dealer program the new remote  
controller code in your vehicle’s memory  
so that the old code is erased, or per-  
form the programming procedure your-  
self according to the instructions in this  
section.  
• The turn signal lights will flash twice.  
• If the interior light switch is in the  
“DOOR” position, the interior light will  
turn on for about 15 seconds and then  
fade out. If you push in the ignition  
switch or insert the key during this time,  
the light will start to fade out immedi-  
ately.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Be sure the doors are locked after you  
operate the “LOCK” button (1).  
If no door is opened within about 30 sec-  
onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is  
operated, the doors will automatically lock  
again.  
66J114  
(1) “LOCK” button  
(2) “UNLOCK” button  
(3) “PANIC” button  
2-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
PANIC” button (3) function  
Keyless unlocking/locking using the  
request switches  
When the doors are unlocked:  
This function is to get the attention of oth-  
ers.  
• The turn signal lights will flash twice.  
• If the interior light switch is in the  
“DOOR” position, the interior light will  
turn on for about 15 seconds and then  
fade out. If you push in the ignition  
switch or insert the key during this time,  
the light will start to fade out immedi-  
ately.  
EXAMPLE  
Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than  
1 second. The headlights and taillights will  
blink for about 30 seconds. Also, the horn  
will sound intermittently for about 30 sec-  
onds at the same time.  
To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press any  
button (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on the  
remote controller. You can also insert the  
key in the ignition switch and turn to the  
“ON” position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.  
Be sure the doors are locked after you  
operate the request switch to lock the  
doors.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
(1)  
(1)  
• The door locks cannot be operated by  
the request switch under the following  
conditions:  
– If any door is open or is not completely  
closed.  
– If the ignition switch is in a position  
other than “LOCK”.  
– If the ignition key is inserted in the igni-  
tion switch.  
• If no doors are opened within about 30  
seconds after unlocking the doors by  
pushing the request switch, the doors  
will be locked again automatically.  
The “PANIC” button function will not acti-  
vate when the key is in the ignition switch.  
78K143  
When the remote controller is within the  
operating range described in this section,  
you can lock or unlock the doors by push-  
ing the request switch (1) on the door han-  
dle of each door or the tailgate.  
To lock all doors when all doors are  
unlocked:  
• Push the request switch on one of the  
door handles once.  
The turn signal lights will flash once when  
the doors are locked.  
To unlock a door or all doors:  
• Push the request switch on the door  
handle once to unlock only one door.  
• Push the request switch on the door  
handle twice to unlock all doors.  
2-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
• If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-  
cle, the request switches may not oper-  
ate normally.  
NOTE:  
The keyless start system may not function  
correctly in certain environments or under  
certain operating conditions such as the  
following:  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
• The remote controller will only operate a  
request switch if it is within the switch’s  
operating range. For example, if the  
remote controller is within the operating  
range of the driver’s door request switch  
but not the front passenger’s door  
request switch or the tailgate request  
switch, the driver’s door switch can be  
operated but the front passenger’s door  
switch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-  
ated.  
• When there are strong signals coming  
from a television, power station or a cel-  
lular phone.  
• When the remote controller is in contact  
with or covered by a metal object.  
• When a radio wave type remote keyless  
entry is used nearby.  
• When the remote controller is placed  
near an electronic device such as per-  
sonal computer.  
(1)  
(1)  
78K001  
Some additional precautions you should  
take and information you should be aware  
of are:  
• Make sure the ignition key is stowed in  
the remote controller. If the remote con-  
troller becomes unreliable, you will not  
be able to lock or unlock the doors or  
start the engine.  
CAUTION  
(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)  
The remote controller is a sensitive  
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-  
aging the remote controller:  
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-  
ture or high temperature such as by  
leaving it on the dashboard under  
direct sunlight.  
• Keep the remote controller away  
from magnetic objects such as a  
television.  
When the remote controller is within  
approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a  
front door handle or the tailgate switch, you  
can lock or unlock the doors by pushing  
the request switch.  
• Be sure that the driver always carries the  
remote controller.  
NOTE:  
• If the remote controller is outside the  
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,  
ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-  
sible for a replacement. Be sure to have  
your dealer program the new remote  
controller code in your vehicle’s memory  
so that the old code is erased, or per-  
form the programming procedure your-  
self according to the instructions in this  
section.  
request  
switch  
operating  
range  
described above, you will not be able to  
operate the request switch.  
• If the battery of the remote controller  
runs down or there are strong radio  
waves or noise, the request switch oper-  
ating range may be reduced or the  
remote controller may be inoperative.  
• If the remote controller is too close to the  
door, the request switches may not oper-  
ate.  
2-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
You can use up to four remote controllers  
and ignition keys for your vehicle. Ask  
your SUZUKI dealer for details.  
• The battery life of the remote controller  
is about two years, but it can vary  
depending on usage conditions.  
Reminder function  
• If you open the driver’s door and lock the  
door by turning the lock knob forward or  
pushing the power door locking switch,  
the driver’s door will be automatically  
unlocked.  
• If you open a door other than the driver’s  
door and lock the front passenger’s door  
by turning the lock knob forward or push-  
ing the power door locking switch, the  
front passenger’s door will be automati-  
cally unlocked.  
NOTE:  
• The reminder will not operate when the  
remote controller is on the instrument  
panel, in the glove box, in a storage  
compartment, in the sun visor or on the  
floor etc.  
• Be sure that the driver always carries the  
remote controller.  
63J281  
EXAMPLE  
To stow the ignition key into the remote  
controller, push the key in the remote con-  
troller until you hear a click.  
79K116  
If the remote controller is not in the vehicle  
under the following conditions, a buzzer  
sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds  
and the keyless start system indicator light  
on the instrument cluster blinks in red:  
• When the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h  
(6 mph).  
• When one or more doors are opened  
and all of the doors are later closed with  
the ignition switch in a position other  
than “LOCK”.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in the  
vehicle when leaving the vehicle.  
(A)  
63J282  
To remove the key from the remote control-  
ler, push the button (A) in the direction of  
the arrow and pull the key out from the  
remote controller.  
The red indicator light will turn off within  
several seconds after the remote controller  
is returned to an area of the vehicle other  
than the rear luggage area.  
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle  
and you lock the driver’s door or front pas-  
senger’s door as described below, the door  
will be automatically unlocked.  
2-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Replacement of the battery  
If the remote controller becomes unreli-  
able, replace the battery.  
CAUTION  
The transmitter/remote controller is a  
sensitive electronic instrument. To  
avoid damaging it, do not expose it to  
dust or moisture or tamper with inter-  
nal parts.  
To replace the battery of the remote con-  
troller:  
(1)  
66J017  
2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc  
type CR2032 or equivalent) so its + ter-  
minal faces the bottom of the case as  
shown in the illustration.  
3) Close the remote controller firmly.  
4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-  
ated with the remote controller.  
5) Dispose of the used battery properly  
according to applicable rules or regula-  
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-  
ies with ordinary household trash.  
66J016  
1) Insert a flat blade screwdriver covered  
with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote  
controller and pry it open.  
WARNING  
Swallowing a lithium battery may  
cause serious internal injury. Do not  
allow anyone to swallow a lithium  
battery. Keep lithium batteries away  
from children and pets. If swallowed,  
contact a physician immediately.  
2-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Programming/erasing the remote con-  
To program a new remote controller  
1) Close all the doors of the vehicle.  
2) Sit in the driver’s seat and confirm that  
the driver’s door is unlocked.  
7. Proceed to step 5) within 60 seconds  
after the engine has started.  
troller code yourself  
Your new vehicle was originally equipped  
with two remote controllers.  
NOTE:  
3) Insert the key into the ignition switch.  
4) Complete steps 1 through 6 described  
below within 25 seconds after step 3).  
You cannot program the remote controller  
if you don’t complete steps 1 through 6  
within 25 seconds.  
You cannot program the remote controller  
if you do not proceed to step 5) within 60  
seconds after the engine has started.  
If you have lost one of the remote control-  
lers, you should change the remote con-  
troller code in your vehicle’s memory as  
soon as possible for security. If you pur-  
chase additional remote controllers, the  
new remote controllers need to be pro-  
grammed into your vehicle’s memory. You  
can perform this yourself by using the fol-  
lowing procedure:  
5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”  
position.  
A buzzer will sound twice and the door  
lock switch will be activated from the  
lock position to the unlock position  
automatically.  
UNLOCK  
(2)  
LOCK  
(1)  
NOTE:  
You can program up to four remote con-  
troller codes into your vehicle’s memory.  
The four codes may be the same or dif-  
ferent.  
6) Press the “LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or  
PANIC” button on the remote control-  
ler.  
• If you try to program a fifth code, the four  
remote controller codes that are pro-  
grammed will be cleared automatically.  
• If you program a new remote controller  
code, all of the old remote controller  
codes that are in your vehicle’s memory  
will be erased automatically. When you  
program a new remote controller, you  
should reprogram any additional remote  
controllers at the same time.  
To purchase new remote controllers, see  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
• Before you begin programming, have all  
of your remote controllers available.  
A buzzer will sound twice and the door  
lock switch will be activated from the  
lock position to the unlock position  
automatically.  
If you want to program an additional  
remote controller, repeat the procedure  
of step 6) using the additional remote  
controller.  
79K005  
1. Push the power door locking switch  
of the driver’s door to the lock posi-  
tion and then push it to the unlock  
position.  
2. Repeat step 1 two more times.  
3. Push the power door locking switch  
of the driver’s door to the lock posi-  
tion.  
4. Remove the key from the ignition  
switch and then insert it again.  
5. Repeat step 4 three more times.  
6. To start the engine, turn the ignition  
switch to the “START” position.  
Wait for 3 seconds.  
NOTE:  
Complete step 6) within 30 seconds.  
You can program up to four remote control-  
lers.  
2-10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
7) To complete programming, remove the  
key from the ignition switch or turn the  
ignition switch to the “ON” position.  
8) Make sure that the keyless start system  
and keyless entry system operate prop-  
erly by operating each remote control-  
ler.  
less entry system operate properly by  
operating each remote controller.  
Keyless Entry System Transmitter  
(Type B)  
1. For USA  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-  
lowing two conditions:  
(1)  
(2)  
1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
If you cannot operate the keyless start sys-  
tem and/or keyless entry system, repeat  
this programming procedure again.  
If you still cannot operate the systems, see  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
(3)  
NOTE:  
To change the old remote controller  
codes in your vehicle’s memory  
If you have lost one of the remote control-  
lers, you should change the remote con-  
troller codes in your vehicle’s memory as  
soon as possible for security.  
To erase the remote controller code(s) in  
your vehicle’s memory, you should pro-  
gram the new remote controller code. The  
old codes in your vehicle’s memory will be  
erased automatically. If you have more  
remote controller(s), you must program all  
of the remote controller codes at the same  
time. You cannot operate the keyless start  
system and keyless entry system using  
any remote controller that is not pro-  
grammed at the same time.  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for com-  
pliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
52D209  
(1) “LOCK” button  
(2) “UNLOCK” button  
(3) “PANIC” button  
2. For Canada  
This device complies with Industry Canada  
Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1) This device may not cause interference,  
and  
“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button  
(2) function  
You can lock or unlock all doors (including  
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating  
the transmitter near the vehicle.  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the  
device.  
To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-  
ton (1).  
To unlock the driver’s door, push the  
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.  
To unlock other doors, wait a second or  
two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)  
a second time. If you “double-click” too  
fast, the doors will not unlock.  
The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-  
istration number only signifies that the  
Industry Canada technical specifications  
were met.  
For details on how to program, refer to the  
programming procedure in this section.  
When you complete programming, make  
sure that the keyless start system and key-  
2-11  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
The turn signal lights will flash once when  
ming procedure yourself according to the  
instructions in this section.  
Replacement of the battery  
the doors are locked.  
If the transmitter becomes unreliable,  
replace the battery.  
When the doors are unlocked:  
CAUTION  
• The turn signal lights will flash twice.  
• If the interior light switch is in the  
“DOOR” position, the interior light will  
turn on for about 15 seconds and then  
fade out. If you insert the key into the  
ignition switch during this time, the light  
will start to fade out immediately.  
To replace the battery of the transmitter:  
The transmitter is a sensitive elec-  
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging  
the transmitter:  
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-  
ture or high temperature such as by  
leaving it on the dashboard under  
direct sunlight.  
• Keep the transmitter away from  
magnetic objects such as a televi-  
sion.  
Be sure the doors are locked after you  
operate the “LOCK” button (1).  
If no door is opened within about 30 sec-  
onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is  
operated, the doors will automatically lock  
again.  
PANIC” button (3) function  
This function is to get the attention of oth-  
ers.  
52D210  
NOTE:  
Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than  
1 second. The headlights and taillights will  
blink for about 30 seconds. Also, the horn  
will sound intermittently for about 30 sec-  
onds at the same time.  
To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press any  
button (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on the  
transmitter. You can also insert the key in  
the ignition switch and turn to the “ON”  
position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.  
• The maximum operating distance of the  
keyless entry system transmitter is about  
5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending  
on the surroundings, especially near  
other transmitting devices such as radio  
towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.  
• The door locks cannot be operated with  
the transmitter, if the ignition key is  
inserted in the ignition switch.  
1) Put the edge of a coin or a flat blade  
screwdriver in the slot of the transmitter  
and pry it open.  
• If you lose one of the transmitters, ask  
your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible  
for a replacement. Be sure to have your  
dealer program the new transmitter code  
in your vehicle’s memory so that the old  
code is erased, or perform the program-  
NOTE:  
The “PANIC” button function will not acti-  
vate when the key is in the ignition switch.  
2-12  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door Locks: 3, 5, 8  
Windows: 3, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To program a new transmitter  
1) Confirm that all the doors are closed  
and the ignition key is out of the ignition  
switch.  
CAUTION  
The transmitter/remote controller is a  
sensitive electronic instrument. To  
avoid damaging it, do not expose it to  
dust or moisture or tamper with inter-  
nal parts.  
2) Open the driver’s door.  
3) Insert the key, turn the ignition switch to  
the “ON” position, turn the ignition  
switch to the “LOCK” position and  
remove the key within 10 seconds.  
(1)  
Programming/removing  
code yourself  
Your new vehicle was originally equipped  
with two transmitters.  
a
transmitter  
If you have lost one of the transmitters, you  
should change the transmitter code in your  
vehicle’s memory as soon as possible for  
security. If you purchase additional trans-  
mitters, the new transmitters need to be  
programmed into your vehicle’s memory.  
You can perform this yourself by using the  
following procedure:  
52D211  
2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc-  
type CR2025 or equivalent) so its + ter-  
minal faces the “+” mark of the transmit-  
ter.  
(1)  
3) Close the transmitter firmly.  
4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-  
ated with the transmitter.  
5) Dispose of the used battery properly  
according to applicable rules or regula-  
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-  
ies with ordinary household trash.  
NOTE:  
66J018  
You can program up to three transmitter  
codes into your vehicle’s memory. The  
three codes may be the same or differ-  
ent.  
4) Push and release the driver’s door  
switch (1) 3 times, insert the key, and  
turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-  
tion within 20 seconds.  
5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”  
position and remove the key within 10  
seconds. All doors will lock/unlock to  
confirm that this procedure has been  
properly completed.  
• If you try to program a fourth code, the  
oldest code will be cleared automatically.  
To purchase new transmitters, see your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
• Before you begin programming, have all  
of your transmitters available.  
WARNING  
Swallowing a lithium battery may  
cause serious internal injury. Do not  
allow anyone to swallow a lithium  
battery. Keep lithium batteries away  
from children and pets. If swallowed,  
contact a physician immediately.  
2-13  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows: 3, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To change the old transmitter codes in  
your vehicle’s memory  
If you have lost one of the transmitters, you  
should change the transmitter codes in  
your vehicle’s memory as soon as possible  
for security.  
1. For USA  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-  
lowing two conditions:  
(2)  
1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
To remove one of the transmitter codes  
from your vehicle’s memory, first replace all  
three of the transmitter codes in your vehi-  
cle’s memory, then program additional  
transmitters as follows:  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
NOTE:  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for com-  
pliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
1) Program one of your transmitters three  
times, by repeating the programming  
procedure shown in this section. This  
will replace all the old transmitter codes  
in the vehicle’s memory with the code  
for the transmitter you are using.  
2) If you want to program up to two addi-  
tional transmitters, repeat the program-  
ming procedure shown in this section.  
3) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-  
tem operates properly by operating  
each transmitter.  
52D212  
6) Press the “UNLOCK” button (2) on the  
transmitter one time within 20 seconds  
(after step 5). All the doors will lock/  
unlock to confirm that the procedure  
has been completed and the transmitter  
has been programmed.  
7) If you want to program an additional  
transmitter, repeat the procedure from  
step 1) through step 6).  
2. For Canada  
This device complies with Industry Canada  
Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1) This device may not cause interference,  
and  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the  
device.  
8) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-  
tem operates properly by operating  
each transmitter.  
The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-  
istration number only signifies that the  
Industry Canada technical specifications  
were met.  
2-14  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows: 3, 8  
Mirrors: 3, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Passenger’s door  
EXAMPLE  
Theft Deterrent Light  
Windows  
Power Window Controls  
(if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
(3)  
Driver’s side  
(1)  
(4)  
(2)  
79K011  
78K013  
(5)  
The passenger’s door has a switch (3) to  
operate the passenger’s window.  
This light will blink with the ignition switch  
in the “OFF” or “ACC” position. The blink-  
ing light is intended to deter theft by lead-  
ing others to believe that the vehicle is  
equipped with a security system.  
79K010  
The power windows can only be operated  
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
The driver’s door has switches (1), (2), (4),  
(5), to operate the driver’s window, the  
front passenger’s window, the rear left win-  
dow and right window, respectively.  
2-15  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Mirrors: 3, 8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
Lock switch  
EXAMPLE  
CLOSE  
You should always lock the passen-  
ger’s window operation when there  
are children in the vehicle. Children  
can be seriously injured if they get  
part of their body caught by the  
window during operation.  
• To avoid injuring an occupant by  
window entrapment, be sure no  
part of the occupant’s body such  
as hands or head is in the path of  
the electric windows when closing  
them.  
• Always remove the ignition key  
when leaving the vehicle even if  
only for a short time. Also do not  
leave children alone in a parked  
vehicle. Unattended children could  
use the electric window switches  
and get trapped by the window.  
OPEN  
81A009  
79K012  
To open a window, push the top part of the  
switch and to close the window lift up the  
top part of the switch.  
The driver’s door also has a lock switch for  
the passenger’s window(s). When you  
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s  
window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by  
operating either of the switches (2), (3), (4)  
or (5). To restore normal operation, release  
the lock switch by pushing again.  
The driver’s window has an “auto-down”  
feature for added convenience (at toll  
booths or drive-through restaurants, for  
example). This means you can open the  
window without holding the window switch  
in the “Down” position. Press the driver’s  
window switch completely down and  
release it. To stop the window before it  
reaches the bottom, pull the switch up  
briefly.  
NOTE:  
If you drive with one of the rear windows  
open, you may hear a loud sound caused  
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open  
the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or  
narrow the rear window opening.  
2-16  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat Adjustment: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Mirrors  
WARNING  
Inside Rearview Mirror  
• Always adjust the mirror with the  
selector set to the day position.  
• Only use the night position if it is  
necessary to reduce glare from the  
headlights of vehicles behind you.  
Be aware that in this position you  
may not be able to see some  
objects that could be seen in the  
day position.  
Day driving  
Night driving  
(1)  
64J014  
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you  
can just see the side of your vehicle in the  
mirrors.  
78K033  
You can adjust the inside rearview mirror  
by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-  
cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set  
the selector tab (1) to the day position,  
then move the mirror up, down or sideways  
by hand to obtain the best view.  
The passenger’s side mirror is a convex  
(curved surface) mirror. Objects seen in  
this mirror will look smaller and appear far-  
ther away than when seen in a flat mirror.  
When driving at night, you can move the  
selector tab to the night position to reduce  
glare from the headlights of vehicles  
behind you.  
WARNING  
Be careful when judging the size or  
distance of a vehicle or other object  
seen in the side convex mirror. Be  
aware that objects look smaller and  
appear farther away than when seen  
in a flat mirror.  
2-17  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Seat Adjustment: 14  
Head Restraints: 3  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Mirrors Defroster (if equipped) Switch” in  
this section.  
Power Mirror Control (if equipped)  
Front Seats  
Seat Adjustment  
WARNING  
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s  
seat or seatback while driving. The  
seat or seatback could move unex-  
pectedly, causing loss of control.  
Make sure that the driver’s seat and  
seatback are properly adjusted  
before you start driving.  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(4)  
WARNING  
64J015  
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,  
which reduces the effectiveness of  
the seat belts as a safety device,  
make sure that the seats are adjusted  
before the seat belts are fastened.  
The switch to control the power rearview  
mirrors is located on the driver’s door  
panel. You can adjust the mirrors when the  
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-  
tion. To adjust the mirrors:  
1) Move the selector switch to the left or  
right to select the mirror you wish to  
adjust.  
2) Press the outer part of the switch that  
corresponds to the direction in which  
you wish to move the mirror.  
3) Return the selector switch to the center  
position to help prevent unintended  
adjustment.  
NOTE:  
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside  
rearview mirrors defroster, refer to “Rear  
Window Defroster and Outside Rearview  
2-18  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Head Restraints: 3  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Adjusting Seat Position  
Adjusting Seatbacks  
WARNING  
All seatbacks should always be in an  
upright position when driving, or seat  
belt effectiveness may be reduced.  
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-  
mum protection when seatbacks are  
in the upright position.  
78K034  
64J016  
If the driver’s seat is equipped with a seat  
height adjuster lever on the outboard side  
of the seat, raise or lower the seat by pull-  
ing up or down the adjuster lever.  
The adjustment lever for each front seat is  
located under the front of the seat. To  
adjust the seat position, pull up on the  
adjustment lever and slide the seat forward  
or rearward. After adjustment, try to move  
the seat forward and rearward to ensure  
that it is securely latched.  
64J018  
To adjust the seatback angle of front seat,  
pull up the lever on the outboard side of  
the seat, move the seatback to the desired  
position, and release the lever to lock the  
seatback in place.  
2-19  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Head Restraints  
WARNING  
(1)  
(3)  
All head restraints must be rein-  
stalled to properly protect vehicle  
occupants.  
WARNING  
• Never drive the vehicle with the  
head restraints removed.  
• Do not attempt to adjust the head  
restraint while driving.  
(2)  
EXAMPLE  
78K035  
63J256  
(1) Head restraint  
(2) Bars  
(3) Release knob  
Head restraints are designed to help  
reduce the risk of neck injuries in case of  
an accident. Adjust the head restraint to  
the position which places the center of the  
head restraint closest to the top of your  
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-  
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high  
as possible.  
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on  
the restraint until it clicks. To lower the  
restraint, push down on the restraint while  
holding in the release knob (3). If a head  
restraint must be removed (for cleaning,  
replacement, etc.), push in the release  
knob and pull the head restraint all the way  
out.  
WARNING  
All occupants, including the driver,  
should not operate a vehicle or sit in  
79K087  
NOTE:  
Each front seats is equipped with a head  
restraint.  
a
vehicle’s seat until the head  
It may be necessary to recline the seat-  
back to provide enough overhead clear-  
ance to remove the head restraint.  
restraints are placed in their proper  
positions in order to minimize the  
risk of severe injury in the event of a  
crash.  
2-20  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Front Seat Heater (if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
(4)  
79K036  
86G064  
78K138  
To reinstall the head restraint, insert the  
head restraint bars into the holes (4) and  
push the head restraint down.  
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-  
tion, push in one or both of the seat heater  
switches to warm the corresponding  
seat(s). The indicator light below the switch  
will also come on. To turn off the seat  
heater, push in the switch again. The indi-  
cator light below the switch will go off.  
WARNING  
Improperly using the seat heater can  
be hazardous. An occupant can suf-  
fer burns even if the heating tempera-  
ture is fairly low, if the occupant is  
wearing thin pants, a thin skirt or  
shorts and leaves the heater on for  
long periods.  
Avoid using the seat heater for these  
occupants:  
• People who have reduced feeling in  
their legs, including the elderly or  
those with certain disabilities.  
• Small children, or anyone with sen-  
sitive skin.  
• People who are asleep or under the  
influence of alcohol or other drugs  
which make them tired.  
2-21  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Rear Seats  
CAUTION  
Seat Adjustment  
To avoid damaging the heater ele-  
ment:  
• Do not subject the front seats to  
heavy impacts, such as children  
jumping on them.  
• Do not cover the seat with any  
insulating materials such as blan-  
kets or cushions.  
WARNING  
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,  
which reduces the effectiveness of  
the seat belts as a safety device,  
make sure that the seats are adjusted  
before the seat belts are fastened.  
Adjusting Seatbacks  
WARNING  
64J019  
To adjust the seatback angle of the rear  
seats:  
1) Pull up the lever on the top of a split  
folding seat.  
2) Move the seatback to one of the lock  
positions. The number of the lock posi-  
tions depends on the vehicle specifica-  
tion.  
All seatbacks should always be in an  
upright position when driving, or seat  
belt effectiveness may be reduced.  
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-  
mum protection when seatbacks are  
in the upright position.  
3) Release the lever to lock the seatback  
in position. After adjustment, try moving  
the seatback to make sure it is securely  
locked.  
2-22  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Head Restraints  
Head restraints are designed to help  
reduce the risk of neck injuries in case of  
an accident. Adjust the head restraint to  
the position which places the center of the  
head restraint closest to the top of your  
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-  
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high  
as possible.  
EXAMPLE  
(3)  
(1)  
WARNING  
All occupants, including the driver,  
should not operate a vehicle or sit in  
(2)  
EXAMPLE  
a
vehicle’s seat until the head  
79K088  
79K095  
restraints are placed in their proper  
positions in order to minimize the  
risk of severe injury in the event of a  
crash.  
Your vehicle is equipped with three head  
restraints on the rear seat.  
(1) Head restraint  
(2) Bars  
(3) Release knob  
To raise the rear head restraint, pull  
upward on the restraint until it clicks. To  
lower the restraint, push down on the  
restraint while holding in the release knob  
(3). If a head restraint must be removed  
(for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in  
the release knob and pull the head  
restraint all the way out.  
WARNING  
All head restraints must be rein-  
stalled to properly protect vehicle  
occupants.  
WARNING  
When installing a child restraint system,  
raise the head restraint to the most upper  
position.  
• Never drive the vehicle with the  
head restraints removed.  
• Do not attempt to adjust the head  
restraint while driving.  
2-23  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
3) Lower the adjustable head restraint  
fully.  
Folding Rear Seats  
The rear seat(s) of your vehicle can be  
folded forward to provide additional cargo  
space.  
To fold the rear seats forward:  
1) Remove the luggage compartment  
cover.  
(1)  
64J088  
5) Pull the lock release strap (1) rearward  
to unlatch the seat cushion.  
64J087  
4) Pull the release lever forward on the top  
of each split seat, and fold the seat-  
backs forward.  
WARNING  
When you unlatch the rear seat cush-  
ion, be careful that your face or  
hands are not injured from the seat  
popping up.  
CAUTION  
66J211  
2) Stow the seat belt buckles of the center  
and left seating position into the pocket  
of the seat cushion as shown in the  
illustration.  
Make sure the belt webbing is not  
caught by the seat.  
CAUTION  
When you fold the rear seatback for-  
ward, stow the seat belt buckles of  
the center and left seating position  
into the pocket first. This helps pre-  
vent being caught by the seat and  
being damaged.  
2-24  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
Luggage or other cargo should be  
stowed in the luggage compartment  
with the rear seat in an upright posi-  
tion, whenever possible. If you need  
to carry cargo in the passenger com-  
partment with the rear seat back  
folded forward, be sure to secure the  
cargo or it may be thrown about,  
causing injury. Never pile cargo  
higher than the seatbacks.  
(4)  
To return the seat to the normal position,  
follow the procedure below.  
64J089  
66J196  
6) Fold the entire seat forward.  
8) Hook the strap (4) to the front seat head  
restraint and re-tighten the adjuster to  
apply a tension on the strap as shown  
in the illustration.  
CAUTION  
(2)  
When securing the folded rear seat  
with a strap, adjust the strap length  
so that the rear seat will not move.  
(3)  
64J175  
66J195  
1) Unhook the strap from the head  
restraint and stow the strap to the back  
of the seat cushion as shown in the  
illustration. Make sure to adjust the  
strap length to avoid any slack or twist.  
7) Push down the adjuster (2) to make the  
strap slack, and then unhook the strap  
by pushing down the hook (3).  
2-25  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint  
Systems  
CAUTION  
• When returning the rear seat cush-  
ion to the normal position, make  
sure that there is nothing around  
the striker. Any foreign materials  
prevent the seat cushion from  
being locked securely.  
• When returning the rear seat cush-  
ion to the normal position, make  
sure that there is nothing under the  
seat cushion. This prevents dam-  
age to the seat cushion.  
64J091  
2) Pull down the seat cushion until it locks  
into place.  
65D231S  
WARNING  
WARNING  
When returning the rear seat cushion  
to the normal position, be careful that  
your finger is not caught between the  
lock and the floor.  
An air bag supplements, or adds to,  
the frontal crash protection offered  
by seat belts. The driver and all pas-  
sengers must be properly restrained  
by wearing seat belts at all times,  
whether or not an air bag is mounted  
at their seating position, to minimize  
the risk of severe injury or death in  
the event of a crash.  
64J092  
3) Raise the seatback until it locks into  
place.  
After returning the seat, try moving the  
seat and seatback to make sure they are  
securely latched.  
2-26  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
as low as possible  
across the hips  
Across the pelvis  
Above the pelvis  
65D606  
65D201  
65D199  
WARNING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• Never allow persons to ride in the  
cargo area of a vehicle. In the event  
of an accident, there is a much  
greater risk of injury for persons  
who are not riding in a seat with  
their seat belt securely fastened.  
• Seat belts should always be  
adjusted as follows:  
– the lap portion of the belt should  
be worn low across the pelvis,  
not across the waist.  
– the shoulder straps should be  
worn on the outside shoulder  
only, and never under the arm.  
– the shoulder straps should be  
away from your face and neck,  
but not falling off your shoulder.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Seat belts should never be worn  
with the straps twisted and should  
be adjusted as tightly as is com-  
fortable to provide the protection  
for which they have been designed.  
A slack belt will provide less pro-  
tection than one which is snug.  
(Continued)  
• Pregnant women should use seat  
belts, although specific recommen-  
dations about driving should be  
made by the woman’s medical advi-  
sor. Remember that the lap portion  
of the belt should be worn as low  
as possible across the hips, as  
shown in the diagram.  
• Make sure that each seat belt  
buckle is inserted into the proper  
buckle catch. It is possible to cross  
the buckles in the rear seat.  
(Continued)  
2-27  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)  
The lap-shoulder seat belt has an emer-  
gency locking retractor (ELR), which is  
designed to lock the seat belt only during a  
sudden stop or impact. It also may lock if  
you pull the belt across your body very  
quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back  
to unlock it, then pull the belt across your  
body more slowly.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Do not wear your seat belt over  
hard or breakable objects in your  
pockets or on your clothing. If an  
accident occurs, objects such as  
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat  
belt can cause injury.  
• Never use the same seat belt on  
more than one occupant and never  
attach a seat belt over an infant or  
child being held on an occupant’s  
lap. Such seat belt use could cause  
serious injury in the event of an  
accident.  
• Periodically inspect seat belt  
assemblies for excessive wear and  
damage. Seat belts should be  
replaced if webbing becomes  
frayed, contaminated, or damaged  
in any way. It is essential to replace  
the entire seat belt assembly after it  
has been worn in a severe impact,  
even if damage to the assembly is  
not obvious.  
• Infants and small children should  
never be transported unless they  
are properly restrained. Restraint  
systems for infants and small chil-  
dren can be purchased commer-  
cially and should be used. Make  
sure that the system you purchase  
meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. Read and follow all the  
directions provided by the manu-  
facturer.  
• Avoid contamination of seat belt  
webbing by polishes, oils, chemi-  
cals and particularly battery acid.  
Cleaning may safely be carried out  
using mild soap and water.  
• For children, if the shoulder belt  
irritates the neck or face, move the  
child closer to the center of the  
vehicle.  
• All seatbacks should always be in  
an upright position when driving,  
or seat belt effectiveness may be  
reduced. Seat belts are designed to  
offer maximum protection when  
seatbacks are in the upright posi-  
tion.  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
The front passenger’s seat belt and the  
rear seat belts have emergency locking  
retractors (ELRs) that can be temporarily  
converted to function as automatic locking  
retractors (ALRs). The ALR mode should  
be used if you need to secure a child  
restraint system in the seat. Refer to the  
“Child Restraint Systems” section for  
details.  
• Children age 12 and under should  
ride properly restrained in the rear  
seat, if equipped.  
(Continued)  
2-28  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Safety reminder  
by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt  
upward through the latch plate. The length  
of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself  
to allow freedom of movement.  
Sit up straight and  
fully back  
Low on hips  
60A036  
60A038  
To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and  
well back in the seat, pull the latch plate  
attached to the seat belt across your body  
and press it into the buckle until you hear a  
“click”.  
Low on hips  
60A040  
To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt  
during a collision, position the lap portion  
of the belt across your lap as low on your  
hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit  
2-29  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Seat Belt Reminder  
Driver’s seat belt reminder light  
EXAMPLE  
78K126  
60A039  
NOTE:  
To unfasten the belt, push the red  
“PRESS” button on the buckle and allow  
the belt to retract.  
79K117  
The word “CENTER” is molded into the  
buckle for the rear seat center belt. The  
buckles are designed so a latch plate can-  
not be inserted into the wrong buckle.  
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
light  
66J243  
When the driver and front passenger don’t  
buckle their seat belts, the driver’s seat belt  
2-30  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
reminder light in the instrument cluster and  
the front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
light in the center of the instrument panel  
will come on and a buzzer will sound as a  
reminder to the driver and front passenger  
to buckle their seat belts.  
Flow chart  
Ignition Switch “ON”  
Seat belt is  
unbuckled  
Seat belt is  
buckled  
No reminder  
WARNING  
Seat belt is  
unbuckled  
Reminder 1  
It is absolutely essential that the  
driver and passengers wear their seat  
belts at all times. Persons who are  
not wearing seat belts have a much  
greater risk of injury if an accident  
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-  
ling your seat belt before putting the  
key in the ignition.  
30 sec.  
Vehicle speed:  
below 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
over 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
below 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
over 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
increase to 8 km/h  
The seat belt reminder functions as shown  
in the figure below. There are some differ-  
ences between the driver’s seat belt  
reminder and the front passenger’s seat  
belt reminder. For more details, refer to the  
explanation below.  
Reminder 2  
3 min.  
Reminder 3  
No reminder  
52D219  
Reminder 1 – 3  
For each reminder 1 – 3, the reminder light comes on for about 20 seconds, then blinks for  
about 55 seconds. When the reminder light first comes on, a buzzer sounds intermittently  
for about 6 seconds.  
2-31  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Driver’s seat belt reminder  
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
The front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
will activate only when there is a passen-  
ger sitting in the front seat. In some situa-  
tions, however, such as when you place  
heavy objects in the front seat, the seat  
belt reminder can be activated as if there  
were a passenger present. The front pas-  
senger’s seat belt reminder works in the  
same manner as the driver’s seat belt  
reminder, except that it is not activated  
until 10 seconds after the ignition switch is  
turned to the “ON” position.  
Shoulder anchor height adjuster  
(if equipped)  
If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled  
with the ignition key in the “ON” position,  
the driver’s seat belt reminder works as fol-  
lows:  
EXAMPLE  
1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will  
come on for about 20 seconds when  
the ignition key is turned to the “ON”  
position then will blink for about 55 sec-  
onds. When the light comes on, a  
buzzer will also sound intermittently for  
about 6 seconds (Reminder 1).  
2) If the vehicle is driven (vehicle speed >  
8 km/h), Reminder 2 will operate about  
30 seconds after Reminder 1 has fin-  
ished.  
64J198  
If the vehicle is not driven (vehicle  
speed < 8 km/h), Reminder 2 will oper-  
ate when driving starts (vehicle speed >  
8 km/h).  
Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that  
the shoulder belt rides on the center of the  
outside shoulder. To upward, slide the  
anchor up. To downward, slide the anchor  
down while pulling the lock knob out. After  
adjustment, make sure that the anchor is  
securely locked.  
3) Reminder 3 will operate about 3 min-  
utes after Reminder 2 has finished.  
4) Even if the driver’s seat belt remains  
unbuckled after Reminder 3, there will  
be no further reminders.  
WARNING  
If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt  
and later unbuckles the seat belt, the  
reminder system will be activated from  
Reminder 1 or Reminder 2 according to  
the vehicle speed. (Refer to the flow chart.)  
Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi-  
tioned on the center of the outside  
shoulder. The belt should be away  
from your face and neck, but not fall-  
ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment  
of the belt could reduce the effective-  
ness of the safety belt in a crash.  
The driver’s seat belt reminder will be auto-  
matically canceled when the driver’s seat  
belt is buckled or the ignition switch is  
turned off.  
2-32  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Seat Belt Inspection  
EXAMPLE  
Child Restraint Systems  
WARNING  
Be sure to inspect all seat belt  
assemblies after any collision. Any  
seat belt assembly which was in use  
during a collision (other than a very  
minor one) should be replaced, even  
if damage to the assembly is not  
obvious. Any seat belt assembly  
which was not in use during a colli-  
sion should be replaced if it does not  
function properly, it is damaged in  
any way or the seat belt pretension-  
ers were activated (that is, if the front  
air bags were activated).  
65D209  
60G332  
Periodically inspect the seat belts to make  
sure they work properly and are not dam-  
aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch  
plates, retractors, anchorages and guide  
loops. Replace any seat belts which do not  
work properly or are damaged.  
Infant restraint - rear seat only  
EXAMPLE  
65D202  
2-33  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
Infant restraint - rear seat only  
SUZUKI highly recommends that you use  
a child restraint system to restrain infants  
and small children. Many different types of  
child restraint systems are available; make  
sure that the restraint system you select  
meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-  
dards.  
Children could be endangered in a  
crash if their child restraints are not  
properly secured in the vehicle.  
When installing a child restraint sys-  
tem, be sure to follow the instruc-  
tions below. Be sure to secure the  
child in the restraint system accord-  
ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions.  
All child restraint systems are designed to  
be secured in vehicle seats by either seat  
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-  
shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower  
anchor bars built into the seats. Whenever  
possible, SUZUKI recommends that child  
restraint systems be installed on the rear  
seat. According to accident statistics, chil-  
dren are safer when properly restrained in  
rear seating positions than in front seating  
positions.  
WARNING  
65D584  
In an accident or sudden stop, the  
rear seat armrest (if equipped) could  
fall forward. If there is a child in a  
rear-facing child restraint in the cen-  
ter seating position, the falling arm-  
rest could injure the child. Make sure  
the armrest is back in the seat and  
locked when not in use.  
Booster seat  
EXAMPLE  
If you must use a front-facing child restraint  
in the front passenger’s seat, be sure to  
move the front passenger’s seat as far  
back as possible.  
65D203  
2-34  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat  
Belts (Child Restraint with No Top  
Strap)  
NOTE:  
There are two types of lap-shoulder belts  
depending on the vehicle’s specification,  
A-ELR (Automatic-Emergency Locking  
Retractor) type and ELR (Emergency  
Locking Retractor) type.  
The A-ELR type belts have emergency  
locking retractors (ELRs) that can be tem-  
porarily converted to function as automatic  
locking retractors (ALRs).  
The ELR type belts have ELRs that cannot  
be converted to function as ALRs.  
65D607  
65D608  
WARNING  
To identify the belt is the A-ELR type or the  
ELR type, slowly pull all of the shoulder  
webbing out of the retractor. Then let the  
webbing retract a little and pull it out, and  
repeat this a few times. If the belt is locked  
each time you pull the belt, the belt is the  
A-ELR type. If the belt is not locked, the  
belt is the ELR type.  
Do not install a rear-facing child  
restraint in the front passenger’s  
seat. If the passenger’s air bag  
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child  
restraint could be seriously injured.  
The back of  
a
rear-facing child  
restraint would be too close to the  
inflating air bag.  
Please note that the methods to secure the  
child restraint system with the ELR lap-  
shoulder belt and with the A-ELR lap-  
shoulder belt are different.  
65D609  
CAUTION  
Before installing a child restraint sys-  
tem in the rear seat, raise the head  
restraint to the most upper position.  
2-35  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 14  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
ELR type belt  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type belt  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
83E035  
65D233  
83E031  
1) Pull all of the remaining webbing out of  
the retractor. You will hear a click, which  
means that the emergency locking  
retractor (ELR) has converted to func-  
tion as an automatic locking retractor  
(ALR).  
Install your child restraint system accord-  
ing to the instructions provided by the child  
restraint system manufacturer.  
Install your child restraint system accord-  
ing to the instructions provided by the child  
restraint system manufacturer. If you install  
the child restraint system in the front seat,  
be sure to slide the seat to the rearmost  
position. After making sure that the seat  
belt is securely latched:  
Make sure that the seat belt is securely  
latched.  
Try to move the child restraint system in all  
directions to make sure it is securely  
installed.  
2-36  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
Move to check  
83E032  
83E036  
65D234  
2) Allow the extra webbing to retract, and  
pull the webbing toward the retractor to  
take up any slack. Make sure that the  
lap portion of the belt is tight around the  
child restraint system and the shoulder  
portion of the belt is positioned so that it  
cannot interfere with the child’s head or  
neck.  
3) Make sure that the retractor has con-  
verted to the ALR mode by trying to pull  
webbing out of the retractor. If the  
retractor is in the ALR mode, the belt  
will be locked.  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
Pull to tighten  
WARNING  
If the retractor is not in the ALR  
mode, the child restraint system can  
move or tip over when your vehicle  
turns or stops abruptly.  
65D235  
4) Try moving the child restraint system in  
all directions, to make sure it is securely  
installed. If you need to tighten the belt,  
pull more webbing toward the retractor.  
2-37  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To revert from ALR to ELR  
EXAMPLE  
and Tethers for Children.) The anchors are  
located where the rear of the seat cushion  
meets the bottom of the seatback.  
Installation with the LATCH System  
Install a LATCH-type child restraint system  
according to the instructions provided by  
the child restraint system manufacturer.  
After installing the child restraint system,  
try moving it in all directions, especially for-  
ward to make sure the flexible straps or  
rigid connecting bars are securely latched  
to the anchors.  
NOTE:  
Rigid lower connecting  
bar type  
Flexible lower connecting  
strap type  
Although there are three second row seat-  
ing positions, you cannot install three  
LATCH type child restraints in the rear  
seat. You can install one or two LATCH  
restraint(s). Be sure to install the LATCH  
type child restraint(s) in the outboard seat-  
ing positions.  
65D267  
66J162  
When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow  
it to retract to a certain length, the retractor  
will automatically revert back to the normal  
ELR mode.  
Rear seat  
If your LATCH restraint has flexible lower  
connecting straps, these general instruc-  
tions apply:  
1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward  
for easier installation.  
2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat.  
64J027  
Your vehicle is equipped with lower  
anchors for securing up to two standard  
LATCH-type child restraints in the rear  
seats. (LATCH stands for Lower Anchors  
2-38  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
owner’s manual. Attach the top tether  
strap, if applicable.  
If your LATCH restraint has rigid lower con-  
necting bars, these general instructions  
apply:  
EXAMPLE  
1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward  
for easier installation.  
EXAMPLE  
2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,  
inserting the connecting bars through  
the slots in the seat cushion or the slots  
in the seatback bottom.  
EXAMPLE  
65D340  
3) Snap the strap hooks to the anchors.  
Take care not to pinch your fingers.  
65D342  
5) Make sure the child restraint is securely  
fastened by trying to move the child  
restraint system in all directions, espe-  
cially forward.  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
54G183  
The seatback should always be  
securely latched in a fairly upright  
position when any type of child seat  
is installed. An unlatched or reclined  
seatback will reduce the intended  
effectiveness of the child restraint  
system.  
3) Use your hands to carefully align the  
connecting bar tips with the anchors.  
Take care not to pinch your fingers.  
65D341  
4) Return the seatback to the normal,  
upright position. Tighten the lower  
straps as described in the child restraint  
2-39  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Installation-Child Restraint with Top  
Strap  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
Rear seat  
EXAMPLE  
Front  
54G184  
54G185  
4) Push the child restraint toward the  
anchors so that the connecting bar tips  
are partially hooked to the anchors.  
Use your hands to confirm the position.  
5) Grasp the front of the child restraint and  
push the child restraint forcefully to  
latch the connecting bars. Make sure  
they are securely latched by trying to  
move the child restraint system in all  
directions, especially forward.  
79K026  
Some child restraint systems require the  
use of a top strap. Top strap anchor brack-  
ets are located on the back of the rear seat  
as shown in the illustration. Install the child  
restraint system as follows:  
6) Return the seatback if folded. Attach  
the top tether strap, if applicable.  
1) Remove the luggage compartment  
cover.  
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear  
seat using the procedure described  
above for securing a restraint system  
that does not require a top strap.  
3) Hook the top strap to the anchor  
bracket and tighten the top strap  
according to the instructions provided  
by the child restraint system manufac-  
turer. Be sure to attach the top strap to  
the corresponding anchor located  
directly behind the child restraint. Do  
WARNING  
The seatback should always be  
securely latched in a fairly upright  
position when any type of child seat  
is installed. An unlatched or reclined  
seatback will reduce the intended  
effectiveness of the child restraint  
system.  
2-40  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
not attach the top strap to the luggage  
restraint loops (if equipped).  
how to raise or lower the head  
other adjustable seats should be adjusted  
as far back as possible), your dealer can  
select the appropriate seat belt extender.  
restraint.)  
5) Make sure that cargo does not interfere  
with routing of the top strap.  
WARNING  
• A seat belt extender should only be used  
for the person, vehicle and seating loca-  
tion it was provided for.  
Do not attach the child restraint top  
strap to the luggage restraint loops  
(if equipped). Incorrectly attached top  
strap will reduce the intended effec-  
tiveness of the child restraint system.  
Seat Belt Extender  
• When using the extender, ensure that  
both ends are latched securely. Do not  
use the extender if the open end of the  
extender’s buckle is within 152 mm (6  
inches) of the center of the occupant’s  
body (See diagram). Use of the extender  
when the buckle is too close to the cen-  
ter of the body could increase the risk of  
abdominal injury in the event of an acci-  
dent, and could cause the shoulder belt  
to be positioned incorrectly.  
Type 1  
• Make sure to use the correct buckle cor-  
responding to your seating position.  
• Seat belt extenders are not intended for  
use by pregnant women, and should  
only be used upon approval by their  
medical advisors.  
65D613  
(1) Center of body  
(2) Less than 152 mm (6 inches)  
(3) Open end of extender buckle  
Type 2  
• Remove and stow the extender when it  
is not being used.  
If a seat belt cannot be fastened securely  
because it is not long enough, see your  
authorized SUZUKI dealer for a seat belt  
extender. Seat belt extenders are available  
for each seating position except for the  
rear center position. After inspecting the  
relationship between the seat belt length,  
the occupant’s body size, and the seat  
adjustment (the driver’s seat should always  
be adjusted as far back as possible while  
still maintaining control of the vehicle, and  
86G032  
4) When routing the top strap, be sure to  
pass it between the head restraint and  
the rear seatback as shown. (Refer to  
“Head Restraints” section for details on  
2-41  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
sensors and the electronic controller of the  
air bag system also control the seat belt  
pretensioners. The pretensioners are trig-  
gered only when the air bags are triggered  
and the seat belts are fastened. If the seat  
belts are not fastened, the respective pre-  
tensioner system will not be activated. For  
precautions and general information  
including servicing the pretensioner sys-  
tem, refer to the “Supplemental Restraint  
System (air bags)” section in addition to  
this “Seat Belt Pretensioner System” sec-  
tion, and follow all those precautions.  
Seat Belt Pretensioner System  
(for front seat belt only)  
WARNING  
Failure to follow these instructions  
may increase the risk of injury in a  
crash.  
• Only use an extender for the per-  
son, vehicle and seating position it  
was provided for.  
• Do not use if open end of  
extender’s buckle is within 152 mm  
(6 inches) of center of occupant’s  
body (See diagram).  
• Remove and stow the extender  
when it is not being used.  
The pretensioner is located in each front  
seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-  
ens the seat belt in the event of a frontal  
crash or a rollover. The retractors will  
remain locked after the pretensioners are  
activated. Upon activation, some noise will  
occur and some smoke may be released.  
These conditions are not harmful and do  
not indicate a fire in the vehicle.  
52D011  
WARNING  
This section of the owner’s manual  
describes your SUZUKI’s SEAT BELT  
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please  
read and follow ALL these instruc-  
tions carefully to minimize your risk  
of severe injury or death.  
The driver and all passengers must be  
properly restrained by wearing seat belts  
at all times, whether or not a pretensioner  
is equipped at their seating position, to  
help minimize the risk of severe injury or  
death in the event of a frontal crash or a  
rollover.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt  
pretensioner system at the front seating  
positions. You can use the pretensioner  
seat belts in the same manner as ordinary  
seat belts.  
Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do  
not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the  
belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn  
low across the pelvis, not across the waist.  
Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec-  
The seat belt pretensioner system works  
with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM (advanced air bags). The crash  
2-42  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
tion and the instructions and precautions  
about the seat belts in this “Seat Belts and  
Child Restraint Systems” section for details  
on proper seat and seat belt adjustments.  
two conditions may result in personal  
Supplemental Restraint  
System (air bags)  
injury.  
To prevent damage or unintended activa-  
tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-  
tery is disconnected and the ignition switch  
has been in the “LOCK” position for at least  
90 seconds before performing any electri-  
cal service work on your SUZUKI. Do not  
touch pretensioner system components or  
wiring. The wires are wrapped with yellow  
tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are  
yellow. When scrapping your SUZUKI, ask  
your SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop or  
scrap yard for assistance.  
EXAMPLE  
Please note that the pretensioners along  
with the front air bags will activate in  
severe frontal collisions. Also, the preten-  
sioners along with the side curtain air bags  
will activate in severe rollovers. They are  
not designed to activate in rear impacts,  
side impacts, or minor frontal collisions.  
The pretensioners can be activated only  
once. If the pretensioners are activated  
(that is, if the front air bags and/or the side  
curtain air bags are activated), have the  
pretensioner system serviced by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
54G022  
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument  
cluster does not blink or come on briefly  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, stays on for more than 10  
seconds, or comes on while driving, the  
pretensioner system or the air bag system  
may not work properly. Have both systems  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer  
as soon as possible.  
WARNING  
This section of the owner’s manual  
describes the protection provided by  
your  
SUZUKI’s  
SUPPLEMENTAL  
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).  
Please read and follow ALL these  
instructions carefully to minimize  
your risk of severe injury or death in  
the event of a collision.  
Service on or around the pretensioner sys-  
tem components or wiring must be per-  
formed only by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer who is specially trained. Improper  
service could result in unintended activa-  
tion of pretensioners or could render the  
pretensioner inoperative. Either of these  
Your vehicle has advanced front air bags  
and side air bags for the driver and right  
front passenger. Your vehicle also has side  
curtain air bags.  
2-43  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
9
7
2
11  
8
3
10  
4
66J132  
6
8
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-  
mental Restraint System consisting of the  
following components in addition to a lap-  
shoulder belt at each front seating position.  
5
3
1. Driver’s front air bag  
2. Front passenger’s front air bag  
3. Seat belt pretensioners  
4. Air bag controller  
10  
5. Occupant classification module  
6. “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator  
7. Forward crash sensor  
8. Side air bags  
79K137  
9. Side curtain air bags  
10. Side crash sensor  
11. Front passenger’s sensor mat  
2-44  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags): 3, 9, 12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
dashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are  
molded into the air bag covers to identify  
the location of the air bags.  
Front Air Bags  
EXAMPLE  
Frontal collision range  
63J030  
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument  
cluster does not blink or come on when the  
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON”  
position, or the “AIR BAG” light stays on, or  
comes on while driving, the air bag system  
(or the seat belt pretensioner system) may  
not work properly. Have the air bag system  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer  
as soon as possible.  
63J259  
EXAMPLE  
60G032  
Front air bags are designed to inflate only  
in severe frontal collisions.  
78K128  
The driver’s front air bag is located behind  
the center pad of the steering wheel and  
the front passenger’s front air bag is  
located behind the passenger’s side of the  
2-45  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Front air bags will not inflate  
Front air bags are not designed to inflate in  
rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or  
minor frontal collisions, since they would  
offer no protection in those types of acci-  
dents. Remember, since air bags deploy  
only one time during an accident, seat  
belts are needed to restrain occupants  
from further movements during the acci-  
dent.  
Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air  
Bags  
EXAMPLE  
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute  
for seat belts. To maximize your protection,  
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be  
aware that no system can prevent all pos-  
sible injuries that may occur in an accident.  
65D236  
WARNING  
Front air bags will probably not inflate  
68KM090  
An air bag supplements, or adds to,  
the crash protection offered by seat  
belts. The driver and all passengers  
must be properly restrained by wear-  
ing seat belts at all times, whether or  
not air bags are mounted at their  
seating position, to minimize the risk  
of severe injury or death in the event  
of a crash.  
Your vehicle has “dual stage” front air  
bags, which adjust the air bag inflation  
force according to crash severity. Also,  
your vehicle has a front passenger sensing  
system, which turns off the front passen-  
ger’s air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
under certain conditions.  
65D237  
78K037  
Side air bags are located in the part of the  
front seatbacks closest to the doors. The  
words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the  
2-46  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
side air bag cover to identify the location of  
the side air bags.  
Side collision range  
Side air bags will not inflate  
64J036  
54G027  
Side air bags are designed to inflate only in  
severe side impact collisions.  
Side curtain air bags are designed to  
inflate in severe side impact collisions and/  
or rollovers.  
Side curtain air bags will not inflate  
64J034  
Side curtain air bags are located in the roof  
lining. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are  
molded into the pillar to identify the loca-  
tion of the side curtain air bags.  
79K037  
2-47  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Side air bags and side curtain air bags  
will probably not inflate  
Front Passenger Sensing System  
The front passenger sensing system will  
turn off the front passenger’s front air bag  
and seat belt pretensioner under certain  
conditions. This system works using a sen-  
sor mat that is part of the front passenger’s  
seat. The front passenger sensing system  
is designed to detect whether an occupant  
is present in the seat and, if an occupant is  
present, to determine whether the front  
passenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-  
tensioner should be enabled or disabled  
(turned off).  
WARNING  
An air bag supplements, or adds to,  
the crash protection offered by seat  
belts. The driver and all passengers  
must be properly restrained by wear-  
ing seat belts at all times, whether or  
not air bags are mounted at their  
seating position, to minimize the risk  
of severe injury or death in the event  
of a crash.  
WARNING  
NOTE:  
If the “AIR BAG” light in the instru-  
ment cluster ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something  
may be wrong with the air bag sys-  
tem. If this ever happens, have the  
The front passenger’s side air bag and the  
side curtain air bag are not controlled by  
the front passenger sensing system.  
54G028  
Side air bags and side curtain air bags are  
not designed to inflate in frontal or rear col-  
lisions or minor side collisions, since they  
would offer no protection in these types of  
accidents. In a severe side impact, only the  
side air bag and side curtain air bag on the  
side of the vehicle that is struck will inflate.  
In a severe rollover, the side curtain air  
bags on both sides of the vehicle will  
inflate. Remember, since an air bag  
deploys only one time during an accident,  
seat belts are needed to restrain occu-  
pants from further movements during the  
accident.  
vehicle  
serviced  
immediately,  
because the air bags may not offer  
the protection for which they were  
designed.  
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute  
for seat belts. To maximize your protection,  
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be  
aware that no system can prevent all pos-  
sible injuries that may occur in an accident.  
2-48  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
PASS AIR BAG OFF” Indicator  
bag, depending on the front passenger’s  
seating posture and body build. The air  
bag should be turned off in the following  
situations:  
• There is no occupant in the front pas-  
senger seat.  
• The occupant of the front passenger  
seat lifts his or her weight off of the seat  
for a period of time.  
• The occupant of the front passenger  
seat is an infant or small child in a child  
restraint system or a small child in a  
booster seat.  
ing the vehicle, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”  
indicator is still not lit, check to make sure  
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing  
the child restraint into the seat cushion. If  
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s  
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if  
possible. Also make sure the child restraint  
is not trapped under the vehicle head  
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head  
restraint. If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indi-  
cator is still not on, secure the child in the  
child restraint or booster seat in a rear seat  
position in the vehicle and check with your  
dealer.  
• A smaller person, such as a child who  
has outgrown child restraints or a very  
small adolescent is seated in the front  
passenger seat.  
66J244  
The “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator is  
located on the center of the instrument  
panel.  
NOTE:  
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,  
the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will not  
come on but the front passenger’s front air  
bag will not deploy and the seat belt pre-  
tensioner will not operate.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”  
indicator comes on for several seconds to  
let you know the system is working. When  
the front passenger sensing system has  
turned off the front passenger’s front air  
bag including the seat belt pretensioner,  
the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will  
come on and stay on to remind you that  
the front passenger’s front air bag is off.  
If you have secured a child in the front pas-  
senger seat in a forward-facing child  
restraint system or booster seat and the  
PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not  
on, turn the vehicle off, remove the child  
restraint or booster seat from the vehicle  
and reinstall it following the child restraint  
or booster seat manufacturer’s directions.  
Also refer to “Seat Belts and Child  
Restraint Systems” in this section. If, after  
reinstalling the child restraint and restart-  
The front passenger sensing system uses  
front seat pressure measurements and  
pressure locations to determine whether to  
activate or deactivate the front passenger’s  
front air bag. The front passenger sensing  
system may or may not turn off the front air  
2-49  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
front air bag when the system senses a  
properly-seated adult in the front passen-  
ger’s seat. When the passenger sensing  
system has allowed the air bag to be  
enabled, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indica-  
tor will remain off to remind you that the air  
bag is active.  
If a person of adult size is sitting in the  
front passenger’s seat and the “PASS AIR  
BAG OFF” indicator comes on, it could be  
because that person isn’t sitting properly in  
the seat. If this happens, unfasten the seat  
belts, sit upright in the center of the seat  
with the seatback nearly vertical and your  
legs outstretched, and refasten the seat  
belt.  
65D607  
52D258  
When seated as shown in the above illus-  
tration, the front passenger sensing sys-  
tem senses a properly-seated occupant  
and enables the air bag.  
WARNING  
Do not install a rear-facing child  
restraint in the front passenger’s  
seat. If the passenger’s front air bag  
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child  
restraint could be seriously injured.  
rear-facing child  
restraint would be too close to the  
inflating air bag.  
When using a seat belt extender, follow the  
instructions in the “Seat Belt Extender”  
section.  
The back of  
a
WARNING  
Do not place any heavy objects on  
the front passenger’s seat. The pres-  
sure sensors in the sensor mat could  
be damaged and the front passenger  
sensing system may not work prop-  
erly.  
According to accident statistics, children  
are safer when properly restrained in rear  
seating positions than in front seating posi-  
tions. Whenever possible, SUZUKI recom-  
mends you install child restraints in the  
rear seat.  
The front passenger sensing system is  
designed to enable the front passenger’s  
2-50  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
How the System Works  
In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will  
detect rapid deceleration and send a signal  
to the controller. If the controller judges  
that the deceleration represents a severe  
frontal crash, the controller will trigger the  
inflators. The controller also judges:  
• Whether the front air bags should deploy  
at reduced power or at full power accord-  
ing to crash severity.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The front passenger sensing system  
may not work properly in the follow-  
ing situations:  
• The occupant is sitting near the  
dashboard or is not sitting in the  
proper position.  
• Objects placed under the seat are  
pushing up on the seat cushion.  
• Do not spill any liquids on the seat.  
Liquids can damage the sensors  
under the front seat.  
• Have front passenger’s sensor mat  
inspected by your dealer after a  
collision.  
• Do not replace the front seats. If  
you replace them, the air bags and  
front passenger sensing system  
may not work properly.  
• Do not use a seat cover. If you use  
a seat cover, the front passenger  
sensing system may not work prop-  
erly.  
• Whether the front passenger’s front air  
bag should deploy or not based on clas-  
sification of the occupant of the front  
passenger’s seat.  
WARNING  
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator  
on the instrument panel turns on  
even though there is no occupant or  
an adult occupant in the front pas-  
senger’s seat, it means that some-  
thing may be wrong with the  
passenger sensing system. Have the  
system inspected by an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
Since your vehicle is equipped with side air  
bags, and side curtain air bags, crash sen-  
sors will detect a side collision, and if the  
controller judges that the side collision is  
severe enough, it will trigger the side air  
bag and side curtain air bag inflators.  
Your vehicle also has rollover sensors that  
work with the controller to predict whether  
a rollover may occur and if the controller  
judges that a severe rollover is about to  
occur, it triggers the side curtain air bag  
inflators on both sides of the vehicle.  
The inflators inflate the appropriate air  
bags with nitrogen or argon gas. The  
inflated air bags provide a cushion for your  
head (front air bags and side curtain air  
bags only) and upper body. The air bag  
inflates and deflates so quickly that you  
may not even realize that it has activated.  
2-51  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
The air bag will neither hinder your view  
nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.  
Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully  
in order to reduce the chance of serious or  
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable  
consequence of the quick inflation is that  
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as  
the facial area against a front air bag. Also,  
upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and  
some powder and smoke will be released.  
These conditions are not harmful and do  
not indicate a fire in the car. Be aware,  
however, that some air bag components  
may be hot for a while after inflation.  
• The driver should not lean over the  
steering wheel. The front passen-  
ger should not rest his or her body  
against the dashboard, or other-  
wise get too close to the dash-  
board. For vehicles with side air  
bags and side curtain air bags,  
occupants should not lean on or  
sleep against the door. In these sit-  
uations, the out-of-position occu-  
pant would be too close to an  
inflating air bag, and may suffer  
severe injury.  
65D610  
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper  
position for maximum protection when an  
air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far  
back as possible while still maintaining  
control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your  
seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the  
steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-  
pants should not lean on or sleep against  
the door. Please refer to the “Seat Adjust-  
ment” section and the “Seat Belts and  
Child Restraint Systems” section in the  
“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details on  
proper seat and seat belt adjustments.  
• Do not attach any objects to, or  
place any objects over, the steering  
wheel or dashboard. Do not place  
any objects between the air bag  
and the driver or front passenger.  
These objects may interfere with air  
bag operation or may be propelled  
by the air bag in the event of a  
crash. Either of these conditions  
may cause severe injury.  
(Continued)  
54G582  
2-52  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Scrapping a car that has an undeployed air  
bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,  
body repair shop or scrap yard for help  
with disposal.  
Servicing the Air Bag System  
If the air bags inflate, have the air bags and  
related components replaced by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
• For vehicles with side air bags, do  
not place seat covers on the front  
seats, because seat covers could  
restrict the air bag’s inflation. Also,  
do not place any cup holders or  
other objects on the door, as these  
objects could be propelled by the  
air bag in the event of a crash.  
Either of these conditions may  
cause severe injury.  
If it is necessary to modify the advanced  
front air bag system to accommodate a  
person with disabilities, owners in the con-  
tinental United States can call American  
Suzuki toll-free at 1-800-934-0934, or write  
to:  
If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and  
the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag  
controller could be damaged. If this hap-  
pens, have the air bag system inspected  
by the SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
Special procedures are required for servic-  
ing or replacing an air bag. For that reason,  
only an authorized SUZUKI dealer should  
be allowed to service or replace your air  
bags. Please remind anyone who services  
your SUZUKI that it has air bags.  
American Suzuki Motor Corporation  
Automotive Customer Relations  
3251 East Imperial Highway  
Brea, CA 92821-6795  
Note that even though your vehicle may be  
moderately damaged in a collision, the col-  
lision may not have been severe enough to  
trigger the front, side, or side curtain air  
bags to inflate. If your car sustains ANY  
front-end or side damage, have the air bag  
system inspected by an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in proper  
working order.  
If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada  
please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-  
tomer Relations Department by telephone  
at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in  
writing at:  
Service on or around air bag components  
or wiring must be performed only by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-  
vice could result in unintended air bag  
deployment or could render the air bags  
inoperative. Either of these two conditions  
may result in severe injury.  
Suzuki Canada Inc.  
Customer Relations  
100 East Beaver Creek Road  
Richmond Hill, On  
L4B 1J6  
To prevent damage or unintended inflation  
of the air bag system, be sure the battery  
is disconnected and the ignition switch has  
been in the “LOCK” position for at least 90  
seconds before performing any electrical  
service work on your SUZUKI. Do not  
touch air bag system components or wires.  
The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or  
yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow  
for easy identification.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic  
module which records information about  
the air bag system if the air bags deploy in  
a crash. The module records information  
about overall system status, which sensors  
activated the deployment, and whether the  
front seat belts were in use.  
2-53  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Instrument Cluster  
EXAMPLE  
1. Speedometer  
2
1
3
2. Tachometer  
3. Fuel gauge  
4. Temperature gauge  
5. Information display  
6. MODE/ILL knob  
7. TRIP knob  
8. Warning and indicator lights  
8
7
5
6
8
4
79K118  
2-54  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
For details about the seat belt reminder,  
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint  
Systems” in this section.  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light  
Warning and Indicator Lights  
Front Passenger’s Seat Belt  
Reminder Light  
WARNING  
It is absolutely essential that the  
driver and passengers wear their seat  
belts at all times. Persons who are  
not wearing seat belts have a much  
greater risk of injury if an accident  
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-  
ling your seat belt before putting the  
key in the ignition.  
52D305  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle  
has been equipped with a tire pressure  
monitoring system (TPMS) that uses a low  
tire pressure warning light to inform you  
when one or more of your tires is signifi-  
cantly under-inflated.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-  
ing light comes on briefly so you can check  
that the light is working.  
66J246  
The front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
light is located in the center of the instru-  
ment panel. If there is a passenger in the  
front seat and the front passenger’s seat  
belt is unbuckled about 10 seconds after  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position, this light will come on and then  
blink. When the light comes on, a buzzer  
will also sound intermittently for about 6  
seconds. The reminder will repeat several  
times under certain conditions until the  
front passenger’s seat belt is buckled. After  
repeating several times, the reminder will  
be canceled even if the front passenger’s  
seat belt remains unbuckled.  
When the low tire pressure warning light is  
lit, one or more of your tires is significantly  
under-inflated. You should stop and check  
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate  
them to the proper pressure as indicated  
on the vehicle’s tire information placard.  
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire  
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to  
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces  
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may  
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping  
ability. Each tire, including the spare,  
should be checked at least once a month  
when cold and set to the recommended  
2-55  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
inflation pressure as specified in the vehi-  
cle placard and owner’s manual.  
WARNING  
The low tire pressure warning light is also  
used to inform you of a TPMS malfunction.  
When the system detects a malfunction,  
this light will flash for approximately one  
minute and then remain continuously illu-  
minated. This sequence will be repeated  
approximately ten minutes after subse-  
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-  
function exists.  
The load rating of your tires is  
reduced at lower inflation pressures.  
If your tires become even moderately  
under-inflated, the vehicle load may  
exceed the load rating of the tires,  
which can lead to tire failure. The low  
tire pressure warning light will not  
alert you of this condition. The warn-  
ing light will only come on when one  
or more of your tires become signifi-  
cantly under-inflated. Check and  
adjust your tire inflation pressure at  
least once a month. Refer to “Tires”  
in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-  
NANCE” section.  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
comes on and stays on, reduce your  
speed and avoid abrupt steering and  
braking. Stop in a safe place as soon  
as possible and check your tires.  
• If you have a flat tire, replace it with  
the spare tire. Refer to “Jacking  
Instructions” in the “EMERGENCY  
SERVICE”  
section.  
Refer  
to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”  
for instructions on how to restore  
normal operation of the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system after you  
have had a flat tire.  
NOTE:  
The low tire pressure warning light may not  
come on immediately if you have a sudden  
loss of air pressure.  
• If one or more of your tires is  
under-inflated, adjust the inflation  
pressure in all of your tires to the  
recommended inflation pressure as  
soon as possible.  
Be aware that driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire can cause  
the tire to overheat and can lead to  
tire failure, and may affect steering  
control and brake effectiveness. This  
could lead to an accident, resulting in  
severe injury or death.  
WARNING  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
does not come on when the ignition  
is turned to the “ON” position, or  
comes on and blinks while driving  
there may be a problem with the tire  
pressure monitoring system. Have  
your vehicle inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the light  
turns off after blinking, indicating  
that the monitoring system has  
recovered, make sure to have an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer check the  
system.  
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”  
in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion for additional details on the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system. Refer to “Tires” in  
the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
2-56  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
section for information on maintaining  
proper tire pressure.  
NOTE:  
Because the disc brake system is self-  
adjusting, the fluid level will drop as the  
brake pads become worn.  
WARNING  
Remember that stopping distance  
may be longer, you may have to push  
harder on the pedal, and the pedal  
may go down farther than normal.  
Brake System Warning Light  
Replenishing the brake fluid reservoir is  
considered normal periodic maintenance.  
2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and  
stopping on the shoulder of the road.  
3) If you determine that it is safe, drive  
cautiously at low speed to the nearest  
dealer for repairs,  
65D477  
This light comes on briefly when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.  
The light also comes on under the follow-  
ing conditions: 1) when the parking brake  
is engaged, and 2) when the fluid in the  
brake fluid reservoir falls below the speci-  
fied level. The light should go out after fully  
releasing the parking brake, if the fluid  
level in the brake fluid reservoir is ade-  
quate.  
or  
4) Have the vehicle towed to the nearest  
dealer for repairs.  
WARNING  
If any of the following conditions  
occur, you should immediately ask  
your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the  
brake system.  
• If the brake system warning light  
does not go out after the parking  
brake has been fully released.  
• If the brake system warning light  
does not come on when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the “ON”  
position.  
If the brake system warning light comes on  
while you are driving the vehicle, it may  
mean that there is something wrong with  
the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,  
you should:  
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.  
• If the brake system warning light  
comes on at any time during vehi-  
cle operation.  
2-57  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
®
details on how to reactivate the ESP sys-  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
Warning Light  
SLIP Indicator Light  
tems, refer to “SLIP Indicator Light” in the  
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
®
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
®
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
79K019  
WARNING  
®
65D529  
ESP is a registered trademark of Daimler  
AG.  
®
The ESP systems cannot prevent  
accidents. Always drive carefully.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working. If  
the light stays on, or comes on when driv-  
ing, there may be something wrong with  
the ABS.  
This light blinks 5 times per second when  
one of the following systems is activated.  
• Stability control system  
Traction control system  
If the ABS light and the brake system  
warning light stay on, or come on simulta-  
neously when driving, then there may be  
something wrong with both the rear brake  
proportioning valve function and anti-lock  
function of the ABS system.  
• Hill descent control system (if equipped)  
If this light blinks, drive carefully.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working. If  
the light stays on, or comes on when driv-  
ing and remains on, there may be some-  
If one of these happens, have the system  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. If the  
ABS becomes inoperative, the brake sys-  
tem will function as an ordinary brake sys-  
tem that has no ABS.  
®
thing wrong with the ESP systems (other  
than ABS). You should have the system  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
For details of the ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock  
Brake system (ABS)” in the “OPERATING  
YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
NOTE:  
When you disconnect and re-connect the  
®
battery, ESP system functions other than  
ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-  
tor light will blink 1 time per second. For  
2-58  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
systems (other than ABS) will turn on  
automatically and the light will go out.  
• If your vehicle is equipped with a hill  
descent control system and a hill hold  
control system, these systems will not be  
turned off when the “ESP OFF” switch is  
“ESP” (Electronic Stability  
Program) Warning Light  
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light  
®
pushed to turn off the ESP systems.  
®
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
66J032  
®
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
66J031  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working.  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working. If  
the light stays on, or comes on when driv-  
ing, there may be something wrong with  
When the “ESP OFF” switch is pushed to  
®
turn off the ESP systems (other than  
ABS), the “ESP OFF” light comes on and  
stays on.  
®
the ESP systems (other than ABS). You  
should have the system inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
NOTE:  
®
• If the vehicle speed is greater than  
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the  
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
®
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will turn  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
on automatically and the light will go out.  
• When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
NOTE:  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when this light  
comes on.  
canceled automatically. The light will  
come on and stay on.  
®
• If the ESP systems operate continu-  
ously such as when driving on slippery  
roads, the traction control functions of  
®
the ESP systems may be canceled  
temporarily to avoid overheating the  
brake pads, and the light will come on.  
®
After a short period of time, the ESP  
2-59  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
Hill descent control Indicator Light  
Oil Pressure Light  
Charging Light  
79K050  
50G051  
50G052  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working.  
This light comes on when the ignition  
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and  
goes out when the engine is started. The  
light will come on and remain on if there is  
insufficient oil pressure. If the light comes  
on when driving, pull off the road as soon  
as you can and stop the engine. Check the  
oil level and add oil if necessary. If there is  
enough oil, the lubrication system should  
be inspected by your SUZUKI dealer  
before you drive the vehicle again.  
This light comes on when the ignition  
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and  
goes out when the engine is started. The  
light will come on and remain on if there is  
something wrong with the battery charging  
system. If the light comes on when the  
engine is running, the charging system  
should be inspected immediately by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
When you push the hill descent control  
switch and the hill descent control operat-  
ing conditions are fulfilled, the hill descent  
control indicator comes on. If the hill  
descent control indicator blinks, the hill  
descent control will not be activated.  
For details of the hill descent control sys-  
tem, refer to “Hill descent control System”  
in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
• If you operate the engine with this  
light on, severe engine damage can  
result.  
• Do not rely on the Oil Pressure  
Light to indicate the need to add  
oil. Be sure to periodically check  
the engine oil level.  
2-60  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light  
“AIR BAG” Light  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
60G049  
63J030  
65D530  
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled when  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position, this light will come on and then  
blink. When the light comes on, a buzzer  
will also sound intermittently for about 6  
seconds. The reminder will repeat several  
times under certain conditions until the  
driver’s seat belt is buckled. After repeating  
several times, the reminder will be can-  
celed even if the driver’s seat belt remains  
unbuckled.  
This light monitors inflators, crash sensors,  
seat belt pretensioners, the front passen-  
ger sensing system, and corresponding  
electrical circuits.  
This light blinks for several seconds when  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position so you can check if the light is  
working. The light will come on and stay on  
if there is a problem in the air bag system  
or the seat belt pretensioner system.  
Your vehicle has a computer-controlled  
emission control system. A malfunction  
indicator light is provided on the instrument  
panel to indicate when it is necessary to  
have the emission control system serviced.  
The malfunction indicator light comes on  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position to let you know the light is  
working and goes out when the engine is  
started.  
If the malfunction indicator light comes on  
or blinks when the engine is running, ser-  
vice to the emission control system is nec-  
essary. Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI  
dealer to have the emission control system  
serviced right away and avoid hard accel-  
eration until the service is performed.  
WARNING  
For details about the seat belt reminder,  
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint  
Systems” in this section.  
If the “AIR BAG” light does not blink  
when the ignition switch is turned to  
the “ON” position or stays on or  
comes on when driving, the air bag  
system or the seat belt pretensioner  
system (if equipped) may not work  
WARNING  
It is absolutely essential that the  
driver and passengers wear their seat  
belts at all times. Persons who are  
not wearing seat belts have a much  
greater risk of injury if an accident  
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-  
ling your seat belt before putting the  
key in the ignition.  
properly.  
Have  
both  
systems  
CAUTION  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Continuing to drive the vehicle when  
the malfunction indicator light is on  
or blinking can cause permanent  
damage to the vehicle’s emission  
control system, and can affect fuel  
economy and driveability.  
2-61  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
NOTE:  
Open Door Warning Light  
“CRUISE” Indicator Light  
(if equipped)  
If the fuel filler cap is not installed fully, the  
electrical system gets wet (such as by driv-  
ing through a deep puddle of water) or the  
fuel tank gets nearly empty, the malfunc-  
tion indicator lamp may come on. If so, the  
lamp will go off after driving a few times  
after the fuel filler cap is installed fully, the  
electrical system dries out or the fuel tank  
is filled.  
54G391  
52D113  
This light remains on until all doors (includ-  
ing the tailgate) are completely closed.  
When the cruise control system is on, this  
light will be on.  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
NOTE:  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when this light  
comes on.  
“SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)  
54G343  
If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank  
immediately.  
65D474  
When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by  
the cruise control system, this light will be  
on.  
NOTE:  
The activation point of this light varies  
depending on road conditions (for exam-  
ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions  
because of fuel moving in the tank.  
NOTE:  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when this light  
comes on.  
2-62  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
Keyless Start System Indicator  
Light (if equipped)  
Turn Signal Indicators  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)  
Indicator Light (if equipped)  
50G055  
62J041  
60B245  
When you turn on the left or right turn sig-  
nals, the corresponding green arrow on the  
instrument panel will flash along with the  
respective turn signal lights.  
When you turn on the hazard warning  
switch, both arrows will flash along with all  
of the turn signal lights.  
When you push the ignition switch for vehi-  
cle with the keyless start system, this light  
will come on in blue or red. If this light  
comes on in blue, you can turn the ignition  
switch without using an ignition key. If this  
light comes on in red, you cannot turn the  
ignition switch without using an ignition  
key. For details, refer to “Ignition Switch” in  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
With the D.R.L. system, the headlights  
light, but are dimmer than the low beam,  
when the following three conditions are all  
met. Whenever the D.R.L. system is oper-  
ating, the D.R.L. indicator light remains on.  
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation  
1) The engine is running.  
2) The parking brake is released.  
3) The headlights are off, or the lighting  
switch is in the “AUTO” position and it is  
light around the light sensor.  
High Beam Indicator Light  
If this light blinks in red, it reminds you that  
the remote controller is not in the vehicle.  
For details, refer to “Keyless Start System  
Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System  
Transmitter” in this section.  
50G056  
This indicator comes on when headlight  
high beams are turned on.  
2-63  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
If the indicators (all lights) continue to blink,  
there is a problem in the transfer system  
and you should have your vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Illumination Indicator Light  
Transfer Position Indicator Light  
(if equipped)  
NOTE:  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when the transfer  
system is operated, or has a problem.  
64J045  
This indicator light comes on while the  
position lights, tail lights and/or the head-  
lights are on.  
Master Warning Indicator Light  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
64J044  
These indicators show the 4WD operating  
mode as described below. When the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position,  
these lights come on briefly to let you know  
that the lights are working.  
78K049  
This light blinks or comes on for several  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the “ON” position so you can check if the  
light is working.  
(1): Neutral  
(2): 4-wheel drive high range center differ-  
ential lock mode  
When the information display shows warn-  
ing and indicator messages, this indicator  
light may also come on or blink.  
(2) & (3): 4-wheel drive low range center  
differential lock mode  
For details, refer to “Information Display” in  
this section.  
No indicators: 4-wheel drive high range  
mode  
For details, refer to “Using the Transfer  
Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-  
CLE” section.  
2-64  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
Speedometer  
Tachometer  
Fuel Gauge  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
(2)  
(1)  
79K119  
78K039  
64J052  
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed  
in km/h and mph.  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in  
revolutions per minute.  
This gauge gives an approximate indica-  
tion of the amount of fuel in the fuel tank.  
“F” stands for full and “E” stands for empty.  
If the indicator gets off the graduation of  
“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank as  
soon as possible.  
CAUTION  
Never drive with the engine speed  
indicator in the red zone or severe  
engine damage can result.  
When downshifting to a lower gear,  
make sure not to operate with exces-  
sive revolution speeds of the engine.  
NOTE:  
The indicator moves a little depending on  
road conditions (for example, slope or  
curve) and driving conditions because of  
fuel moving in the tank.  
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,  
fill the fuel tank immediately.  
2-65  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BEFORE DRIVING  
NOTE:  
Temperature Gauge  
Brightness Control  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when this light  
comes on.  
CAUTION  
Avoid driving with an extremely low  
fuel level. Running out of fuel could  
cause the engine to misfire, damag-  
ing the catalytic converter.  
NOTE:  
The activation point of the low fuel warning  
light (1) varies depending on road condi-  
tions (for example, slope or curve) and  
driving conditions because of fuel moving  
in the tank.  
(1)  
64J053  
79K120  
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position, this gauge indicates the engine  
coolant temperature. Under normal driving  
conditions, the indicator should stay within  
the normal, acceptable temperature range  
between “H” and “C”. If the indicator  
approaches “H”, overheating is indicated.  
Follow the instructions in the “If the Engine  
Overheats” of “EMERGENCY SERVICE”  
section.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the instrument panel lights  
come on.  
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler  
door is located on the right side of the vehi-  
cle.  
Your vehicle has a system to automatically  
dim the brightness of the instrument panel  
lights when the position lights or headlights  
are on.  
You can change the brightness of the  
instrument panel lights regardless of  
whether the position lights or headlights  
are off or on.  
CAUTION  
Continuing to drive the vehicle when  
engine overheating is indicated can  
result in severe engine damage.  
To increase the brightness of the instru-  
ment panel lights, turn the brightness con-  
trol knob (1) clockwise.  
To reduce the brightness of the instrument  
panel lights, turn the brightness control  
knob (1) counterclockwise.  
2-66  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
EXAMPLE  
The information display shows the follow-  
ing information.  
Information Display  
(if equipped)  
The information display is shown when the  
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.  
Display (A)  
A/T selector position indicator (for auto-  
matic transmission)  
Display (B)  
Warning and Indicator Messages/Fuel  
Consumption/Driving  
Speed  
79K062  
Range/Average  
NOTE:  
(A)  
(C)  
(B)  
• If you do not turn the brightness control  
knob within about 5 seconds of activat-  
ing the brightness control display, the  
brightness control display will be can-  
celed automatically.  
• When you reconnect the battery, the  
brightness of the instrument panel lights  
will be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-  
ness according to your preference.  
(D)  
Display (C)  
Trip meter/Thermometer  
Display (D)  
Odometer  
(1)  
(3)  
(2)  
79K048  
NOTE:  
(1) TRIP knob  
(2) MODE/ILL knob  
(3) Information display  
If you select the lowest brightness level  
when the parking lights or headlights are  
on, the instrument panel lights other than  
meter lights are turned off.  
79K063  
NOTE:  
• When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the message shown in the  
above illustration will appear on the dis-  
play for several seconds.  
• Some warning and indicator messages  
may appear on the display when the igni-  
tion switch is in the “ACC” or the “LOCK”  
position.  
2-67  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
To switch the display indication, push the  
MODE/ILL knob (2) quickly.  
A/T Selector Position  
(for automatic transmission)  
EXAMPLE  
NOTE:  
EXAMPLE  
(a)  
The value of fuel consumption, driving  
range and average speed shown in the dis-  
play are affected by conditions such as the  
following;  
• road condition  
• surrounding traffic condition  
• driving condition  
• vehicle condition  
• a malfunction which causes the malfunc-  
tion indicator light to come on or blink  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
79K121  
The display (A) shows the automatic trans-  
mission selector position.  
Fuel Consumption/Driving Range/  
Average Speed  
When there are no warning or indicator  
messages on the display (B), you can  
select one of the following five indications  
to appear on the display, instantaneous  
fuel consumption, average fuel consump-  
tion, driving range, average speed, or no  
indication.  
79K065  
(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption  
(b) Average fuel consumption  
(c) Driving range  
(d) Average speed  
(e) No indication  
2-68  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
Instantaneous fuel consumption  
You can select when the value of average  
fuel consumption is reset from among the  
following three methods;  
• Reset after refuel: the value of average  
fuel consumption will be reset automati-  
cally by refueling.  
• Reset with trip A: the value of average  
fuel consumption will be reset automati-  
cally by resetting trip meter A.  
• Reset manually: the value of average  
fuel consumption will be reset by push-  
ing and holding the MODE/ILL knob (2)  
when the display indicates the average  
fuel consumption.  
Driving range  
If you selected instantaneous fuel con-  
sumption the last time you drove the vehi-  
cle, the display does not show the bar  
graph when the ignition switch is turned to  
the “ON” position. The display shows the  
bar graph only when the vehicle is moving.  
If you selected driving range the last time  
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates  
“---” for a few seconds and then indicates  
the current driving range when the ignition  
switch is turned to the “ON” position.  
The driving range shown in the display is  
the approximate distance you can drive  
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on  
current driving conditions.  
Average fuel consumption  
If you selected average fuel consumption  
the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-  
play shows the last value of average fuel  
consumption from previous driving when  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position. Unless you reset the value of  
average fuel consumption, the display indi-  
cates the value of average fuel consump-  
tion which includes average fuel  
consumption during previous driving.  
When the remaining fuel in fuel tank  
reaches a low level, the display “---” will  
appear.  
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill  
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the  
value of driving range shown in the display.  
To change when the value of average fuel  
consumption is reset, refer to “Setting  
Mode” later in this section.  
As the driving range after refueling is cal-  
culated based on the most recent driving  
condition, the value is different each time  
you refuel.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
If you add only a small amount of fuel  
when you select “Reset after refuel”, the  
average fuel consumption value may not  
be reset.  
When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal to the battery, the value of average  
fuel consumption will be shown after driv-  
ing for a while.  
NOTE:  
• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in  
the “ON” position, the driving range may  
not indicate the correct value.  
• When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal to the battery, the value of driving  
range will be shown after driving for a  
while.  
2-69  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Average speed  
Odometer  
Odometer/Trip meter/Thermometer  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the display (C) shows one of  
the following three indications, trip meter A,  
trip meter B and thermometer. Also, the  
display (D) shows the odometer reading.  
If you selected average speed the last time  
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates  
the last value of average speed from previ-  
ous driving when the ignition switch is  
turned to the “ON” position. Unless you  
reset the value of average speed, the dis-  
play indicates the value of average speed  
which includes average speed during pre-  
vious driving.  
The odometer records the total distance  
the vehicle has been driven.  
CAUTION  
Keep track of your odometer reading  
and check the maintenance schedule  
regularly for required services.  
Increased wear or damage to certain  
parts can result from failure to per-  
form required services at the proper  
mileage intervals.  
EXAMPLE  
(f)  
(g)  
(h)  
(i)  
To reset the value of average speed, push  
and hold the MODE/ILL knob (2) for about  
2 seconds when the display indicates an  
average speed. The display shows “---”  
and then indicates a new average speed  
after driving for a short time.  
Trip meter  
The trip meter can be used to measure the  
distance traveled on short trips or between  
fuel stops.  
NOTE:  
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B  
independently.  
When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal to the battery, the value of average  
speed will be shown after driving for a  
while.  
79K122  
To reset the trip meter to zero, push and  
hold the TRIP knob (1) for about 2 seconds  
when the display shows the trip meter.  
(f) Trip meter A  
(g) Trip meter B  
(h) Thermometer  
(i) Odometer  
To switch the display indication (C), push  
the TRIP knob (1) quickly.  
2-70  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
Thermometer  
The thermometer indicates the outside  
temperature.  
Setting Mode  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
79K069  
79K068  
NOTE:  
Current settings appear with reversed text  
and background colors.  
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position and the vehicle is stationary, you  
can enter the setting mode of the informa-  
tion display by pushing and holding the  
MODE/ILL knob (2) for more than 3 sec-  
onds.  
79K067  
If the outside temperature nears freezing,  
the message shown in the above illustra-  
tion will appear on the display.  
NOTE:  
• If you push and hold the MODE/ILL knob  
to enter the setting mode when the dis-  
play (B) shows average fuel consump-  
tion or average speed, the value will be  
reset simultaneously. If you do not want  
to reset the value, push the MODE/ILL  
knob quickly to switch the indication of  
the display.  
NOTE:  
To select the setting that you want to  
change, turn the MODE/ILL knob (2) left  
or right.  
To change the setting, push the MODE/  
ILL knob (2).  
To exit the setting mode, select “Back”  
and push the MODE/ILL knob (2).  
The outside temperature indication is not  
the actual outside temperature when driv-  
ing at low speed, or when stopped.  
• If you turn the ignition switch or start to  
move the vehicle when the display  
shows the setting mode, the setting  
mode will be canceled automatically.  
2-71  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Distance units  
the message will appear again after 5  
seconds.  
Warning and Indicator Messages  
The display shows the warning and indica-  
tor messages to let you know about certain  
vehicle problems.  
You can change the units odo/trip meter  
distance is displayed in.  
NOTE:  
A tone may also sound to alert you.  
When you change the units odo/trip meter  
distance is displayed in, the trip meter will  
be reset automatically.  
If warning and indicator messages appear  
on the display, follow the messages.  
Master warning indicator  
Fuel economy units  
You can change the units that fuel con-  
sumption is displayed in.  
Language  
You can change the language of the infor-  
mation display.  
78K049  
Avg. fuel economy reset  
You can change when the value of average  
fuel consumption is reset.  
When the display shows warning and indi-  
cator messages, the master warning indi-  
cator may also come on or blink.  
Temperature units  
You can change the units that temperature  
is displayed in.  
NOTE:  
• When the problem that causes a mes-  
sage to appear is corrected, the mes-  
sage will disappear.  
• If a message is displayed, and other  
problems requiring a message occur, the  
message for each of the problems will be  
alternately displayed about every 5 sec-  
onds.  
• When you push and hold the MODE/ILL  
knob for about 2 seconds while a mes-  
sage is displayed, the message will dis-  
appear temporarily. If the problem that  
caused the message is not corrected,  
NOTE:  
When you change the units that tempera-  
ture is displayed in, the air conditioning  
system temperature display units will be  
changed automatically.  
Default setting  
If you select “YES” and push the MODE/  
ILL knob (2), all settings will be reinitial-  
ized.  
2-72  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Warning and Indicator messages  
Warning and Indicator message  
Master Warning  
Indicator  
Sound  
Ding  
Cause and Remedy  
Blinks  
Any door (including the tailgate) is open when the vehicle  
is moving.  
Close all doors completely.  
79K070  
Off  
Off  
Any door (including the tailgate) is open when the vehicle  
is stopped. (#1)  
Close all doors completely.  
79K070  
79K071  
79K072  
79K073  
®
Blinks  
Blinks  
Blinks  
Ding  
Ding  
There may be a problem with the ESP system.  
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
There may be problem with the hill descent control sys-  
tem and the hill hold control system.  
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Continuous  
Beep  
Front position lights, license plate lights, instrument lights  
and/or head lights are left on.  
Turn the lighting switch to the “OFF” position.  
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.  
2-73  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Master Warning  
Indicator  
Warning and Indicator message  
Sound  
Cause and Remedy  
Blinks  
Off  
There may be a problem with the 4WD system.  
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
79K074  
Off  
Ding  
Off  
Fuel is low. (#1)  
Fill the fuel tank immediately.  
79K075  
79K067  
Off  
The outside temperature is near freezing. The road may  
be icy. (#1)  
You should drive carefully.  
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.  
NOTE:  
• When you operate the transfer switch (if equipped), the information display may show messages other than those in the above chart.  
Refer to “Using the Transfer Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.  
• When you operate the ESP OFF switch (if equipped), the information display may show messages other than those in the above chart.  
®
Refer to “Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.  
2-74  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlled  
by three main systems: the Lighting switch,  
the Auto-On Headlight System (when the  
lighting switch is in the “AUTO” position)  
and the Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)  
system.  
Lighting Control Lever  
(4)  
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
79K014  
65D611  
WARNING  
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-  
ate controls by reaching through the  
steering wheel.  
52D183  
2-75  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
Lighting Operation  
The three systems work together to operate your lights as shown in the following chart:  
E/G: Engine  
IG: Ignition switch  
ON: Lights ON  
LIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).  
DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).  
(4)  
(3)  
IG OFF  
IG ON  
E/G OFF E/G RUNNING  
Lighting  
switch  
position  
Main lights to  
be operated  
E/G OFF  
LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK  
D.R.L.  
ON  
ON  
(2)  
(1)  
Position lights,  
Tail lights  
(1) OFF  
(2) AUTO  
(3)  
79K015  
Head lights  
D.R.L.  
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob  
on the end of the lever. There are four posi-  
tions:  
ON  
Position lights,  
Tail lights  
ON  
ON  
OFF (1)  
Head lights  
D.R.L.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
All lights are off.  
ON  
AUTO (2)  
Position lights,  
Tail lights  
Refer to “Auto-On Headlight system” for  
details.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Head lights  
D.R.L.  
(3)  
Front position lights, tail-lights, license  
plate light and instrument lights are on, but  
headlights are off.  
Position lights,  
Tail lights  
(4)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Head lights  
(4)  
Front position lights, tail-lights, license  
plate light, instrument lights and head  
lights are on.  
2-76  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Auto-On Headlight System  
WARNING  
HIGH  
LOW  
It takes about 5 seconds for the light  
sensor to react to a change in light-  
ing conditions. To help avoid an acci-  
dent due to reduced visibility, turn on  
your headlights before driving into a  
tunnel, parking structure or the like.  
(5)  
NOTE:  
This system does not react to all types of  
ambient light. As the sensor is infrared  
type, it will not work correctly with ambient  
lights that do not contain infrared rays.  
PASS  
79K016  
66J026  
With the headlights on, push the lever for-  
ward to switch to the high beams or pull  
the lever toward you to switch to the low  
beams. When the high beams are on, a  
light on the instrument panel will come on.  
To momentarily activate the high beams as  
a passing signal, pull the lever slightly  
toward you and release it when you have  
completed the signal.  
The Auto-on headlight system automati-  
cally turns on all lights that are operated by  
the lighting control lever on the steering  
column, when the following four conditions  
are all met.  
Conditions for Auto-on headlight system  
operation:  
1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).  
2) The lighting control lever in the “AUTO”  
position.  
3) The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
4) The parking brake is released.  
This system is operated by the signal from  
the light sensor (5) on the right end of the  
instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor  
(5). If you do, the system will not work cor-  
rectly.  
2-77  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)  
System  
Front Fog Light Switch  
(if equipped)  
Turn Signal Control Lever  
The headlights light, but are dimmer than  
the low beam, when the following three  
conditions are all met. Also, the D.R.L. indi-  
cator light on the instrument panel comes  
on.  
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation:  
1) The engine is running.  
2) The parking brake is released.  
3) The headlights are off, or the lighting  
switch in the “AUTO” position and it is  
light around the light sensor.  
NOTE:  
65D611  
Be sure to turn the headlights on at night  
or at any time of the day when driving or  
weather conditions require the headlights  
to operate at full brightness and the tail-  
lights to be on.  
64J058  
WARNING  
The front fog light comes on when the fog  
light switch is pushed in with:  
• the headlights are on and the beams set  
to the low beam position, or  
• the auto-on headlight system on and the  
beams set to the low beam position.  
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-  
ate controls by reaching through the  
steering wheel.  
Lights “On” reminder  
A buzzer sounds to remind you to turn off  
the lights if they are left on when the igni-  
tion key is removed and the driver’s door is  
opened.  
NOTE:  
The warning and indicator message and  
the illumination indicator light will be shown  
on the information display when this  
reminder is activated.  
2-78  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BEFORE DRIVING  
Turn Signal Operation  
Hazard Warning Switch  
Windshield Wiper and Washer  
Lever  
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-  
tion, move the lever up or down to activate  
the right or left turn signals.  
64J054  
Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-  
vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig-  
nal lights and both turn signal indicators  
will flash simultaneously. To turn off the  
lights, push the switch again.  
Use the hazard warning lights to warn  
other traffic during emergency parking or  
when your vehicle could otherwise become  
a traffic hazard.  
65D611  
79K017  
WARNING  
Normal turn signal  
Move the lever all the way upward or down-  
ward to signal. When the turn is com-  
pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever  
will return to its normal position.  
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-  
ate controls by reaching through the  
steering wheel.  
Lane change signal  
Some times, such as changing lanes, the  
steering wheel is not turned far enough to  
cancel the turn signal. For convenience,  
you can flash the turn signal by moving the  
lever part way and holding it there. The  
lever will return to its normal position when  
you release it.  
2-79  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
BEFORE DRIVING  
Windshield Wipers  
EXAMPLE  
Windshield Washer  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
MIST  
OFF  
INT  
LO  
HI  
63J302  
63J301  
63J303  
If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME”  
control, turn the control forward or rear-  
ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera-  
tion to the desired interval.  
To turn the windshield wipers on, move the  
lever up and down to one of the four oper-  
ating positions. In the “INT” position (if  
equipped), the wipers operate intermit-  
tently. The “INT” position is very convenient  
for driving in mist or light rain. In the “LO”  
position, the wipers operate at a steady  
low speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers  
operate at a steady high speed. To turn off  
the wipers, move the lever back to the  
“OFF” position.  
To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the  
lever toward you. The windshield wipers  
will automatically turn on at low speed if  
they are not already on and if the “INT”  
position is equipped.  
WARNING  
• To prevent windshield icing in cold  
weather, turn on the defroster to  
heat the windshield before and dur-  
ing windshield washer use.  
• Do not use radiator antifreeze in  
the windshield washer reservoir. It  
can severely impair visibility when  
sprayed on the windshield, and can  
also damage your vehicle’s paint.  
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”  
position, the windshield wipers will turn on  
continuously at low speed.  
2-80  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
EXAMPLE  
To help prevent damage to wind-  
shield wiper and washer system  
components, you should take the fol-  
lowing precautions:  
• Do not continue to hold in the lever  
when there is no windshield  
washer fluid being sprayed or the  
washer motor can be damaged.  
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from  
a dry windshield with the wipers or  
you can damage the windshield  
and the wiper blades. Always wet  
the windshield with washer fluid  
before operating the wipers.  
Clear ice or snow from the rear win-  
dow and rear wiper blade before  
using the rear wiper. Accumulated ice  
or snow could prevent the wiper  
blade from moving, causing damage  
to the wiper motor.  
Washer  
Wiper  
Intermittent wiper  
63J304  
To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear  
wiper switch on the end of the lever for-  
ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle is  
equipped with the “INT” position, the rear  
wiper operates intermittently when you  
twist the switch forward to the “INT” posi-  
tion. To turn the rear wiper off, twist the  
switch rearward to the “OFF” position.  
• Clear ice or packed snow from the  
wiper blades before using the wip-  
ers.  
• Check the washer fluid level regu-  
larly. Check it often when the  
weather is bad.  
• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir  
3/4 full during cold weather to allow  
room for expansion if the tempera-  
ture falls low enough to freeze the  
solution.  
To spray window washer fluid, twist the  
switch rearward from the “OFF” position, or  
twist the switch forward from the “ON” posi-  
tion. The rear wiper will turn on automati-  
cally while spraying the window washer  
fluid.  
2-81  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Tilt Steering Lock Lever  
Horn  
Rear Window Defroster and  
Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Defroster (if equipped) Switch  
EXAMPLE  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
(1)  
78K074  
When the rear window is fogged, push this  
switch to clear the window.  
EXAMPLE  
64J037  
78K130  
The lock lever is located under the steering  
column. To adjust the steering wheel  
height:  
Press the horn pad on the steering wheel  
to sound the horn. The horn will sound with  
the ignition switch in any position.  
1) Pull up the lock lever to unlock the  
steering column.  
(2)  
2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired  
height and lock the steering column by  
pulling down the lock lever.  
3) Try moving the steering wheel up and  
down to make sure it is securely locked  
in position.  
64J258  
WARNING  
If the outside rearview mirror has the mark  
(2), it is also equipped with the outside  
rearview mirrors defroster. When you push  
the switch (1), both the outside rearview  
mirrors defroster and the rear window  
defroster will operate simultaneously.  
Never attempt to adjust the steering  
wheel height while the vehicle is  
moving or you could lose control of  
the vehicle.  
2-82  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BEFORE DRIVING  
An indicator light will be lit when the  
defroster is on. The defroster will only work  
when the engine is running. To turn off the  
defroster, push the switch (1) again.  
CAUTION  
The rear window defroster and the  
outside rearview mirrors use a large  
amount of electricity. Be sure to turn  
off the defroster after the window has  
become clear.  
NOTE:  
• The defogger will work only when the  
engine is running.  
• The defogger will automatically turn off  
after the defogger remains on for 15 min-  
utes to prevent discharging of the bat-  
tery.  
2-83  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1  
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-2  
Ignition Switch ..................................................................... 3-3  
Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-7  
Pedals ................................................................................... 3-8  
Starting the Engine ............................................................. 3-9  
Engine Block Heater (if equipped) ..................................... 3-10  
Using the Transmission ..................................................... 3-11  
Using the Transfer Switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-15  
Cruise Control ..................................................................... 3-26  
Braking ................................................................................. 3-28  
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) ................................. 3-31  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
3
(if equipped) ......................................................................... 3-37  
60G408  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Exhaust Gas Warning: NO  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Exhaust Gas Warning  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Do not park with the engine run-  
ning for a long period of time, even  
in an open area. If it is necessary to  
sit for a short time in a parked vehi-  
cle with the engine running, make  
sure the air intake lever is set to  
“FRESH AIR” and the fan is at high  
speed.  
• Have the exhaust system inspected  
periodically for damage and leaks.  
Any damage or leaks should be  
repaired immediately.  
• Avoid operating the vehicle with  
the rear door, tailgate or rear win-  
dow open. If it is necessary to oper-  
ate the vehicle with the rear door,  
tailgate or rear window open, make  
sure the folding sunroof (if  
equipped) and all the windows are  
closed, and the fan is at high speed  
with the air intake selector set to  
“FRESH AIR”.  
52D334  
WARNING  
Avoid breathing exhaust gases.  
Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-  
oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is  
colorless and odorless. Since carbon  
monoxide is difficult to detect by  
itself, be sure to take the following  
precautions to help prevent carbon  
monoxide from entering your vehicle.  
• Do not leave the engine running in  
garages or other confined areas.  
(Continued)  
• To allow proper operation of your  
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep  
the air inlet grille in front of the  
windshield clear of snow, leaves or  
other obstructions at all times.  
• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear  
of snow and other material to help  
reduce the buildup of exhaust  
gases under the vehicle. This is  
particularly important when parked  
in blizzard conditions.  
(Continued)  
3-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Daily Inspection Checklist: NO  
Starting the Engine: 1  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and  
latched.  
ing for proper latch operation. See the  
item “All Latches, Hinges and Locks” of  
“CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic  
Daily Inspection Checklist  
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,  
brake lights and horn for proper opera-  
tion.  
Before Driving  
Maintenance  
Schedule”  
in  
the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for lubrication schedule.  
6) Lock all doors.  
7) Adjust the seat and adjustable head  
restraints (if equipped).  
8) Check the brake pedal and the parking  
brake lever.  
9) Adjust the mirrors.  
WARNING  
Make sure the hood is fully closed  
and latched before driving. If it is not,  
it can fly up unexpectedly during  
driving, obstructing your view and  
resulting in an accident.  
10)Make sure that you and all passengers  
have properly fastened your seat belts.  
11)Make sure that all warning lights come  
on as the key is turned to the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
Once a month, or each time you fill your  
fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a  
tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire  
pressure of the spare tire.  
12)Check all gauges.  
60A187S  
13)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM  
WARNING light turns off when the  
parking brake is released.  
1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights  
and reflectors are clean and unob-  
structed.  
2) Visually check the tires for the following  
points:  
– the depth of the tread groove  
– abnormal wear, cracks and damage  
– loose wheel nuts  
– existence of foreign material such as  
nails, stones, etc.  
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel  
tank, perform the following under-hood  
checks:  
1) Engine oil level  
2) Coolant level  
3) Brake fluid level  
4) Power steering (if equipped) fluid level  
5) Windshield washer fluid level  
6) Battery solution level  
Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE” section for details.  
3) Look for fluid, oil leaks.  
7) Hood latch operation  
Pull the hood release handle inside the  
vehicle. Make sure that you cannot  
open the hood all the way without  
releasing the secondary latch. Be sure  
to close the hood securely after check-  
NOTE:  
It is normal for water to drip from the air  
conditioning system after use.  
3-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting the Engine: 1  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Manual transmission  
Vehicle Without Keyless Start Sys-  
tem  
Ignition Switch  
EXAMPLE  
Push  
Turn to “LOCK”  
60A055  
65D611  
Manual transmission vehicles  
60B041  
You must push in the key to turn it to the  
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and  
prevents normal use of the steering  
wheel after the key is removed.  
The ignition switch has the following four  
positions:  
WARNING  
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-  
ate controls by reaching through the  
steering wheel.  
LOCK  
This is the normal parking position. It is the  
only position in which the key can be  
removed.  
Automatic transmission vehicles  
The gearshift lever must be in the “P”  
(Park) position to turn the key to the  
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and  
prevents normal use of the steering  
wheel and gearshift lever.  
It locks the ignition, and prevents normal  
use of the steering wheel after the key is  
removed.  
To release the steering lock, insert the key  
and turn it clockwise to one of the other  
positions. If you have trouble turning the  
key to unlock the steering, try turning the  
steering wheel slightly to the right or left  
while turning the key.  
3-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Starting the Engine: 1  
Engine Block Heater: 1  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
ACC  
Vehicle With Keyless Start System  
Accessories such as the radio can oper-  
ate, but the engine is off.  
(3)  
ON  
(4)  
(2)  
This is the normal operating position. All  
electrical systems are on.  
START  
This is the position for starting the engine  
using the starter motor. The key should be  
released from this position as soon as the  
engine starts.  
(1)  
EXAMPLE  
79K116  
Ignition key reminder  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the  
ignition switch when the driver’s door is  
opened.  
56KN076  
If the keyless start system blue indicator  
light illuminates on the instrument cluster,  
you can turn the ignition switch. If the red  
indicator light illuminates, you cannot turn  
the ignition switch.  
The ignition switch can be operated with-  
out using an ignition key when the remote  
controller is in an area of the vehicle other  
than the rear luggage area. To turn the  
ignition switch, first push in the switch.  
NOTE:  
• The ignition switch can be turned to the  
“ACC” position when the keyless start  
system blue indicator light illuminates.  
The blue indicator light will illuminate for  
several seconds when you push in the  
ignition switch and then will turn off to  
protect the system. In this case, you  
must release the ignition switch and  
push it in again to illuminate the blue  
indicator light.  
Manual transmission vehicle  
You must push in the ignition switch to  
turn it from the “LOCK” position to the  
“ACC” position. To return to the “LOCK”  
position from the “ACC” position, turn the  
ignition switch counterclockwise while  
pushing in the switch.  
Automatic transmission vehicle  
To turn the ignition switch, push the  
switch.  
• If the keyless start system red indicator  
light illuminates, the remote controller  
may not be in the vehicle or the battery  
3-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Block Heater: 1  
Using the Transmission: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
of the remote controller may be unreli-  
able.  
You can also turn the ignition switch by  
inserting the ignition key into the slot.  
The ignition switch has the following four  
positions:  
If you leave any of the doors open with the  
ignition switch in the “ACC” position for a  
while (and no key inserted), the engine  
may not start when you turn the ignition  
switch to “START”. If the engine does not  
start, close all doors completely or turn the  
ignition switch back to the “LOCK” position,  
then start the engine.  
NOTE:  
LOCK (1)  
• If the battery of the remote controller  
runs down or there are strong radio  
waves or noise, the operating range may  
be narrower or the remote controller may  
be inoperative.  
This is the normal parking position. It is the  
only position in which the key can be  
removed. It locks the ignition, and prevents  
normal use of the steering wheel.  
For vehicles with an automatic transmis-  
sion, the gearshift lever must be in the “P”  
(Park) position to turn the key to the  
“LOCK” position.  
• If the remote controller is too close to the  
door, it may not operate.  
• The ignition switch may not turn when  
the remote controller is on the instru-  
ment panel, in the glove box, in a stor-  
age compartment, in the sun visor or on  
the floor.  
To release the steering lock, turn the igni-  
tion switch clockwise to one of the other  
positions. If you have trouble turning the  
ignition switch to unlock the steering, try  
turning the steering wheel slightly to the  
right or left while turning the switch.  
CAUTION  
The remote controller is a sensitive  
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-  
aging the remote controller:  
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-  
ture or high temperature such as by  
leaving it on the dashboard under  
direct sunlight.  
• Keep the remote controller away  
from magnetic objects such as a  
television.  
Manual transmission vehicle  
You must push in the ignition switch to  
turn it from the “LOCK” position to the  
“ACC” position. To return to the “LOCK”  
position from the “ACC” position, turn the  
ignition switch counterclockwise while  
pushing in the switch.  
Automatic transmission vehicle  
To turn the ignition switch, push the  
switch.  
ACC (2)  
Accessories such as the radio can oper-  
ate, but the engine is off.  
3-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Transmission: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
ON (3)  
You can also turn the ignition switch by  
inserting the ignition key into the slot.  
This is the normal operating position. All  
electrical systems are on.  
START (4)  
This is the position for starting the engine  
using the starter motor. The switch should  
be released from this position as soon as  
the engine starts.  
Ignition switch reminder  
(When using the keyless start system)  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to return the ignition switch to the  
“LOCK” position if it is in the “ACC” position  
when the driver’s door is opened.  
(1)  
81A297S  
80JM139  
WARNING  
The ignition switch cap (1) is installed to  
make the ignition switch turn easily.  
If you use the ignition key to turn the igni-  
tion switch, remove the cap (1) by pinching  
both side of the cap and pull it out.  
• Never return the ignition switch to  
the “LOCK” position and remove  
the ignition key while the vehicle is  
moving. The steering wheel will  
lock and you will not be able to  
steer the vehicle.  
NOTE:  
(Continued)  
If you remove the cap, be careful not to  
lose it.  
Ignition key reminder  
(When using the ignition key)  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the  
ignition switch when the driver’s door is  
opened.  
3-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Transmission: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
cult to shift out of “P” when you are ready  
to drive the vehicle. When preparing to  
drive the vehicle, move the gearshift lever  
out of the “P” position before releasing the  
parking brake.  
Parking Brake Lever  
(Continued)  
EXAMPLE  
• Always return the ignition switch to  
the “LOCK” position and remove  
the ignition key and the remote  
controller (if equipped) when leav-  
ing the vehicle even if only for a  
short time. Also do not leave chil-  
dren or pets alone in a parked vehi-  
cle. Unattended children could  
cause accidental movement of the  
vehicle or could tamper with power  
windows or a power sunroof. Chil-  
dren or pets could also suffer from  
heatstroke in warm or hot weather,  
which could result in severe injury  
or even death.  
(1)  
WARNING  
• Never drive your vehicle with the  
parking brake set: rear brake effec-  
tiveness can be reduced from over-  
heating, brake life may be  
shortened or permanent brake  
damage may result.  
• If the parking brake does not hold  
the vehicle securely or does not  
fully release, have your vehicle  
inspected immediately by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
(2)  
(3)  
64J081  
(1) To set  
(2) To release  
(3) To release  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
The parking brake lever is located between  
the seats. To set the parking brake, hold  
the brake pedal down and pull the parking  
brake lever all the way up. To release the  
parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,  
pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,  
push the button on the end of the lever with  
your thumb and lower the lever to its origi-  
nal position.  
• Do not turn the starter motor for  
more than 15 seconds at a time. If  
the engine does not start, wait 15  
seconds before trying again. If the  
engine does not start after several  
attempts, check the fuel and igni-  
tion systems or consult your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
• Do not leave the ignition switch in  
the “ON” position if the engine is  
not running or the battery will dis-  
charge.  
Always set the parking brake fully  
before leaving your vehicle or it may  
move, causing injury or damage.  
When parking, make sure the gear-  
shift lever for manual transmission  
vehicles is in 1st gear or “R”  
(Reverse) and the gearshift lever for  
automatic transmission vehicles is in  
“P” (Park). Never leave the transfer  
lever (if equipped) in “N” (Neutral)  
when you are parked. Remember,  
even though the transmission is in  
gear or in Park, you must set the  
parking brake fully.  
For automatic transmission vehicles,  
always set the parking brake before mov-  
ing the gearshift lever to the “P” (Park)  
position. If you park on an incline and shift  
into “P” before you set the parking brake,  
the weight of the vehicle may make it diffi-  
3-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Transmission: 10  
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
Clutch Pedal (1)  
Pedals  
(For manual transmission)  
Manual transmission  
EXAMPLE  
The clutch pedal is used to disengage the  
drive to the wheels when starting the  
engine, stopping or shifting the gearshift  
lever or transfer lever (if equipped).  
Depressing the pedal disengages the  
clutch.  
Do not “ride” the brakes by applying  
them continuously or resting your  
foot on the pedal. This will result in  
overheating of the brakes which  
could cause unpredictable braking  
action, longer stopping distances or  
permanent brake damage.  
CAUTION  
Do not drive with your foot resting on  
the clutch pedal. It could result in  
excessive clutch wear, clutch dam-  
age, or unexpected loss of engine  
braking.  
Accelerator Pedal (3)  
This pedal controls the speed of the  
engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal  
increases power output and speed.  
(3)  
(2)  
(1)  
64J082  
Brake Pedal (2)  
Automatic transmission  
EXAMPLE  
Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with front  
and rear disc brakes. Depressing the brake  
pedal applies both sets of brakes.  
You may hear occasional brake squeal  
when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-  
mal condition caused by environmental  
factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.  
WARNING  
If brake squeal is excessive and  
occurs each time the brakes are  
applied, you should have the brakes  
checked by your SUZUKI dealer.  
(3)  
(2)  
64J083  
3-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE:  
1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engine  
again. Release the key and accelerator  
pedal when the engine starts.  
Starting the Engine  
Automatic transmission vehicles have a  
starter interlock device which is designed  
to keep the starter from operating if the  
transmission is in any of the drive posi-  
tions.  
Before Starting the Engine  
If the engine still does not start, try holding  
the accelerator pedal all the way to the  
floor while cranking. This should clear the  
engine if it is flooded.  
WARNING  
If you are unable to start the engine using  
this procedure, consult your SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Make sure that the parking brake is  
set fully and the transmission is in  
Neutral (or Park for vehicles with an  
automatic  
attempting to start the engine.  
transmission)  
before  
Starting a Warm Engine  
Use the same procedure as for “Starting a  
Cold Engine”.  
Starting a Cold Engine  
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,  
crank the engine by turning the ignition key  
to “START”. Release the key when the  
engine starts.  
64J140  
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.  
2) Manual Transmission – Shift into “N”  
(Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal  
all the way to the floor.  
CAUTION  
Hold the clutch pedal while starting the  
engine.  
Automatic Transmission – If the gear-  
shift lever is not in “P” (Park) position,  
shift into “P”. (If you need to re-start the  
engine while the vehicle is moving, shift  
into “N”.)  
• Stop turning the starter immedi-  
ately after the engine has started or  
the starter system can be dam-  
aged.  
• Do not crank the engine for more  
than 15 seconds at a time. If the  
engine doesn’t start on the first try,  
wait about 15 seconds before try-  
ing again.  
NOTE:  
The engine of manual transmission vehicle  
will not start unless the clutch pedal is  
depressed.  
If the engine does not start after 15 sec-  
onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,  
then press down the accelerator pedal to  
3-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE:  
3) Close the engine hood securely before  
starting the engine.  
Engine Block Heater  
(if equipped)  
Activate the heater at least four hours  
before you start the engine. However, as  
the heating time varies depending on the  
ambient temperature and other factors,  
adjust the time by observing the engine  
cranking condition.  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
To avoid serious personal injury  
caused by electrical shock or fire:  
• Do not plug the cord into a non-  
grounded outlet. Only use a prop-  
erly grounded three-prong 110-volt  
AC outlet.  
• Do not use a 2-wire (non-grounded)  
extension cord.  
79K040  
• Only use a heavy-duty, three-prong  
extension cord rated for at least 15  
amps.  
The engine block heater will help you start  
the engine more easily in very cold  
weather (–18°C (0°F) or below). To use the  
engine block heater:  
After using the block heater:  
1) Unplug the extension cord and reinstall  
the plug cap.  
2) Tie the block heater cord back to its  
original position.  
1) Turn off the engine.  
2) Open the engine hood.  
3) Untie the block heater cord and remove  
the block heater plug cap. When the  
engine block heater is not in use,  
ensure the heater cord is secured to  
prevent contact with any moving parts.  
CAUTION  
4) Using  
a
heavy-duty, three-prong  
Secure the block heater cord back to  
its original position or to the routed  
position. A loose cord could get  
caught in the engine accessory drive  
belt(s) or other moving parts.  
grounded extension cord, plug the  
female end into the block heater socket  
and the male end into a normal,  
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.  
3-10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
5-Speed Automatic Transmission  
Using the Transmission  
WARNING  
Manual Transmission  
• Reduce your speed and downshift  
to a lower gear before going down  
a long or steep hill. Downshifting  
will allow the engine to provide  
braking. Avoid riding the brakes or  
they may overheat, resulting in  
brake failure.  
• When driving on slippery roads, be  
sure to slow down before down-  
shifting.  
Large  
and  
sudden  
changes in engine speed may  
cause loss of traction, which could  
cause you to lose control.  
66J003  
• Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped before you shift  
into reverse.  
D:  
65D449  
5-speed automatic transmission mode  
Starting off  
4:  
To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the  
way to the floor and shift into 1st gear.  
After releasing the parking brake, gradually  
release the clutch. When you hear a  
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press  
the accelerator while continuing to gradu-  
ally release the clutch.  
4-speed automatic transmission mode  
CAUTION  
The 4-speed mode is suitable for the fol-  
lowing driving conditions:  
• Driving on hilly, winding roads  
You can drive more smoothly with less  
frequent gearshifting  
• Going down a steep hill  
– Some engine braking is provided  
• To help avoid clutch damage, do  
not use the clutch pedal as a foot-  
rest while driving or use the clutch  
to keep the vehicle stationary on a  
hill. Depress the clutch fully when  
shifting.  
• When shifting or starting off, do not  
race the engine. Racing the engine  
can shorten engine life and affect  
smooth shifting.  
Shifting  
All forward gears are synchronized, which  
provides for quiet, and easy shifting.  
Always push in the clutch pedal fully before  
shifting gears. Make sure the engine speed  
does not rise into the red zone of the  
tachometer.  
NOTE:  
With the transfer switch in the “4L LOCK”  
position, the 5-speed automatic transmis-  
sion will remain in the 4-speed mode.  
3-11  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Gearshift lever  
Use the gearshift lever positions as  
described below:  
speed is, the more you will need to press  
the accelerator pedal to get a downshift.  
P (Park)  
4 (Low 3)  
Use this position to lock the transmission  
when the vehicle is parked or when start-  
ing the engine. Shift into Park only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
Use this position for driving on moderate  
uphill and downhill gradients. The engine  
braking effect on moderate downhills can  
be used in this position. The transmission  
shifts up only to 4th gear.  
WARNING  
3 (Low 2)  
Use this position to provide extra power  
when climbing hills, or to provide engine  
braking when going down hills.  
If you have a 4-wheel drive vehicle,  
never leave the transfer switch in “N”  
(Neutral) position when parked.  
Otherwise the vehicle may roll even if  
the transmission is in Park.  
L (Low 1)  
Use this position to provide maximum  
power when climbing steep hills or driving  
through deep snow or mud, or to provide  
maximum engine braking when going  
down steep hills.  
66J004  
R (Reverse)  
The gearshift lever is designed that it can-  
not be shifted out of the “P” position unless  
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position  
and the brake pedal is depressed.  
Use this position to back the vehicle from  
stop. Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped before shifting into  
Reverse.  
NOTE:  
WARNING  
If you move the gearshift lever to a lower  
gear while driving faster than the maximum  
allowable speed for the lower gear, the  
transmission will not actually downshift  
until your speed drops below the maximum  
speed for the lower gear.  
N (Neutral)  
Use this position for starting the engine if  
the engine stalls and you need to restart it  
while the vehicle is moving. You may also  
shift into Neutral and depress the brake  
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during  
idling.  
Always depress the brake pedal  
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or  
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-  
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to  
help prevent the vehicle from moving  
unexpectedly when you shift.  
D (Drive)  
Use this position for all normal driving.  
With the selector in “D” range, you can get  
an automatic downshift by pressing the  
accelerator pedal. The higher the vehicle  
3-12  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION  
Gearshift lever  
4-Speed Automatic Transmission  
EXAMPLE  
Be sure to take the following precau-  
tions to help avoid damage to the  
automatic transmission:  
• Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped before shifting into  
“P” or “R”.  
• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,  
“D”, “4”, “3” or “Lwhen the  
engine is running above idle speed.  
• Do not rev the engine with the  
transmission in a drive position  
(“R”, “D”, “4”, “3” or “L) and the  
rear wheels not moving.  
64J142  
79K027  
• Do not use the accelerator to hold  
the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-  
cle’s brakes.  
The gearshift lever is designed that it can-  
not be shifted out of the “P” position unless  
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position  
and the brake pedal is depressed.  
D:  
4-speed automatic transmission mode  
3:  
3-speed automatic transmission mode  
The 3-speed mode is suitable for the fol-  
lowing driving conditions:  
• Driving on hilly, winding roads  
You can drive more smoothly with less  
frequent gearshifting  
• Going down a steep hill  
– Some engine braking is provided  
WARNING  
Always depress the brake pedal  
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or  
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-  
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to  
help prevent the vehicle from moving  
unexpectedly when you shift.  
NOTE:  
With the transfer switch in the “4L LOCK”  
position, the 4-speed automatic transmis-  
sion will remain in the 3-speed mode.  
3-13  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION  
Use the gearshift lever positions as  
described below:  
D (Drive)  
Use this position for all normal driving.  
With the gearshift lever in “D” range you  
can get an automatic downshift by press-  
ing the accelerator pedal. The higher the  
vehicle speed is, the more you need to  
press the accelerator pedal to get a down-  
shift.  
Be sure to take the following precau-  
tions to help avoid damage to the  
automatic transmission:  
• Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stationary before shifting  
into “P” or “R”.  
• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,  
“D”, “3”, “2”, or “Lwhen the  
engine is running above idle speed.  
• Do not rev the engine with the  
transmission in a drive position  
(“R”, “D”, “3”, “2”, or “L) and the  
rear wheels not moving.  
• Do not use the accelerator to hold  
the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-  
cle’s brakes.  
P (Park)  
Use this position to lock the transmission  
when the vehicle is parked or when start-  
ing the engine. Shift into Park only when  
the vehicle is completely stationary.  
WARNING  
3 (Low 3)  
Use this position for driving on moderate  
uphill and downhill gradients. The engine  
braking effect on moderate downhills can  
be used in this position. The transmission  
shifts up only to 3rd gear.  
If you have a 4-wheel drive vehicle,  
never leave the transfer switch in “N”  
(Neutral) position when parked.  
Otherwise the vehicle may roll even if  
the transmission is in Park.  
2 (Low 2)  
Use this position to provide extra power  
when climbing hills, or to provide engine  
braking when going down hills.  
R (Reverse)  
Use this position to reverse the vehicle  
from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-  
pletely stationary before shifting into  
Reverse.  
L (Low 1)  
Use this position to provide maximum  
power when climbing steep hills or driving  
through deep snow or mud, or to provide  
maximum engine braking when going  
down steep hills.  
N (Neutral)  
Use this position for starting the engine if  
the engine stalls and you need to restart it  
while the vehicle is moving. You may also  
shift into Neutral and depress the brake  
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during  
idling.  
NOTE:  
If you move the gearshift lever to a lower  
gear while driving faster than the maximum  
allowable speed for the lower gear, the  
transmission will not actually downshift  
until your speed drops below the maximum  
speed for the lower gear.  
3-14  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
5) With inserting the key or the flat end rod  
into the slot in the hole, shift the gear-  
shift lever to the desired position.  
If You Cannot Shift Automatic  
Transmission Gearshift Lever Out  
of “P” (PARK)  
Using the Transfer Switch  
(if equipped)  
This procedure is for emergency use only.  
If repeated use of this procedure is neces-  
sary, or the procedure does not work as  
described, take the vehicle to your dealer  
for repair.  
(1)  
66J168  
78K043  
Your vehicle is equipped with a four-mode  
full-time 4x4 system. You can use the  
transfer switch to select any of the four  
modes: N, 4H, 4H LOCK, 4L LOCK.  
Vehicles with an automatic transmission  
have an electrically operated park-lock fea-  
ture. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged,  
or there is some other electrical failure, the  
automatic transmission cannot be shifted  
out of Park in the normal way. Jump start-  
ing may correct the condition. If not, follow  
the procedure described below. This pro-  
cedure will permit shifting the transmission  
out of Park.  
1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly  
applied.  
2) If the engine is running, stop the  
engine.  
3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or  
“ACC” position.  
4) Remove the cover (1) on the hole.  
3-15  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Transfer Switch: 10  
Braking: 6  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
(1) Front differential  
(2) Engine  
(3) Transmission  
(4) High/Low clutch  
(5) Transfer case  
(6) Center differential  
(7) Differential lock clutch  
(8) Chain  
(9) Rear propeller shaft  
(10) Rear differential  
(11) Front propeller shaft  
(4)  
(6)  
(7)  
(9)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
(8)  
(10)  
(1)  
(11)  
64J143  
3-16  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Braking: 6  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
In this position, engine power is not sup-  
plied to the front or rear axles. Only use  
this position for towing your vehicle.  
When you turn the transfer switch to the  
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with  
the buzzer sound.  
Description of Transfer Switch Positions  
N (Neutral)  
WARNING  
Never leave the transfer switch in “N”  
(Neutral) when parked.  
When the transfer switch is in “N”  
(Neutral), the vehicle may roll even if  
the transmission is in gear or in Park.  
64J223  
3-17  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Braking: 6  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4H (4-wheel drive high range)  
In this position, engine power is supplied to  
the front and rear axles. Use this position  
for normal driving.  
64J220  
3-18  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS):  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4H LOCK (4-wheel drive high range center differential lock)  
In this position, engine power is supplied to  
the front and rear axles and you get better  
traction than when driving in “4H”. Use this  
position when you need better traction  
than “4H” provides, such as when driving  
on slippery roads etc.  
64J221  
3-19  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS):  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4L LOCK (4-wheel drive low range center differential lock)  
In this position, engine power is supplied to  
the front and rear axles and you get better  
traction and more low-speed torque than  
when driving in “4H”. Use this position  
when you need better traction than “4H”  
provides and more low-speed torque than  
“4H LOCK” provides, such as when climb-  
ing or descending steep, slippery hills etc.  
NOTE:  
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
canceled to provide improved vehicle trac-  
tion, and the “ESP OFF” indicator light will  
come on.  
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, brake-  
traction control can be activated. Brake-  
traction control brakes the spinning wheel  
to distribute drive power to the other  
wheels for increased climbing ability or for  
better performance on a rolling hill or a  
slippery surface.  
®
ESP is a registered trademark of Daimler  
AG.  
64J222  
3-20  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS):  
Break-In: 6  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
From 4H LOCK to 4L LOCK  
From 4H to N  
Transfer Switch Operation  
Operate the transfer switch according to  
the appropriate procedure described  
below:  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to shift into “4L LOCK”.  
(1)  
From N to 4H  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to shift into “4H”.  
From 4L LOCK to 4H LOCK  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to shift into “4H LOCK”.  
From 4H to 4H LOCK  
You can operate the transfer switch either  
when the vehicle is stopped or while the  
vehicle is moving.  
From 4H LOCK to 4H  
You can operate the transfer switch either  
when the vehicle is stopped or while the  
vehicle is moving.  
64J209  
Position the front wheels straight ahead  
and turn the switch to shift into “4H LOCK”.  
If the vehicle is moving, we recommend  
that the speed be less than 100 km/h (60  
mph) during this operation.  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to the mark (1) at the left of the “N”  
position, and hold the switch in this posi-  
tion for 5 seconds until the “N” indicator  
blinks, then turn the switch to the “N” posi-  
tion.  
Position the front wheels straight ahead  
and turn the switch to shift into “4H”. If the  
vehicle is moving, we recommend that the  
speed be less than 100 km/h (60 mph) dur-  
ing this operation.  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the transfer switch  
while tires are racing.  
CAUTION  
When you turn the transfer switch to the  
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with  
the buzzer sound.  
Do not operate the transfer switch  
while tires are racing.  
NOTE:  
If it is difficult to shift between “4H” and “4H  
LOCK” while the vehicle is moving, try  
accelerating and decelerating your vehicle  
several times after turning the transfer  
switch. Be sure to wait until traffic condi-  
tions allow you to accelerate and deceler-  
ate safety before using this procedure.  
NOTE:  
If it is difficult to shift between “4H” and “4H  
LOCK” while the vehicle is moving, try  
accelerating and decelerating your vehicle  
several times after turning the transfer  
switch. Be sure to wait until traffic condi-  
tions allow you to accelerate and deceler-  
ate safety before using this procedure.  
3-21  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Catalytic Converter: NO  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE:  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when the transfer  
system is operated, or has a problem.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
• Be sure to stop the vehicle com-  
pletely before operating the trans-  
fer switch to shift between “N” and  
“4H”, or between “4H LOCK” and  
“4L LOCK”.  
(Continued)  
• Do not operate the vehicle while a  
4WD mode indicator is blinking  
except when shifting between “4H”  
and “4L LOCK”.  
• Do not shift between “4H” and “4H  
LOCK” unless the front wheels are  
in the straight-ahead position and  
we recommend that the vehicle  
speed be less than 100 km/h (60  
mph).  
If you operate the vehicle while a  
4WD mode indicator is blinking, a  
buzzer will sound and the transfer  
will shift to “N” (Neutral) to prevent  
transfer case damage.  
In this case, use the following pro-  
cedure.  
Do not operate the transfer switch  
while tires are racing.  
1) Release your foot from the accel-  
erator pedal and depress the  
brake pedal to stop the vehicle  
completely.  
2) Depress the clutch pedal fully (if  
equipped) or shift the automatic  
transmission gearshift lever to the  
“N” position.  
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry, hard  
surfaces.  
(Continued)  
3) If the transfer does not shift from  
“N” although you perform 1) and  
2), turn the transfer switch to the  
position previously selected and  
operate the switch again.  
3-22  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Catalytic Converter: NO  
Improving Fuel Economy: NO  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
The basic operation for transfer switch  
Current Position  
Current Indicator  
Target Position  
4H  
Target Indicator  
N
N
4H  
4H LOCK  
4H  
4H LOCK  
4L LOCK  
4L LOCK  
4H LOCK  
N: Neutral  
4H: 4-wheel drive high range mode  
4H LOCK: 4-wheel drive high range center differential lock mode  
4L LOCK: 4-wheel drive low range center differential lock mode  
3-23  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Warning and Indicator messages  
Transfer Switch  
Master Warning  
Indicator  
Warning and Indicator messages  
Sound  
Off  
Cause and Remedy  
Operation  
In any position  
Blinks  
There may be a problem with the 4WD  
system.  
Have your vehicle inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
79K074  
79K077  
In “N” position  
Blinks  
Series of This message informs you that the  
Beeps  
transfer switch is in “N”, which is used  
only for towing your vehicle.  
Move the transfer switch to a different  
position unless you are planning to tow  
your vehicle.  
Switching between  
“4H” and  
“4H LOCK”  
Off  
Off  
This message informs you the 4WD  
mode is switching.  
79K078  
79K079  
In “4H” position  
Blinks  
Off  
Tires are slipping.  
Turn the transfer switch to “4H LOCK”  
position.  
3-24  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Transfer Switch  
Master Warning  
Indicator  
Warning and Indicator messages  
Sound  
Cause and Remedy  
Operation  
Switching between  
“4H LOCK” and  
“4L LOCK”  
Switching between  
“4H” and “N”  
Off  
Series of (For automatic transmission)  
Beeps  
The desired transfer gear has not been  
engaged.  
Release your foot from the accelerator  
pedal.  
Depress the brake pedal.  
Shift the automatic transmission gear-  
shift lever to the “N” position.  
79K080  
Off  
Series of (For manual transmission)  
Beeps  
The desired transfer gear has not been  
engaged.  
Release your foot from the accelerator  
pedal.  
Depress the brake pedal and clutch  
pedal.  
79K081  
Off  
Off  
Beep or The desired transfer gear has not been  
Off  
engaged.  
Turn the transfer switch back to the pre-  
viously selected position, and operate  
the transfer switch again.  
79K082  
79K083  
Off  
This message informs you the 4WD  
mode is switching.  
Do not move your vehicle.  
3-25  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
To Set Cruising Speed  
Cruise Control (if equipped)  
1) Turn on the cruise control system by  
pushing the “ON/OFF” switch (1). When  
the “CRUISE” indicator light comes on,  
you can set cruising speed.  
WARNING  
To help avoid loss of vehicle control,  
do not use the cruise control system  
when driving in heavy traffic, on slip-  
pery or winding roads, or on steep  
downgrades.  
2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired  
speed.  
3) Push the “SET/COAST” switch (3) and  
turn on the “SET” indicator light. Take  
your foot off the accelerator pedal and  
the set speed will be maintained.  
WARNING  
If the cruising speed is set by acci-  
dent, you cannot decelerate or could  
loose control of the vehicle. This  
could lead to an accident, resulting in  
severe injury or death.  
(2)  
79K032  
(4)  
(3)  
(1)  
The cruise control system allows you to  
maintain a steady speed without keeping  
your foot on the accelerator pedal. The  
controls for operating the cruise control  
system are on the steering wheel.  
Turn off the cruise control system  
and make sure the “CRUISE” indica-  
tor light is off when the system is not  
in use.  
79K049  
You can use the cruise control system with  
the following conditions:  
• For manual transmission vehicle, the  
gear position is in 4th or 5th.  
• For 4-Speed automatic transmission  
vehicle, the gearshift lever is in “D” or “3”  
position.  
• For 5-Speed automatic transmission  
vehicle, the gearshift lever is in “D” or “4”  
position.  
(1) “ON/OFF” switch  
(2) “CANCELswitch  
(3) “SET/COAST” switch  
(4) “RES/ACC” switch  
NOTE:  
If the transfer switch (if equipped) is in the  
“4L LOCK” position, you cannot use the  
cruise control system. Refer to “Using the  
Transfer Switch (if equipped)” in this sec-  
tion.  
• The vehicle speed is between approxi-  
mately 45 km/h (28 mph) or higher.  
3-26  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
“CRUISE” indicator light  
To Change Speed Temporarily  
When the cruising speed is maintained,  
you can temporarily accelerate or deceler-  
ate.  
To Change Cruising Speed  
Using the accelerator pedal  
To reset at a faster cruising speed, acceler-  
ate to the desired speed using the acceler-  
ator pedal and push the “SET/COAST”  
switch (3). The new speed will be main-  
tained.  
To accelerate, depress the accelerator  
pedal. When you take your foot off the  
pedal, your vehicle will return to the set  
speed.  
52D113  
Using the brake pedal  
To decelerate, depress the brake pedal.  
The set speed will be canceled and “SET”  
indicator light will go off. To resume the  
previously set speed, push the “RES/ACC”  
switch (4) and turn on the “SET” indicator  
light again when vehicle speed is above 45  
km/h (28 mph). The vehicle will accelerate  
to and maintain the previously set speed.  
To reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-  
erate to the desired speed using the brake  
pedal and push the “SET/COAST” switch  
(3). The new speed will be maintained.  
When you push the “ON/OFF” switch, the  
system is on and a “CRUISE” indicator  
light on the instrument cluster will be on.  
“SET” indicator light  
NOTE:  
When the brake pedal is depressed, the  
“SET” indicator light goes off until reset the  
cruising speed.  
NOTE:  
For 4-Speed/5-Speed automatic transmis-  
sion vehicle, when the cruising speed is  
maintained, you cannot decelerate by  
using the engine brake if you shift the gear-  
shift lever from “D” to “3” position for 4-  
Speed automatic transmission vehicle, and  
from “D” to “4” position for 5-Speed auto-  
matic transmission vehicle.  
Using the cruise control switch  
To reset at a faster cruising speed, press  
repeatedly or hold in the “RES/ACC”  
switch (4). Vehicle speed will steadily  
increase. When you release the switch, the  
new speed will be maintained.  
65D474  
When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by  
the cruise control system, a “SET” indica-  
tor light on the instrument cluster will be  
on.  
To reset at a slower cruising speed, press  
repeatedly or hold in the “SET/COAST”  
switch (3) until the vehicle has slowed to  
the desired speed, then release the switch.  
The new speed will be maintained.  
To decelerate while the cruise control is on,  
depress the brake pedal or push the “SET/  
COAST” switch (3).  
NOTE:  
You can adjust the set speed by approxi-  
mately 1.5 km/h (1.0 mph) by pushing a  
cruise control switch quickly.  
3-27  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE:  
Cancellation of the Cruise Control  
The “SET” indicator light will go off and the  
cruise control will be canceled temporarily  
with following procedures:  
Braking  
If you turn off the cruise control system, the  
previously set speed in the memory is  
cleared. Reset your cruising speed again.  
• Push the “CANCELswitch (2).  
• Depress the brake pedal.  
• For manual transmission, depress the  
clutch pedal.  
• For 4-Speed automatic transmission  
vehicle, shift the gearshift lever into “2”  
or “Lposition.  
• For 5-Speed automatic transmission  
vehicle, shift the gearshift lever into “3”,  
“2”, or “Lposition.  
• The vehicle speed falls more than 20  
km/h (12.5 mph) below the set speed.  
• Any time the vehicle speed falls below  
40 km/h (25 mph).  
60G165  
The distance needed to bring any vehicle  
to a halt increases with the speed of the  
vehicle. The braking distance needed, for  
example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be  
approximately 4 times greater than the  
braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19  
mph). Start to brake the vehicle when there  
is plenty of distance between your vehicle  
and the stopping point, and slow down  
gradually.  
®
• When the vehicle skids and ESP (if  
equipped) is activated.  
To resume the previously set speed, push  
the “RES/ACC” switch (4) and turn on the  
“SET” indicator light. Besides, the vehicle  
speed has to be above 45 km/h (28 mph)  
when the vehicle is not in the above condi-  
tions.  
To turn off the cruise control system, push  
the “ON/OFF” switch (1) and make sure  
the “CRUISE” indicator light is off.  
Also, if the malfunction indicator light in the  
instrument cluster comes on or blinks, the  
cruise control system will be turned off.  
3-28  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-  
tronically controlling braking pressure. It  
will also help you maintain steering control  
when braking on slippery surfaces or when  
braking hard.  
WARNING  
If water gets into the brake drums,  
brake performance may become poor  
and unpredictable. After driving  
through water or washing the under-  
side of the vehicle, test the brakes  
while driving at a slow speed to see if  
they have maintained their normal  
effectiveness. If the brakes are less  
effective than normal, dry them by  
repeatedly applying the brakes while  
driving slowly until the brakes have  
regained their normal effectiveness.  
Even without reserve power in the  
brake system, you can still stop the  
vehicle by pressing the brake pedal  
harder than normally required. How-  
ever, the stopping distance may be  
longer.  
The ABS works automatically, so you do  
not need any special braking technique.  
Just push the brake pedal down without  
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it  
senses that the wheels are locking up.  
Brake Assist System  
When you slam the brakes on, the brake  
assist system judges as an emergency  
stop and provides more powerful braking  
for a driver who cannot hold down the  
brake pedal firmly.  
You may feel the brake pedal pulsate while  
the ABS is operating.  
NOTE:  
Power-Assisted Brakes  
The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is  
under about 6 km/h (4 mph).  
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If  
power assistance is lost due to a stalled  
engine or other failures, the system is still  
fully operational on reserve power and you  
can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by  
pressing the brake pedal once and holding  
it down. The reserve power is partly used  
up when you depress the brake pedal and  
reduces each time the pedal is pressed.  
Apply smooth and even pressure to the  
pedal. Do not pump the pedal.  
NOTE:  
If you quickly and forcefully depress the  
brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in  
the brake pedal. This is normal and indi-  
cates that the brake assist system is acti-  
vated properly.  
3-29  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• On some types of loose surfaces  
(such as gravel, snow-covered  
roads, etc.), the stopping distance  
required for an ABS-equipped vehi-  
cle may be slightly greater than for  
a comparable vehicle with a con-  
ventional brake system. With a  
conventional brake system, skid-  
ding tires are able to “plow” the  
gravel or snow layer, shortening  
the stopping distance. ABS mini-  
mizes this resistance effect. Allow  
for extra stopping distance when  
driving on loose surfaces.  
• On regular paved roads, some driv-  
ers may be able to obtain slightly  
shorter stopping distances with  
conventional brake systems than  
with ABS.  
• In both of the above conditions,  
ABS will still offer the advantage of  
helping you maintain directional  
control. However, remember that  
ABS will not compensate for bad  
road or weather conditions or poor  
driver judgment. Use good judg-  
ment and do not drive faster than  
conditions will safely allow.  
(Continued)  
or  
If the warning light comes on briefly  
then turns off, the system is normal.  
If the warning light still stays on,  
have the system inspected by your  
SUZUKI dealer immediately. If the  
ABS system becomes inoperative,  
the brake system will function as an  
ordinary brake system that has no  
ABS.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
65D451  
WARNING  
(1) ABS warning light Type 1  
(2) ABS warning light Type 2  
(3) Brake system warning light  
If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2))  
and the Brake system warning light  
(3) on the instrument panel simulta-  
neously stay on or come on when  
driving, both anti-lock function and  
rear brake force control function  
(Proportioning valve function) of the  
ABS system may have failed. This  
could cause the rear wheels to skid  
or the vehicle to spin during braking  
on a slippery road or hard braking on  
a dry paved road. If both warning  
lights come on, drive carefully, avoid-  
ing hard braking as much as possi-  
ble, and ask your SUZUKI dealer to  
inspect the ABS system immediately.  
WARNING  
If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2)) on  
the instrument panel comes on and  
stays on while driving, there may be a  
problem with the ABS system.  
If this happens:  
1) Pull off the road and stop care-  
fully.  
2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”  
and then start the engine again.  
(Continued)  
3-30  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
®
The ESP has the following three systems:  
How the ABS Works  
Electronic Stability Program  
A computer continuously monitors wheel  
speed. The computer compares the  
changes in wheel speed when braking. If  
the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a  
skidding situation, the computer will  
change braking pressure several times  
each second to prevent the wheels from  
locking. When you start your vehicle or  
when you accelerate after a hard stop, you  
may hear a momentary motor or clicking  
sound as the system resets or checks  
itself.  
®
(ESP )  
Stability Control System  
®
ESP is a registered trademark of Daimler  
The vehicle stability control system helps  
provide integrated control of systems such  
as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine  
control, etc. This system automatically  
controls the brakes and engine to help pre-  
vent the vehicle from skidding when cor-  
nering on a slippery road surface or when  
turning the steering wheel abruptly.  
AG.  
®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP )  
helps to control the vehicle during corner-  
ing if front wheels or rear wheels skid. It  
also assists you in maintaining traction  
while accelerating on loose or slippery  
road surfaces. It does this by regulating the  
engine’s output, and by selectively apply-  
Traction Control System  
The traction control system automatically  
helps prevent the spinning of wheels when  
the vehicle is started or accelerated on  
slippery road surfaces. The system oper-  
ates only if it senses that some of the  
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose  
traction. When this happens, the system  
operates the front or rear brakes and  
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.  
®
ing the brakes. In addition, ESP helps to  
WARNING  
avoid skidding by controlling braking pres-  
sure.  
The ABS may not work properly if  
tires or wheels other than those  
specified in the owner’s manual are  
used. This is because the ABS works  
by comparing changes in wheel  
speed. When replacing tires or  
wheels, use only the size and type  
specified in this owner’s manual.  
WARNING  
®
The ESP cannot enhance the vehi-  
cle’s driving stability in all situations  
and does not control your vehicle’s  
®
entire braking system. The ESP can-  
NOTE:  
not prevent accidents, including  
those resulting from excessive speed  
in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe  
and attentive driver can prevent acci-  
You may hear a clicking sound in the  
engine compartment for a few seconds  
when you start the engine or just after the  
vehicle begins to move. This means that  
the above systems are in the self-check  
mode. This sound does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
®
dents. The capabilities of an ESP -  
equipped vehicle must never be used  
as a substitute for careful driving.  
3-31  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
®
The ESP indicator lights are described  
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)  
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-  
tronically controlling braking pressure. It  
will also help you maintain steering control  
when braking on slippery surfaces or when  
braking hard. The ABS works automati-  
cally, so you do not have to use any special  
braking technique. Just push the brake  
pedal down without pumping. The ABS will  
operate whenever it senses that wheels  
are locking up. You may feel the brake  
pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.  
(For more information on ABS, see “Brak-  
ing” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”  
section.)  
below:  
WARNING  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
tires or wheels other than those  
specified in the Owner’s Manual are  
used. When replacing tires or  
wheels, use only the size and type  
specified in this Owner’s Manual.  
SLIP Indicator Light  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
tires are not inflated to the recom-  
mended tire inflation pressure.  
®
79K019  
• The ESP may not work properly if  
tires are fitted with tire chains.  
The SLIP indicator light in the instrument  
cluster blinks 5 times per second when one  
of the following systems is activated.  
• Stability control system  
Traction control system  
• Hill descent control system (if equipped)  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
the tires are excessively worn. Be  
sure to replace tires when the tread  
wear indicators in the grooves  
appear on the tread surface.  
NOTE:  
If the ABS system is activated, you may  
hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating  
in the brake pedal. This is normal and indi-  
cates that the brake fluid pressure is being  
controlled properly.  
®
• The ESP is not a substitute for  
winter tires or tire chains on a snow  
covered road.  
CAUTION  
If the SLIP indicator light comes on  
and stays on while driving, there may  
be a malfunction of the ESP sys-  
tems (other than ABS). You should  
have the systems inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
®
WARNING  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
engine related parts such as the  
muffler are not equivalent to stan-  
dard equipment or are extremely  
deteriorated.  
NOTE:  
When the SLIP indicator light comes on  
and stays on while driving, indicating a  
malfunction of the ESP systems (other  
than ABS), the brake system will function  
as an ordinary ABS with no additional  
ESP functions.  
• Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-  
®
pension since the ESP may not  
®
operate correctly.  
®
3-32  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE:  
“ESP” Warning Light  
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light  
When you disconnect and re-connect the  
®
battery, ESP system functions other than  
ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-  
tor light will blink 1 time per second. In this  
case, use the following procedure to re-  
®
activate the ESP systems:  
1) Drive your vehicle straight ahead with-  
out tire slippage at a speed greater than  
approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) for a  
few seconds  
66J031  
66J032  
®
®
When the ESP systems (other than ABS)  
have a system malfunction, the “ESP”  
warning light in the instrument cluster  
comes on.  
You should turn the ESP on during your  
ordinary driving, so that you have the ben-  
2) The slip indicator light will go out and  
®
®
efits of all of the ESP systems.  
the ESP systems (other than ABS) will  
®
be re-activated  
It may be required to turn the ESP sys-  
It may take more than few seconds before  
the slip indicator light goes out depending  
on the road surface condition.  
tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is  
stuck in sand, mud, or snow, or when driv-  
ing in extreme off-road conditions where  
wheel spin is necessary.  
CAUTION  
If the “ESP” warning light comes on,  
or stays on while driving, there may  
be a malfunction of the ESP sys-  
®
tems (other than ABS). You should  
have the systems inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
NOTE:  
When the “ESP” warning light comes on,  
or stays on while driving, indicating a mal-  
®
function of the ESP systems (other than  
ABS), the brake system will function as an  
®
ordinary ABS that has no additional ESP  
functions.  
NOTE:  
The information display shows the warning  
and indicator message when this light  
comes on.  
3-33  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
“ESP OFF” switch  
(without hill descent control)  
When the “ESP OFF” switch located at the  
center of the instrument panel is pushed  
light will come on. After a short period of  
®
time, the ESP systems (other than  
®
and held to turn off the ESP systems  
ABS) will turn on automatically and the  
“ESP OFF” indicator light will go out.  
(other than ABS), the “ESP OFF” indicator  
light in the instrument cluster comes on.  
When you push and hold the “ESP OFF”  
switch again, the “ESP OFF” indicator light  
• If your vehicle is equipped with a hill  
descent control system and a hill hold  
control system, these systems will not be  
turned off when the “ESP OFF” switch is  
®
will go out and all of the ESP systems will  
®
be activated.  
pushed to turn off the ESP systems.  
NOTE:  
• When the vehicle speed is greater than  
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will turn  
on automatically and the “ESP OFF”  
indicator light will go out.  
(1)  
78K045  
• When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
79K084  
(1) “ESP OFF” switch  
®
NOTE:  
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
If you push the “ESP OFF” switch when the  
transfer switch is in the “4H” position, the  
(with hill descent control)  
canceled to provide improved vehicle  
traction, and the “ESP OFF” indicator  
light will come on.  
®
ESP systems will not be turned off, and  
the message shown in the above illustra-  
tion will appear on the information display.  
You should turn the transfer switch to the  
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, brake-  
traction control can be activated. Brake-  
traction control brakes the spinning  
wheel to distribute drive power to the  
other wheels for increased climbing abil-  
ity or for better performance on a rolling  
hill or a slippery surface.  
®
“4H LOCK” position to turn off the ESP  
(1)  
systems. Refer to “Using the Transfer  
Switch” in this section.  
ABS Warning Light / Brake System  
Warning Light  
®
• If the ESP systems operate continu-  
See “Braking” in the “OPERATING YOUR  
VEHICLE” section.  
ously, such as when driving on slippery  
roads, the traction control functions of  
®
the ESP systems may be canceled  
78K046  
temporarily to avoid overheating the  
brake pads, and the “ESP OFF” indicator  
(1) “ESP OFF” switch  
3-34  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Hill descent control switch  
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) when going  
down a hill.  
The brake/tail lights come on and the slip  
indicator light blinks while the hill descent  
control system applies the brakes to main-  
tain the vehicle speed.  
If the accelerator or brake pedal is  
depressed while the hill descent control  
system is activated, the system will stop  
working temporarily. As soon as the accel-  
erator or brake pedal is released, the hill  
descent control system begins to function  
again if the hill descent control operating  
conditions are fulfilled. However, when the  
vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15 mph),  
the hill descent control system will be  
deactivated automatically.  
Hill descent control System  
(if equipped)  
The hill descent control system is designed  
to reduce the driver’s workload when going  
down steep, rough and/or slippery hills  
where the vehicle cannot decelerate  
enough by engine braking alone. The hill  
descent control system helps to control  
vehicle speed by automatically engaging  
the vehicle’s brakes, as needed, so you  
can concentrate on steering the vehicle.  
(1)  
WARNING  
Do not rely excessively on the hill  
descent control system. The hill  
descent control system may not con-  
trol vehicle speed on a hill under all  
load or road conditions. Always be  
prepared to control vehicle speed by  
applying the brakes. Failure to pay  
attention and control vehicle speed  
using the brakes when necessary  
may result in loss of control or an  
accident.  
79K051  
(1) Hill descent control switch  
To deactivate the hill descent control sys-  
tem, push the hill descent control switch  
again.  
To activate the hill descent control system:  
1) Turn the transfer switch to the “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” position.  
2) Shift the gearshift lever into a forward  
gear or reverse gear.  
3) Push the hill descent control switch (1)  
when the vehicle speed is under 25 km/  
h (15 mph). The hill descent control  
indicator on the instrument cluster will  
come on and the hill descent control  
system will be activated.  
If the transfer switch is in the “4H LOCK”  
position, vehicle speed is maintained at  
approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) when  
going down a hill.  
If the transfer switch is in the “4L LOCK”  
position, the vehicle speed is maintained at  
3-35  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Hill descent control Indicator Light  
NOTE:  
If any of the following conditions occur,  
there may be a problem with the hill  
CAUTION  
• When the hill descent control sys-  
tem is used continuously for a long  
time, the temperature of the brake  
system may increase and the hill  
descent control system may be  
deactivated temporarily to protect  
the device of the brake system. The  
hill descent control indicator blinks  
to let you know the system is deac-  
tivated. Depress the brake pedal  
and stop the vehicle in a safe place.  
When the temperature of the brake  
system goes down, the hill descent  
control indicator will come on and  
the system is activated again.  
• The hill descent control system  
may be activated when the gear-  
shift lever is in the “N” (Neutral)  
position, but engine braking will  
not work. Always use the hill  
descent control system with the  
gearshift lever in a forward gear or  
reverse gear.  
®
descent control system or the ESP sys-  
tem. Have your vehicle inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
• The hill descent control indicator does  
not come on or blink when you push the  
hill descent control switch.  
• The hill descent control indicator stays  
on when driving without pushing the hill  
descent control switch.  
79K050  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working.  
When you push the hill descent control  
switch and the hill descent control operat-  
ing conditions are fulfilled, the hill descent  
control indicator comes on. If the hill  
descent control indicator blinks, the hill  
descent control will not be activated.  
79K072  
NOTE:  
If the message shown in the above illustra-  
tion appears on the information display,  
there may be a problem with the hill  
descent control system and the hill hold  
control system. Have your vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
If the hill descent control indicator blinks  
when you push the hill descent control  
switch, following conditions may not be ful-  
filled.  
• The transfer switch is in the “4H LOCK”  
or “4L LOCK” position  
• The gearshift lever is in a forward gear  
or reverse gear  
• The vehicle speed is under 25 km/h (15  
mph)  
• The brake system is under normal oper-  
ating temperature  
NOTE:  
You may hear a sound coming from the  
engine when the hill descent control sys-  
tem is activated. This sound is normal and  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
NOTE:  
You cannot activate the hill descent control  
system while this message is displayed.  
3-36  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Hill hold control System  
(if equipped)  
WARNING  
The hill hold control system is designed to  
assist you in starting to move up steep or  
slippery hills. When you start to move up a  
hill, the system helps to prevent the vehicle  
from rolling downward temporarily (for  
approximately 2 seconds) while you move  
your foot from the brake pedal to the accel-  
erator pedal.  
(Continued)  
• After you release your foot from the  
brake pedal, start the vehicle to  
move up immediately. If you release  
your foot from the brake pedal over  
2 seconds, the hill hold control sys-  
tem will be canceled. If so, the vehi-  
cle may roll downward depends on  
the degree of the slope which can  
result in an accident. And, the  
engine may stall and the power  
assist for the steering and brakes  
will not work so steering and brak-  
ing will be much harder than usual  
which can result in an accident or  
vehicle damage.  
79K072  
If the message shown in the above illustra-  
tion appears on the information display,  
there may be a problem with the hill  
descent control system and the hill hold  
control system. Have your vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
WARNING  
• Do not rely excessively on the hill  
hold control system. The hill hold  
control system may not prevent the  
vehicle from rolling downward on a  
hill under all load or road condi-  
tions. Always be prepared to  
depress the brake pedal to prevent  
the vehicle from rolling downward.  
Failure to pay attention and  
depress the brake pedal to hold the  
vehicle on a hill when necessary,  
may result in loss of control or an  
accident.  
NOTE:  
The hill hold control system will not acti-  
vate while this message is displayed.  
The hill hold control system activates for  
approximately 2 seconds if your foot is  
moved from the brake pedal when the fol-  
lowing condition are all fulfilled.  
1) The transfer switch is in a position other  
than “N”.  
• The hill hold control system is not  
designed to stop the vehicle on a  
hill.  
2) The gearshift lever is in a forward gear  
or reverse gear.  
3) The parking brake is released.  
(Continued)  
NOTE:  
You may hear a sound coming from the  
engine when the hill hold control system is  
activated. This sound is normal and does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
3-37  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) (if equipped)  
(Continued)  
The tire pressure monitoring system is  
designed to alert you when one or more of  
the tires on your vehicle is significantly  
under-inflated. A Tire Pressure Monitoring  
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-  
sure telltale illuminates, you should  
stop and check your tires as soon as  
possible, and inflate them to the  
proper pressure.  
System (TPMS) sensor containing  
a
unique identification code is mounted on  
each wheel. The TPMS sensors transmit  
tire pressure signals to a central receiver  
which relays the information to a tire pres-  
sure monitoring system controller. When  
the inflation pressure of one or more tires  
indicates significant under-inflation, the low  
tire pressure warning light shown below  
comes on.  
52D305  
Driving on  
a
significantly under-  
inflated tire causes the tire to over-  
heat and can lead to tire failure.  
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-  
ciency and tire tread life, and may  
affect the vehicle’s handling and  
stopping ability.  
WARNING  
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-  
vided), should be checked monthly  
when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehi-  
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-  
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If  
your vehicle has tires of a different  
size than the size indicated on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-  
sure label, you should determine the  
proper tire inflation pressure for  
those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure  
telltale when one or more of your  
tires is significantly under-inflated.  
(Continued)  
Please note that the TPMS is not a  
substitute for proper tire mainte-  
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-  
bility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger illumi-  
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure  
telltale.  
NOTE:  
The TPMS controller is not programmed to  
recognize the ID code of the TPMS sensor  
in your spare tire. The tire pressure moni-  
toring system will only work with the spare  
tire if you bring your vehicle to an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer to register the ID  
code of the spare tire sensor. Refer to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” in this  
section.  
3-38  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The tire pressure monitoring system  
is not a substitute for regular tire  
pressure inspections. Check tire  
inflation pressures monthly when  
cold and set to the recommended  
inflation pressure as specified on the  
vehicle’s tire information placard and  
in the owner’s manual. Refer to  
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE” section.  
The load rating of your tires is  
reduced at lower inflation pressures.  
If your tires become even moderately  
under-inflated, the vehicle load may  
exceed the load rating of the tires,  
which can lead to tire failure. The low  
tire pressure warning light will not  
alert you of this condition. The warn-  
ing light will only come on when one  
or more of your tires become signifi-  
cantly under-inflated. Check and  
adjust your tire inflation pressure at  
least once a month. Refer to “Tires”  
in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-  
NANCE” section.  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
comes on and stays on, reduce your  
speed and avoid abrupt steering and  
braking. Stop in a safe place as soon  
as possible and check your tires.  
• If you have a flat tire, replace it with  
the spare tire. Refer to “Jacking  
Instructions” in the “EMERGENCY  
SERVICE”  
section.  
Refer  
to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”  
for instructions on how to restore  
normal operation of the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system after you  
have had a flat tire.  
WARNING  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
does not come on when the ignition  
is turned to the “ON” position, or  
comes on and blinks while driving  
there may be a problem with the tire  
pressure monitoring system. Have  
your vehicle inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the light  
turns off after blinking, indicating  
that the monitoring system has  
recovered, make sure to have an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer check the  
system.  
• If one or more of your tires is  
under-inflated adjust the inflation  
pressure in all of your tires to the  
recommended inflation pressure as  
soon as possible.  
Be aware that driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire can cause  
the tire to overheat and can lead to  
tire failure, and may affect steering  
control and brake effectiveness. This  
could lead to an accident, resulting in  
severe injury or death.  
The low tire pressure warning light can  
come on due to normal causes such as  
natural air leaks and pressure changes  
caused by changes in temperature or  
atmospheric pressure. Adjusting the air  
pressure in the tires to the pressure shown  
3-39  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
on the tire information placard should  
cause the low tire pressure warning light to  
turn off.  
when the tires are cold. Tires that  
appear to be at the specified pressure  
when checked after driving, when the  
tires are warm, could have pressure  
below the specification when the tires  
cool down. Also, tires that are inflated to  
the specified pressure in a warm garage  
may have pressure below the specifica-  
tion when the vehicle is driven outside in  
very cold temperature. If you adjust the  
tire pressure in a garage that is warmer  
than the outside temperature, you  
should add 1 psi to the recommended  
cold tire inflation pressure for every 10°F  
difference between garage temperature  
and outside temperature.  
The TPMS malfunction indicator is  
combined with the low tire pressure  
telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then  
remain continuously illuminated.  
This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long  
as the malfunction exists.  
If the light turns on again shortly after  
adjusting the pressure in your tires, you  
may have a flat tire. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with the spare tire. Refer to  
“Jacking Instructions” in the “EMER-  
GENCY SERVICE” section. Refer to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” for  
instructions on how to restore normal oper-  
ation of the tire pressure monitoring sys-  
tem after you have had a flat tire.  
When you turn off the engine, however, the  
malfunction indicator resets. It takes about  
ten minutes after restarting the engine for  
the malfunction to be detected again and  
for the light to start flashing.  
NOTE:  
• When the tire inflation pressure is  
adjusted in high altitude areas, the low  
tire pressure light may not turn off even  
after tire inflation pressure adjustment.  
In this case, adjust the inflation pressure  
to a slightly higher pressure than is  
shown on the tire information placard.  
• The low tire pressure warning light may  
turn off temporarily after coming on. This  
could be due to surface temperature  
increases after long distance driving or  
traveling to a high temperature area.  
Even if the tire pressure warning light  
turns off after coming on, make sure to  
check the inflation pressure of all tires.  
To reduce the chance that the low tire  
pressure warning light will come on due  
to normal changes in temperature and  
atmospheric pressure, it is important to  
check and adjust the tire pressures  
For tire inflation pressure information, refer  
to “Tire Inflation Pressure” in the “INSPEC-  
TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.  
WARNING  
When the malfunction indicator is  
illuminated, the system may not be  
able to detect or signal low tire pres-  
sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions  
may occur for a variety of reasons,  
including the installation of replace-  
ment or alternate tires or wheels on  
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS  
from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale  
after replacing one or more tires or  
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that  
the replacement or alternate tires and  
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to  
function properly.  
TPMS Malfunction Indicator  
WARNING  
Your vehicle has also been equipped  
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to  
indicate when the system is not oper-  
ating properly.  
3-40  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION  
• When the TPMS sensor’s electronic sig-  
nal is disturbed in one of the following  
ways:  
– Electric devices or facilities using simi-  
lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.  
– A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle,  
in particular, around the wheels or  
wheel housings.  
WARNING  
• The tire pressure sensors can be  
damaged by the installation or  
removal of tires. When tires must  
be repaired or replaced, we highly  
recommend that you have them  
repaired or replaced by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
• Do not use liquid sealants for a flat  
tire as air pressure sensors can be  
damaged.  
• If the low tire pressure warning  
light comes on frequently, there  
may be something wrong with one  
of the tires or with the monitoring  
Only use tires and wheels recom-  
mended by SUZUKI as standard or  
optional equipment for your vehicle.  
Use of tires or wheels not recom-  
mended by SUZUKI can result in  
TPMS failure. Refer to “Tires” in the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for additional information.  
– Snow tires or tire chains are used.  
• When you use non-genuine SUZUKI  
wheels or tires.  
For Vehicles Sold in U.S.A.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference.  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
Replacing Tires and/or Wheels  
If you get a flat tire, Suzuki recommends  
that you have an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer mount a new tire on the wheel that  
had the flat tire, and reinstall this tire on the  
vehicle in place of the spare. The TPMS is  
already set up to recognize the ID code of  
the original wheel, and normal TPMS oper-  
ation will be restored.  
system.  
Have  
your  
vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
TPMS Limitations  
If you wish to operate your vehicle with the  
spare tire installed, you must have an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer set up the  
TPMS to recognize the ID code of the  
spare tire TPMS sensor.  
The tire pressure monitoring system may  
not function properly under certain circum-  
stances. In the following situations, the low  
tire pressure warning light may come on  
and remain on or may blink.  
NOTE:  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for com-  
pliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
• When you replace a flat tire with the  
spare tire.  
• When you include the spare tire during a  
tire rotation.  
• When the TPMS sensor is damaged dur-  
ing a tire replacement or liquid sealants  
are used to repair a flat tire.  
If you need to replace any wheels on your  
vehicle, your dealer must make sure that  
TPMS sensors are installed in the new  
wheels and must set up the TPMS to rec-  
ognize the new sensors.  
Traveling to CANADA  
Please note that service for the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system may not be avail-  
able in CANADA should there be any  
problems or malfunctions in the system.  
3-41  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVING TIPS  
DRIVING TIPS  
Important Vehicle Design Features To Know ................... 4-1  
Break-In ................................................................................ 4-2  
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-2  
Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-3  
On-Pavement Driving .......................................................... 4-4  
Off-Road Driving ................................................................. 4-6  
4
60G409  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Important Vehicle Design Features To Know: NO  
DRIVING TIPS  
Important Vehicle Design  
Features To Know  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
Your multipurpose vehicle has han-  
dling characteristics that differ from  
those of a conventional passenger  
car. For the safety of you and your  
passengers, please read the follow-  
ing section very carefully.  
52D078S  
WARNING  
• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.  
Even though air bags are equipped  
at the front seating positions, the  
driver and all passengers should  
be properly restrained at all times,  
using the seat belts provided. Refer  
to the “Seat Belts and Child  
Restraint Systems” section for  
instructions on proper use of the  
seat belts.  
• Never drive while under the influ-  
ence of alcohol or other drugs.  
Alcohol and drugs can seriously  
impair your ability to drive safely,  
greatly increasing the risk of injury  
to yourself and others. You should  
also avoid driving when you are  
tired, sick, irritated or under stress.  
Multipurpose vehicles such as your new  
SUZUKI have higher ground clearance and  
a narrower track than conventional pas-  
senger cars, to make them capable of per-  
forming in a wide variety of off-road  
applications. Specific design characteris-  
tics give them a higher center of gravity  
than ordinary cars. An advantage of the  
higher ground clearance is a better view of  
the road allowing you to anticipate prob-  
lems. They are not designed for cornering  
at the same speed as conventional pas-  
senger cars any more than low-slung  
sports cars are designed to perform satis-  
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all  
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt  
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this  
type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-  
rectly may result in loss of control or vehi-  
cle rollover.  
65D218  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a per-  
son wearing a seat belt.  
Important Differences Between  
Your Multipurpose Vehicle and  
Ordinary Passenger Cars  
Higher Ground Clearance  
The higher ground clearance of your vehi-  
cle enables it to clear off-road obstacles,  
such as rocks and tree stumps, that ordi-  
nary passenger cars cannot drive over. An  
unavoidable result of this higher ground  
clearance is that the vehicle also has a  
higher center of gravity. Consequently,  
your vehicle will handle differently than a  
vehicle with a lower center of gravity.  
Multipurpose vehicles have a significantly  
higher rollover rate than other types of  
vehicles.  
4-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Important Vehicle Design Features To Know: NO  
On-Pavement Driving: NO  
DRIVING TIPS  
Shorter Wheelbase  
Break-In  
Catalytic Converter  
Along with its higher ground clearance,  
your vehicle has a shorter wheelbase and  
shorter front and rear overhangs than  
many passenger cars. These features  
combine to allow you to drive your vehicle  
over hillcrests without hanging up on them  
or damaging the frame and chassis com-  
ponents. The shorter wheelbase also  
makes the steering of your vehicle more  
responsive than that of vehicles with longer  
wheelbases.  
CAUTION  
EXAMPLE  
The future performance and reliabil-  
ity of the engine depends on the care  
and restraint exercised during its  
early life. It is especially important to  
observe the following precautions  
during the initial 960 km (600 miles)  
of vehicle operation.  
• After starting, do not race the  
engine. Warm it up gradually.  
• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation  
at a constant speed. Moving parts  
will break in better if you vary your  
speed.  
• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid  
full throttle starts.  
• Avoid hard stopping, especially  
during the first 320 km (200 miles)  
of driving.  
• Do not drive slowly with the trans-  
mission in a high gear.  
• Drive the vehicle at moderate  
engine speeds.  
• Do not tow a trailer during the first  
960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper-  
ation.  
Narrower Body Width and Track  
Your vehicle is narrower than the average  
passenger car so that it can pass through  
tight spaces.  
54G236  
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to  
minimize the amount of harmful pollutants  
in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded  
fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic  
converters is prohibited by federal law,  
because lead deactivates the pollutant-  
reducing components of the catalyst sys-  
tem.  
Without the essential characteristics  
described above: higher ground clearance,  
shorter wheelbase and narrower body  
width and track – your vehicle could not  
provide you with excellent off road driving  
performance. However, it is also true that  
on-pavement driving, handling and steer-  
ing will be different from what drivers expe-  
rience with a conventional passenger car.  
The converter is designed to last the life of  
the vehicle under normal usage and when  
unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-  
nance is required on the converter. How-  
ever, it is very important to keep the engine  
properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which  
can result from an improperly tuned  
engine, may cause overheating of the cat-  
alyst. This may result in permanent heat  
damage to the catalyst and other vehicle  
components.  
4-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
On-Pavement Driving: NO  
Off-Road Driving: NO  
DRIVING TIPS  
CAUTION  
Improving Fuel Economy  
The following instructions will help you  
improve fuel economy.  
To minimize the possibility of catalyst  
or other vehicle damage:  
• Maintain the engine in the proper  
operating condition.  
• In the event of an engine malfunc-  
tion, particularly one involving  
engine misfire or other apparent  
loss of performance, have the vehi-  
cle serviced promptly.  
• Do not shut off the engine or inter-  
rupt the ignition when the transmis-  
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in  
motion.  
• Do not try to start the engine by  
pushing or towing the vehicle or  
coasting down a hill.  
• Do not idle the engine with any  
spark plug wires disconnected or  
removed, such as during diagnos-  
tic testing.  
• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-  
longed periods if idling seems  
rough or there are other malfunc-  
tions.  
• Do not allow the fuel tank to get  
near the empty level.  
Avoid excessive idling  
If you are to wait for more than a minute  
while you are parked, stop the engine and  
start it again later. When warming up a  
cold engine, allow the engine to idle until  
the temperature gauge pointer comes up  
to the “C” position. In this position, the  
engine is sufficiently warm for starting off.  
Avoid “jackrabbit” starts  
54G584S  
Fast starts away from lights or stop signs  
will consume fuel unnecessarily and  
shorten engine life. Start off slowly.  
WARNING  
Be careful where you park and drive;  
the catalytic converter and other  
exhaust components can get very  
hot. As with any vehicle, do not park  
or operate this vehicle in areas where  
combustible materials such as dry  
grass or leaves can come in contact  
with a hot exhaust system.  
Avoid unnecessary stops  
Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-  
ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed  
whenever possible. Slowing down and then  
accelerating again uses more fuel.  
Keep a steady cruising speed  
Keep as constant a speed as road and traf-  
fic conditions will permit.  
4-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Off-Road Driving: NO  
DRIVING TIPS  
Keep the air cleaner clean  
EXAMPLE  
All Types of Rollover Accidents  
On-Pavement Driving  
As with many kinds of automobile acci-  
dents, rollovers can be greatly reduced by  
doing what all prudent drivers should do,  
i.e., don’t drink and drive, don’t drive when  
tired and don’t do anything behind the  
wheel that could cause a loss of attention  
to the driving task.  
Government data show that most rollover  
accidents for multi-purpose vehicles are  
caused when a driver loses control of the  
vehicle and leaves the paved portion of the  
roadway striking a ditch, curb or other off-  
road object that causes the vehicle to over-  
turn. The following driving practices may  
reduce the risk of rollover.  
Additional guidelines are set out below for  
your on-road driving.  
Vehicle Slides Off-Road  
You can reduce the risk of this kind of roll-  
over accident by always keeping the vehi-  
cle under control. Typically, drivers lose  
control of vehicles, often resulting in roll-  
over accidents, when the driver is impaired  
because of alcohol or other drugs, falls  
asleep at the wheel or is otherwise inatten-  
tive, or is driving too fast for the road condi-  
tions.  
Know Your Vehicle  
Take time to familiarize yourself with the  
unique handling characteristics of your  
vehicle by first driving around in an area  
away from traffic. Practice turning the vehi-  
cle at a variety of speeds and in different  
directions. Get a feel for the greater steer-  
ing response that your vehicle has over a  
conventional car.  
60A183S  
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there  
will be greater intake resistance, resulting  
in decreased power output and increased  
fuel consumption.  
Rollovers On the Roadway  
Keep weight to a minimum  
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times  
The driver and all passengers should be  
properly restrained at all times, using the  
seat belts provided. Refer to the “Seat  
Belts and Child Restraint Systems” section  
for instructions on proper use of the seat  
belts.  
If, for any reason, your vehicle slides side-  
ways or spins out of control at highway  
speeds, while on the paved portion of the  
roadway, the risk of rollover is greatly  
increased. This condition can be created  
when two or more wheels drop off onto the  
shoulder and you steer sharply in an  
attempt to reenter the roadway. To reduce  
the risk of rollover in these circumstances,  
if conditions permit, you should hold the  
steering wheel firmly and slow down  
before pulling back into the travel lanes  
with controlled steering movements.  
The heavier the load, the more fuel the  
vehicle consumes. Take out any luggage  
or cargo when it is not necessary.  
Keep tire pressure correct  
Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel  
due to increased running resistance of the  
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct  
pressure shown on the label located below  
the driver’s side door latch striker.  
4-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Off-Road Driving: NO  
DRIVING TIPS  
Don’t Make Sharp Turns  
As mentioned before, small multipurpose  
vehicles have specific design characteris-  
tics that allow them to perform in a wide  
variety of applications. These characteris-  
tics also change the cornering behavior  
relative to conventional passenger cars.  
Remember, small multipurpose vehicles  
have more responsive steering and a  
higher center of gravity than conventional  
passenger cars. If at all possible, avoid  
making sharp turns in your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Do not operate your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry, hard  
surfaces. Operating your vehicle in  
“4H LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry,  
hard surfaces puts severe stress to  
the drive train, especially during tight  
cornering, and can damage it. Also,  
you may have some difficulty steer-  
ing.  
Unevenly worn tires can cause prob-  
lems in the operation of the transfer  
switch. Be sure to rotate the tires  
according to the maintenance sched-  
ule. Refer to “Tires” and “Mainte-  
nance  
Schedule”  
in  
the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for proper tire rotation proce-  
dures.  
NOTE:  
Slow Down on Curves  
Avoid operating your vehicle in “4H LOCK”  
or “4L LOCK” on wet pavement as much  
as possible. Operating your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on wet pavement  
may cause severe damage to the drive  
train.  
Learn to approach curves cautiously and  
at a conservative speed. Do not attempt to  
take curves at the same speeds that you  
would in a vehicle with a lower center of  
gravity. Just as you would not drive a  
sports car on a trail, you should not  
attempt to drive your vehicle around curves  
like a sports car.  
NOTE:  
Operating your vehicle in “4H” on dry and  
tight corner may cause some vibration on  
your vehicle. This is not caused by the  
vehicle malfunction, but caused by working  
of the limited slip differential gear in the  
center differential.  
Slow Down and Use Caution on Slip-  
pery Roads  
Under wet road conditions you should  
drive at a lower speed than on dry roads  
due to possible slippage of tires during  
braking. When driving on icy, snowcovered  
or muddy roads, reduce your speed and  
avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt braking  
or sharp steering movements. Use 4-wheel  
drive high range (4H) (if equipped) for bet-  
ter traction.  
4-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRIVING TIPS  
Do Not Turn on or Drive Across the Side  
of Hills  
Do not drive in the field covered with  
grown grass  
If you drive in the field covered with grass,  
it may cause unexpected accident or vehi-  
cle damage by getting caught in grown  
grass.  
Off-Road Driving  
Your vehicle has specific design character-  
istics for off-road driving. When you leave  
the pavement, you will encounter driving  
surfaces of all kinds which may change  
continually as you drive. In most cases, off-  
road driving requires the use of 4-wheel  
drive. If your vehicle is a 2-wheel drive  
vehicle, you should limit your off-road driv-  
ing only to hard, flat, nonslippery surfaces.  
2-wheel drive vehicles have far less trac-  
tion on off-road surfaces than 4-wheel  
drive vehicles. It is important when driving  
off-road to follow the guidelines below.  
Turning on or driving across the side of a  
hill can be extremely hazardous. Most of  
the vehicle’s weight will be transferred to  
the downhill tires, which could result in the  
vehicle rolling sideways. Whenever possi-  
ble, avoid this potential hazard. Also, if you  
have to exit your vehicle on a side-hill,  
always get out on the uphill side.  
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck  
If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or  
sand, follow the directions below:  
1) (For vehicles equipped with transfer  
switch) Turn the transfer switch to “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK”.  
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times  
You and your passengers should use the  
seat belts at all times when driving off-  
road. For proper seat belt use, refer to the  
“Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems”  
section in this manual.  
2) Shift the transmission back and forth  
between a forward range (or first gear  
for manual transmission) and reverse.  
This will create a rocking motion which  
may give you enough momentum to  
free the vehicle. Press gently on the  
accelerator to keep wheel spin to a min-  
imum. Remove your foot from the  
accelerator while shifting.  
Use Caution on Steep Inclines  
Always inspect hills before you attempt to  
drive up them. Know what is on the other  
side and how you will get back down. If you  
have any doubt that it is safe, do not  
attempt to drive over a hill. Never drive  
your vehicle up an extremely steep incline.  
Avoid Sudden Reactions in Mud, Ice or  
Snow  
Be careful when off-road conditions are  
slick. Reduce your speed and avoid sud-  
den movements of the vehicle. If your vehi-  
cle is a 2-wheel drive vehicle, do not drive  
in deep snow or mud. If your vehicle is a 4-  
wheel drive vehicle, be aware that driving  
in deep snow or mud can cause a loss of  
traction and an increase in the resistance  
to the vehicle’s forward motion. Use 4WD  
low gear (4L) and maintain a steady but  
moderate speed with a light touch on the  
steering wheel and brakes.  
Do not race the engine. Excessive  
wheel spin will cause the tires to dig  
deeper, making it more difficult to free  
the vehicle.  
Coming down a steep hill can be trickier  
than getting up one. Keep the vehicle  
heading straight down the hill and use low  
gear. Do not lock the brakes. If the vehicle  
begins to slide, accelerate slightly to regain  
steering control.  
3) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few  
minutes of rocking, get another vehicle  
to pull you out.  
4-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DRIVING TIPS  
Do not drive through deep or rushing  
water  
Tire Chains  
Tire chains should only be used if they are  
needed to increase traction or are required  
by law. Make sure that the chains you use  
are small-link chains or cable-type chains  
and are the correct size for your vehicle’s  
tires. Also make sure that there is enough  
clearance between the fenders and the  
chains as installed on the tires.  
WARNING  
Driving in deep or rushing water can be  
hazardous. You could lose control of the  
vehicle and the occupants could drown.  
Also, your vehicle could be seriously dam-  
aged. To avoid these risks, observe the fol-  
lowing instructions and precautions.  
• Do not allow anyone to stand near  
the vehicle when you are rocking it,  
and do not spin the wheels faster  
than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph)  
on the speedometer. Personal  
injury and/or vehicle damage may  
result from spinning the wheels too  
fast.  
• Be sure to turn the transfer switch  
from “4H” to “4H LOCK” or “4L  
LOCK” when the tires slip in “4H”.  
The continuing tires slip in “4H”  
can cause the limited slip differen-  
tial gear damage in the center dif-  
ferential.  
• Do not drive through deep or rushing  
water. Deep or rushing water, such as  
fast-moving streams or floodwaters,  
could carry your vehicle away from your  
intended path. The water is too deep if it  
covers your wheel hubs, axles or  
exhaust tailpipe. Know the depth of the  
water before you attempt to drive  
through it.  
• If water blocks the tailpipe, the engine  
may not start or run. If the water is deep  
enough to get drawn into the engine  
intake system, the engine will be badly  
damaged.  
• Submerged brakes will have poor brak-  
ing performance. Drive slowly and care-  
fully. Driving slowly will also help avoid  
water splashing onto the ignition system,  
which could cause the engine to stall.  
• Even when driving through shallow or  
still waters, drive carefully since the  
water may be hiding ground hazards  
such as holes, ditches or bumps.  
Install the chains on the rear tires tightly,  
according to the chain manufacturer’s  
instructions. Retighten the chains after  
driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-  
sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.  
CAUTION  
If you hear the chains hitting against  
the vehicle body while driving, stop  
and tighten them.  
CAUTION  
Release the accelerator pedal when  
operating the gearshift lever. Operat-  
ing the lever with the engine racing  
can damage the gears.  
CAUTION  
Do not continue rocking the vehicle  
for more than a few minutes. Pro-  
longed rocking can cause engine  
overheating, transmission or trans-  
fer case damage or tire damage.  
4-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVING TIPS  
WARNING  
WARNING  
In addition to following the driving  
tips in this section, it is important to  
observe the following precautions for  
on-road and off-road driving.  
(Continued)  
• Never use oversized tires or special  
shocks and springs to raise (jack  
up) your vehicle. This will raise the  
center of gravity of the vehicle and  
change its handling characteris-  
tics. Oversized tires may also rub  
against the fender over bumps,  
causing vehicle damage or tire fail-  
ure.  
• Driver and passengers should wear  
seat belts at all times.  
• Do not let anyone else drive your  
vehicle unless they are also aware  
of the vehicle characteristics and  
handling differences described in  
this section.  
• After driving through water, mud or  
sandy ground, test the brakes while  
driving at a slow speed to see if  
they have maintained their normal  
effectiveness. If the brakes are less  
effective than normal, dry them by  
repeatedly applying the brakes  
while driving slowly until the  
brakes have regained their normal  
effectiveness.  
• Do not use “4H LOCK” or “4L  
LOCK” drive for normal driving.  
• After extended operation in mud,  
sand or water, have the brakes  
inspected by your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possi-  
ble.  
• Avoid loaning your vehicle to any-  
one unless you accompany them.  
• Make sure your tires are in good  
condition and always maintain the  
specified tire pressure. Refer to  
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE”  
details.  
section  
for  
• Do not use tires other than those  
specified by SUZUKI. Never use dif-  
ferent sizes or types of tires on the  
front and rear wheels. For informa-  
tion regarding the specified tires,  
refer to the Tire Inflation Pressure  
Label located on the driver’s side  
door pillar or the “SPECIFICA-  
TIONS” section.  
(Continued)  
4-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRIVING TIPS  
MEMO  
4-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System  
(Climate Control) ................................................................. 5-1  
Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-8  
Audio Systems (Type A) ..................................................... 5-8  
Audio Systems (Type B) ..................................................... 5-36  
Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-62  
Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-63  
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-64  
Interior Light Switch ........................................................... 5-64  
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................. 5-65  
Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-66  
Accessory Socket (if equipped) ......................................... 5-66  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray (if equipped) ..................... 5-67  
Sunroof (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-68  
Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-70  
Coat Hooks (if equipped) .................................................... 5-70  
Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-71  
Overhead Console Box (if equipped) ................................ 5-71  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin (if equipped) ........................ 5-72  
Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped) ............................... 5-73  
Shopping Hook (if equipped) ............................................. 5-73  
Armrest ................................................................................ 5-73  
Floor Mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-74  
Luggage Compartment Cover ............................................ 5-74  
Underfloor Bins (if equipped) ............................................ 5-77  
Luggage Restraint Loops (if equipped) ............................ 5-78  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-78  
HomeLink® (if equipped) .................................................... 5-80  
Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-83  
5
60G407  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Parking Brake Lever: 6  
Pedals: 6  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
1. Windshield defroster outlet  
2. Side defroster outlet  
3. Side outlet  
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System  
(Climate Control)  
4. Center outlet  
Air Outlet  
5. Floor outlet  
EXAMPLE  
Center outlet  
1
EXAMPLE  
Open  
1
2
3
4
2
3
Close  
5
64J199  
5
5
5
66J250  
5-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pedals: 6  
Gearshift Lever: 10  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Side outlet  
Description of Controls  
(8)  
(1)  
(2)  
(7)  
(5)  
(4)  
(6)  
(9)  
(3)  
79K020  
(1) Temperature selector  
(2) Blower speed selector  
(3) Air intake selector  
(4) Air flow selector  
(5) Defrost switch  
63J045  
(6) “OFF” switch  
(7) “AUTO” switch  
When “Open”, air comes out from the side  
outlets regardless of the air flow selector  
position.  
(8) Air conditioning switch  
(9) LCD display  
5-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gearshift Lever: 10  
Fuel Filler Cap: 5  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Temperature selector (1)  
Air conditioning switch (8)  
Blower speed selector (2)  
(1)  
(2)  
A/C: OFF  
A/C: ON  
(8)  
78K047  
79K021  
78K048  
Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjust  
the temperature.  
The air conditioning switch (8) is used to  
turn on and off the air conditioning system.  
To turn on the air conditioning system,  
push in the switch and “A/C” will appear on  
the LCD display. To turn off the air condi-  
tioning system, push in the switch again  
and “A/C” will go off.  
The blower speed selector (2) is used to  
turn on the blower and to select blower  
speed.  
If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the  
blower speed will vary automatically as the  
climate control system maintains the  
selected temperature.  
5-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel Filler Cap: 5  
Folding Seats: 14  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Air intake selector (3)  
RECIRCULATED AIR (a)  
Air flow selector (4)  
When this mode is selected, outside air is  
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This  
mode is suitable when driving through an  
area with polluted air such as a tunnel, or  
when attempting to quickly cool down the  
vehicle.  
FRESH AIR (b)  
When this mode is selected, outside air is  
introduced.  
(a)  
(b)  
(4)  
“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”  
are selected alternately each time the air  
intake selector is pushed.  
(3)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
(f)  
79K022  
79K023  
NOTE:  
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an  
extended period of time, the air in the vehi-  
cle can become contaminated. Therefore,  
you should occasionally select “FRESH  
AIR”.  
Push the air intake selector (3) to change  
between the following modes.  
Push the air flow selector (4) to change  
among the following functions. The indica-  
tion of the selected mode appears on the  
LCD display.  
If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the air  
intake will vary automatically as the climate  
control system maintains the selected tem-  
perature.  
If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the air  
flow will vary automatically as the climate  
control system maintains the selected tem-  
perature.  
5-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Folding Seats: 14  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Ventilation (c)  
Heat (e)  
Defrost switch (5)  
(5)  
64J069  
64J071  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the center and side air outlets.  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the floor outlets and the side outlets, a  
small amount of air comes out of the wind-  
shield defroster outlets and the side  
defroster outlets.  
Bi-level (d)  
Heat & defrost (f)  
78K050  
Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the  
defroster.  
64J070  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out  
of the center and side outlets. When the  
temperature selector (1) is in the fully  
COLD position or fully HOT position, how-  
ever, the air from the floor outlets and the  
air from the center and side outlets will be  
the same temperature.  
64J072  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the floor outlets, the windshield defroster  
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the  
side outlets.  
5-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Folding Seats: 14  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Defrost  
inside temperature below outside tempera-  
ture.  
System Operating Instructions  
Automatic operation  
To turn the climate control system off, push  
the “OFF” switch (6).  
NOTE:  
If the “AUTO” on the LCD display blinks,  
there is a problem in the heating system  
and/or air conditioning system. You should  
have the system inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
66J241  
(7)  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the windshield defroster outlets, the side  
defroster outlets and the side outlets.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
To find the temperature at which you are  
most comfortable, start with the 22°C  
(72°F) setting.  
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to  
turn on the defroster, the air conditioning  
system will come on and the “FRESH AIR”  
mode will be selected automatically. In  
very cold weather, however, the air condi-  
tioning system will not turn on.  
(6)  
78K051  
• If you turn the temperature selector (1)  
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the LCD  
display, the climate control system will  
operate at the maximum cooling or heat-  
ing and the blower will run at full speed.  
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather  
or hot air in hot weather, the system will  
delay turning on the blower until warmed  
or chilled air is available.  
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun  
with the windows closed, it will cool  
faster if you open the windows briefly.  
• Even under the automatic operation, you  
can set individual selectors to the man-  
ual mode. The manually selected func-  
tions are maintained, and the other  
functions remain under automatic opera-  
tion.  
You can let the climate control system work  
automatically. To set the system for fully-  
automatic operation, follow the procedure  
below.  
1) Start the engine.  
2) Push the “AUTO” switch (7).  
3) Set the desired temperature by turning  
the temperature selector (1).  
The blower speed, air intake and air flow  
are controlled automatically to maintain the  
set temperature.  
You can use the air conditioning switch (8)  
to manually turn the air conditioner on or  
off according to your preference. When  
you turn the air conditioning switch off, the  
climate control system cannot lower the  
5-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Armrest: 14  
Sun Visor: 5  
Interior Light Switch: 7  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
To return the blower speed selector (2),  
air intake selector (3), and air flow selec-  
tor (4) to automatic operation, push the  
“AUTO” switch.  
Maintenance  
If you do not use the air conditioner for a  
long period, such as during winter, it may  
not give the best performance when you  
start using it again. To help maintain opti-  
mum performance and durability of your air  
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.  
Operate the air conditioner at least once a  
month for one minute with the engine  
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil  
and helps protect the internal components.  
(F)  
(G)  
Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil-  
ters. Clean or replace them as specified in  
the “Maintenance Schedule” in the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-  
tion. Have this job done by your SUZUKI  
dealer as the lower glove box must be low-  
ered for this job.  
64J074  
NOTE:  
If you need maximum defrosting:  
EXAMPLE  
• push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the  
defroster (the air conditioning system will  
come on and the “FRESH AIR” mode will  
be selected automatically),  
• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,  
• adjust the temperature selector to the  
“HI” indication on the LCD display, and  
• adjust the side outlets so the air blows  
on the side windows.  
64J080  
Be careful not to cover the interior temper-  
ature sensor (F) located between the  
steering wheel and the climate control  
panel, or the solar sensor (G) located at  
the top of the driver’s side dashboard.  
These sensors are used by the automatic  
system to regulate temperature.  
NOTE:  
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning  
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called  
“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around  
1993 for automotive applications. Other  
refrigerants are available, including recy-  
cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used  
in your vehicle.  
Manual operation  
You can manually control the climate con-  
trol system. Set the selectors to the  
desired positions.  
CAUTION  
Using the wrong refrigerant may  
damage your air conditioning sys-  
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or  
replace the R-134a with other refrig-  
erants.  
5-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Light Switch: 7  
Spot Light: 7  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Type 2  
Radio Antenna  
Audio Systems (type A)  
There are two types of audio system as  
shown below:  
Type 1  
79K104  
63J055  
AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER  
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
The radio antenna on the roof is remov-  
able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-  
terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn  
it clockwise firmly by hand.  
79K103  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER  
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage to the radio  
antenna:  
• Remove the antenna before using  
an automatic car wash.  
• Remove the antenna when it is pos-  
sible for the antenna to hit some-  
thing such as a low ceiling in a  
parking garage or putting a car  
cover over your car.  
• Remove the antenna before put-  
ting a car cover over your vehicle.  
5-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Luggage Compartment Light: 7  
Front Door Light:  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Never touch the surface.  
Precautions  
Cautions on Handling  
• When the inside of the car is very cold  
and the player is used soon after switch-  
ing on the heater, moisture may form on  
the disc or the optical parts of the player  
and proper playback may not be possi-  
ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it  
off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on  
the optical parts of the player, do not use  
the player for about one hour. This will  
allow the condensation to disappear nor-  
mally.  
(A)  
52D347  
52D274  
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a  
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from  
the center of the compact disc to the cir-  
cumference.  
This unit has been designed specifically for  
playback of compact discs bearing the  
mark (A).  
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which  
cause severe vibrations may cause  
sound to skip.  
No other discs can be played.  
• This unit uses a precision mechanism.  
Even in the event that trouble arises,  
never open the case, disassemble the  
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.  
Please bring the unit to an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer or a Clarion service  
Department.  
Removing the disc  
Proper way to hold  
the compact disc  
(B)  
(B)  
(C)  
52D277  
52D275  
New discs may have some roughness  
around the edges. The unit may not work  
or the sound may skip if such discs are  
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to  
remove the roughness (C) from edges of  
the disc before insertion inside the unit.  
To remove the compact disc from its stor-  
age case, press down on the center of the  
case and lift the disc out, holding it care-  
fully by the edges.  
Always handle the compact disc by the  
edges.  
5-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Seat Heater: 8  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
NOTE:  
• Do not use commercially available CD  
protection sheets or discs equipped with  
stabilizers, etc.  
These may get caught in the internal  
mechanism and damage the disc.  
• CD-R discs may not be able to playback  
in this unit due to the recording condi-  
52D348  
52D350  
tions.  
Never stick labels on the surface of the  
compact disc or mark the surface with a  
pencil or pen.  
Do not use compact discs that have large  
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.  
Use of such discs will cause damage or  
prevent the system from operating prop-  
erly.  
• CD-RW discs cannot playback in this  
unit.  
52D349  
Do not use any solvents such as commer-  
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,  
or thinner to clean compact discs.  
52D351  
Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-  
light or any heat source.  
5-10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assist Grips: 3  
Coat Hooks:  
Sunroof: 5, 8  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Basic Operations  
(A)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
79K086  
(5)  
(6)  
(1) Power on/off knob  
Volume control knob  
(1)  
(2)  
(2) Tone/balance/fader control knob  
(3) Preset button 5  
(4) Preset button 6  
(5) Clock button H  
(6) Clock button M  
(4)  
(3)  
(A) Clock display  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(5)  
(6)  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(3)  
79K105  
5-11  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sunroof: 5, 8  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Turning power on/off  
• When minutes are between 30 and 59,  
the clock will reset to the next hour.  
(example: 12:38 1:00)  
Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-  
trol)  
Press the power on/off knob (1).  
The unit starts in the function mode it was  
in when the power was turned off last.  
The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function  
automatically  
adjusts  
(increases/  
Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2).  
decreases) the sound volume in accor-  
dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control  
is provided with three selectable levels  
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume  
adjustment increases together with the  
LEVEL number,  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume control knob (1).  
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;  
turning it counterclockwise decreases the  
volume.  
Each time it is pressed, sound adjust-  
ment is changed as follows:  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode  
is selected.  
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) to select the desired AVC  
adjustment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL  
2)  
NOTE:  
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)  
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)  
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)  
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)  
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)  
Original mode  
While driving, adjust the volume to an  
extent that sound and/or noise coming  
from outside the car can be heard.  
Adjusting the clock  
1) Press the clock button H (5) to adjust  
the hours.  
Press the clock button M (6) to adjust  
the minutes.  
2) Hold the button depressed to automati-  
cally increment the number.  
3) To reset the clock to an hour signal,  
press the clock button H (5) while hold-  
ing the clock button M (6) depressed.  
Adjusting the contrast of the display  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) and preset button 5 (3), preset  
button 6 (4) simultaneously.  
2) To adjust the contrast of the display,  
turn the power on/off knob (1).  
Cancel the dimmer condition  
66J224  
Each time you press the power on/off knob  
(1) for two seconds with the lighting switch  
on, the background brightness of the audio  
display will switch between normal and  
dimmed.  
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) to adjust the sound.  
NOTE:  
When the clock has not been set, the time  
“12:00” will flash in the display.  
Clock reset is effected as follows:  
• When minutes are between 00 and 29,  
the clock will reset to the current hour.  
(example: 12:23 12:00)  
5-12  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sunroof: 5, 8  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to the Radio  
(C)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
(B)  
(D)  
66J097  
(2)  
(3)  
(6)  
(1)  
(1) Band switch button (FM/AM)  
(2) Seek up button  
(3) Seek down button  
(4)  
(4) Manual tuning knob  
(5) Preset buttons (1 to 6)  
(6) Auto store button (AS)/  
Scan button (SCAN)  
(5)  
(A) Band  
(B) Preset channel number  
(C) Stereo indicator  
(D) Frequency  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(2)  
(3)  
(6)  
(1)  
(4)  
(5)  
79K106  
5-13  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Hood: 5  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Selecting the reception band  
Preset memory  
Scan tuning  
Press the band switch button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the recep-  
tion band is switched as follows:  
1) Select the desired station.  
2) Select the preset button (5) to which  
you want to store the station and press  
and hold the button for 2 seconds or  
longer.  
1) Press the scan button (6).  
Stations are automatically sought for in  
a sequential order, starting from a sta-  
tion being currently received, and scan  
stops for 5 seconds at a frequency  
where there is a station available.  
2) Press the scan button (6) again to stop  
scanning at the frequency being cur-  
rently received.  
Auto store  
Press and hold the auto store button (6) for  
2 seconds or longer.  
Six stations in total are automatically  
stored to the preset buttons (5) in sequen-  
tial order, starting from the lower frequen-  
cies.  
Receiving a stereo broadcast station  
If a stereo broadcast station is received,  
the stereo indicator will light.  
66J098  
Seek tuning  
Press the seek up button (2) or the seek  
down button (3).  
The unit stops searching for a station at a  
frequency where a broadcast station is  
available.  
NOTE:  
• When the auto store is performed, the  
station previously stored in the memory  
at the position is overwritten.  
• When there are fewer than 6 stations  
that can be stored even if 2 rounds of  
auto store operation are performed, the  
stations previously stored at the remain-  
ing preset buttons (5) are not overwrit-  
ten.  
Manual tuning  
Turn the manual tuning knob (4).  
The frequency being received is displayed.  
5-14  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin: 3, 14  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Radio Reception  
Listening to a CD  
Radio reception can be affected by envi-  
ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio  
signal’s power and distance from the sta-  
tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may  
interfere or deflect radio reception, causing  
poor reception. Poor reception or radio  
static can also be caused by electric cur-  
rent from overhead wires or high voltage  
power lines.  
CAUTION  
• Never insert your finger or hand  
into the CD insertion slot. Never  
insert foreign objects.  
• Never insert a CD with glue coming  
out from adhesive tape or a rental  
CD label or with a trace indicating  
that adhesive tape or a rental CD  
label has been removed. This may  
cause the CD not to eject or result  
in a malfunction.  
(A)  
52D274  
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)  
cannot be used.  
• Some discs previously recorded in CD-  
R\CD-RW format may not be used.  
52D291  
• A CD is inserted with its label facing  
upward.  
• When there is a CD already loaded in  
the unit, another CD cannot be loaded at  
the same time. Do not use force when  
inserting the CD into the CD insertion  
slot.  
• If a blank disc (non-recorded CD-R) is  
loaded in the unit, the disc will be  
ejected.  
5-15  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overhead Console Box:  
Accessory Socket: 8  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Type 1  
Display  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built in CD Player)  
(D)  
(A)  
(C)  
(B)  
66J100  
(1) CD insertion slot  
(2) CD eject button  
(3) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(1)  
(4) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(5) Track down button/Rewind button  
(6) Repeat button (RPT)  
(6)  
(3)  
(2)  
(4)  
(5)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Track number  
(C) Play time  
(D) Repeat indicator  
NOTE:  
About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)  
• No adapter is required to play a single  
CD.  
• A single CD is inserted from the center  
of the CD insertion slot.  
• Since an ejected single CD is not auto-  
matically reloaded, be sure to remove  
the ejected single CD.  
79K107  
5-16  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessory Socket: 8  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray: 3, 8  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Loading a CD  
Listening to a CD  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (4) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (5) to rewind a  
track.  
Insert a CD in the CD insertion slot (1).  
When a CD is loaded, play starts and the  
CD indicator (A) lights.  
When a CD is inserted, it is automatically  
played back.  
When a CD is already inside the unit,  
press the disc button (3) to play back the  
CD. When a CD is inside the unit, the CD  
indicator (A) is lit on the display unit.  
Ejecting a CD  
Press the CD eject button (2).  
If you left a CD ejected for a period of  
about 15 seconds, it will be automatically  
drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-  
tion)  
Repeat play  
Press the repeat button (6).  
The repeat indicator (D) lights and the  
track currently being played is played  
repeatedly.  
Selecting a track  
• Press the track up button (4) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (5) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (5) is  
pressed once, the track being currently  
played will return to the beginning.  
Press the repeat button (6) again to cancel  
repeat play.  
The backup eject function:  
This function allows you to eject a CD with  
the power turned off by pressing the CD  
eject button (2).  
CAUTION  
If you forcefully try to push an ejected  
CD inside the unit before auto reload-  
ing, the disc surface might be  
scratched.  
5-17  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Frame Hooks: 5, 6  
Tire Changing Tools: 3, 5  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Type 2  
Display  
AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Changer)  
(F)  
(B)  
(C)  
(A)  
(D)  
(E)  
66J102  
(1) Load button (LOAD)  
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)  
(3) CD insertion slot  
(4) CD eject button  
(5) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(6) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(7) Track down button/Rewind button  
(8) Repeat button (RPT)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(5)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Disc number  
(C) Track number  
(D) Play time  
(E) CD indicator  
(F) Repeat indicator  
(2)  
79K108  
5-18  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Changing Tools: 3, 5  
Shopping Hook:  
Front Seat Back Pocket: 3  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
NOTE:  
Loading one CD  
Loading multiple CDs  
About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)  
1) Press the load button (1), then press  
one of the disc select buttons (2) that  
corresponds to the slot into which you  
want to load a CD.  
1) Press the load button (1) for 2 seconds  
or longer.  
• Since the unit is not compatible with a  
single CD, do not load it into the unit.  
• Keep in mind the fact that a single CD  
cannot be played even using a single CD  
adaptor for the unit.  
The indication “CD ALLappears in the  
display, and then the indication “In” and  
a disc number in the CD indicator will  
blink for about 15 seconds.  
• When a single CD is loaded into the unit  
accidentally, it will be ejected immedi-  
ately. Please be sure to remove it.  
If you forcefully try to push it into the unit  
without removing it, the CD cannot be  
ejected. This will result in a damage to  
the mechanism. Please never do this.  
2) Load a CD into the CD insertion slot  
(3).  
3) The indication “In” and the next disc  
number will blink in the display. Load  
the next CD.  
4) After loading the required number of  
CD’s, press any disc select button (2) to  
select the desired CD to listen to. If no  
select button is pressed, play will start  
from the first loaded CD.  
66J143  
Both the indication “In” and the selected  
disc number in the CD indicator will blink  
for about 15 seconds.  
2) Load the CD into the CD insertion slot  
(3). When the CD is loaded, play starts.  
The disk number in the CD indicator will  
light.  
Only the numbers in the CD indicator that  
correspond to the loaded slots will light.  
Ejecting one CD  
1) Select the CD you want to remove with  
the disc select buttons (2).  
CAUTION  
2) Press the CD eject button (4).  
If you leave the ejected CD without  
removing it, it will be drawn into the unit  
automatically after about 15 seconds.  
(Auto reload function)  
You can load a CD only while the indi-  
cation “In” is blinking for about 15  
seconds. During that period, the  
shutter located in the depth of the CD  
insertion slot (3) is opened. After 15  
seconds time has elapsed, the indi-  
cation “In” disappears from the dis-  
play and the shutter closes, making it  
impossible to load a CD. If you try to  
load the CD with the shutter closed,  
the CD may damage the shutter.  
Never do this.  
The buck up eject mechanism:  
This function allows you to eject the CD  
loaded in the unit with the unit turned off  
only by pressing the CD eject button (4).  
5-19  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Underseat Tray: 3  
Luggage Restraint Loops: 5  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Ejecting all the CDs  
Listening to a CD  
Repeat play  
Press the CD eject button (4) for 2 seconds  
or longer. All the CDs will be ejected from  
the unit in a sequential manner.  
1) When a CD is inserted, it is automati-  
cally played back.  
Press the repeat button (8).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
When a CD is already inside the unit,  
press the disc button (5) to play back  
the CD. When a CD is inside the unit,  
the CD indicator (A) is lit on the display  
unit.  
• Please prepare  
removed CDs can be stored.  
• If you leave the ejected CD without  
removing it, it will be drawn into the unit  
automatically after about 15 seconds.  
(Auto reload function)  
a
location where  
TRACK REPEAT  
2) If you want to play another CD, select it  
with the disc select buttons (2).  
Play starts from the point on the disc  
that the unit played last (Last position  
memory).  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
The buck up eject mechanism:  
66J144  
This function allows you to eject the CD  
loaded in the unit with the unit turned off  
only by pressing the CD eject button (4).  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
Selecting a track  
• Press the track up button (6) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (7) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (7) is  
pressed once, the track being currently  
played will return to the beginning.  
CAUTION  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (8) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
If you try to push an ejected CD  
inside the unit forcibly before auto  
reloading, the disc surface might be  
scratched.  
• TRACK REPEAT  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (F) lights.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (6) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (7) to rewind a  
track.  
The track currently being played is  
played repeatedly.  
• DISC REPEAT  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (F) lights.  
When all the tracks on the disc currently  
being played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
5-20  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Luggage Compartment Cover: 5  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display (Type 1)  
Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc  
(D)  
(E) (F)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(2)  
(5)  
66J104  
(3)  
(4)  
Display (Type 2)  
(D)  
(E) (F)  
(1)  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(G)  
66J105  
(1) Sound control knob  
(2) Repeat button (RPT)  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(4) Track down button/Rewind button  
(5) Display button (DISP)  
(A) Folder number  
(B) Track number  
(C) Play time  
(3)  
(4)  
(2)  
(5)  
(D) Repeat indicator  
(E) WMA indicator  
(F) MP3 indicator  
(G) CD indicator  
(1)  
79K109  
5-21  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Underfloor Bins:  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors: 5, 13  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
What is MP3/WMA?  
Points to remember when making MP3/  
WMA files  
Recording MP3/WMA files on a CD-  
media  
MP3 (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer-III) and WMA  
TM  
(Windows Media  
Audio) are the com-  
You are recommended to minimize the  
chances of making a disc that contains  
both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA files.  
• If CD-DA files are on the same disc as  
MP3 or WMA files, the songs may not  
play in the intended order, or some  
songs may not play at all.  
Common  
pression formats of digital audio. The  
former is developed by MPEG (Motion Pic-  
ture Experts Group), and the latter is  
developed by Microsoft Corporation. Using  
these compression formats, you can  
record the contents of about 10 music CDs  
on a single CD media (This figures refer to  
data recorded on a 650 MB CD-R or CD-  
RW at a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a  
sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).  
• High bit rate and high sampling fre-  
quency are recommended for high qual-  
ity sounds.  
• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not  
recommended because playing time is  
not displayed properly and sound may  
be skipped.  
• The playback sound quality differs  
depending on the encoding circum-  
stances. For details, refer to the user  
manual of your own encoding software  
and writing software.  
• When storing MP3 data and WMA data  
on the same disc, use different folders  
for each data.  
• Do not record files other than MP3/WMA  
files and unnecessary folder on a disc.  
• The name of an MP3/WMA file should  
be added by rules as shown in the fol-  
lowing descriptions and also comply with  
the rules of each file system.  
• The file extension “.mp3” or “.wma”  
should be assigned to each file depend-  
ing on the file format.  
You may encounter trouble in playing  
MP3/WMA files or displaying the infor-  
mation of MP3/WMA files recorded with  
certain writing software or CD recorders.  
• This unit does not have a play list func-  
tion.  
MP3  
• It is recommended to set the bit rate to  
“128 kbps or more” and “fixed”.  
WMA  
• It is recommended to set the bit rate to  
“64 kbps or more” and “fixed”.  
• Do not set the copy protect attribute on  
the WMA file to enable this unit to play  
back.  
NOTE:  
• Although Multi-session recording is sup-  
ported, the use of Disc-at-Once is rec-  
ommended.  
Never assign the “.mp3”, or “.wma” file  
name extension to a file that is not in the  
MP3/WMA format. This may not only pro-  
duce noise from the speaker damage, but  
also damage your hearing.  
5-22  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors: 5, 13  
HomeLink:  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Compression formats  
Maximum number of files/folders  
• Maximum number of files:  
CD Player: 999(files + folders)  
6-CD Player: 512(files + folders)  
• Maximum number of files in one folder:  
255  
• Maximum depth of trees: 8  
• Maximum number of folders: 255  
(Root folder is included.)  
MP3/WMA MODE  
MP3  
• Bit rate  
Selecting a folder  
Turn the sound control knob (1) to select a  
folder.  
MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 32 k - 320 kbps  
MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 8 k - 160 kbps  
• Sampling frequency  
MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 44.1 k/48 k/32  
kHz  
MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 22.05 k/24 k/16  
kHz  
Repeat play  
Press the repeat button (2).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
Type 1  
WMA (Ver.7, Ver.8, Ver.9*)  
• Bit rate  
32 k - 192 kbps  
TRACK REPEAT  
• Sampling frequency  
44.1 k/48 k/32 kHz  
* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are  
not supported.  
OFF  
FOLDER REPEAT  
66J128  
Supported file systems  
ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Apple Extension  
to ISO 9660, Joliet, Romeo  
Type 2  
TRACK REPEAT  
FOLDER REPEAT  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
66J145  
5-23  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HomeLink:  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
NOTE:  
Selecting a track  
Displaying CD titles  
This operation should be performed within  
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to  
the next track.  
Press the display button (5).  
Each time the button is pressed, the title  
changes as follows:  
2 seconds.  
• Press the track down button (4) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (4) is  
pressed once, the track currently being  
played will start again at the beginning.  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (2) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
OFF  
ALBUM TITLE  
FOLDER TITLE  
FILE TITLE  
• TRACK REPEAT  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
The track currently being played is  
played repeatedly.  
• FOLDER REPEAT  
• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a  
track.  
The indication “FOLDER RPT” appears  
in the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
All the tracks in the folder currently being  
played are played repeatedly.  
• DISC REPEAT  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
When all the tracks on the disc currently  
being played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
ARTIST TITLE  
TRACK TITLE  
66J146  
Forwarding a title  
If there is a title with 12 letters or more,  
each press will show next letters in the dis-  
play. (No scrolling is made.)  
Press and hold the display button (5) for 2  
seconds or longer. A title is changed.  
5-24  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HomeLink:  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option)  
(C)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
(B)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1)  
(5)  
(2)  
66J107  
(8)  
(6)  
(1) XM button  
(2) Category button (CAT)  
(3) Seek up button  
(4) Seek down button  
(5) Manual tuning knob  
(6) Display button (DISP)  
(7) Preset button (1 to 6)  
(8) Scan button (SCAN)  
(7)  
(A) Band  
(B) Channel number  
(C) Category indicator  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
If you want to purchase XM Satellite Radio  
Service, contact your SUZUKI dealer.  
It is necessary to buy a special tuner to  
receive XM broadcasting.  
(3)  
(8)  
(6)  
(4)  
(1)  
(5)  
(2)  
Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM  
Satellite Radio anywhere in the United  
States except Hawaii, Alaska, and Can-  
ada.  
(7)  
79K110  
5-25  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
XM MODE  
Selecting a category  
and hold the button for 2 seconds or  
longer.  
Press the seek up button (3) or seek down  
button (4) to select a category.  
Selecting a band  
Press the XM button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the band  
changes in the following order.  
Scan tuning  
Displaying the category  
1) Press the scan button (8).  
Stations are automatically searched for  
in a sequential order, starting from the  
station being currently received, and  
scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at the  
frequency where there is a station avail-  
able.  
Press the category button (2) to have the  
currently selected category appear on the  
display.  
XM1  
XM2  
XM3  
Selecting a channel  
Turn the manual tuning knob (5) to select a  
channel.  
2) Press the scan button (8) again to stop  
scanning at the frequency currently  
being received.  
66J129  
NOTE:  
When the category function is on, only  
those channels included in the selected  
category can be selected.  
Selecting a category  
Satellite Radio Reception  
Press the seek up button (3) or the seek  
down button (4). The category is changed.  
Satellite radio receives signals from two  
satellites in orbit over the equator. There-  
fore, satellite radio reception can be inter-  
rupted when there are objects south of  
your vehicle. To help compensate for this,  
ground-based repeaters are placed in  
major metropolitan areas, but depending  
on the geographic situation (for example, if  
mountains or buildings are on the south  
side of your vehicle), you may experience  
reception problems.  
Selecting the item to be displayed  
Press the display button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, the item  
on display changes in the following order.  
Turning the category function on/off  
Press and hold the category button (2) for  
2 seconds or longer, and “CATEGORY  
ON” appears on the display, the CAT indi-  
cator (C) lights up and the CATEGORY  
function is activated.  
Press and hold the category button (2) for  
2 seconds or longer again, and “CATE-  
GORY OFF” appears on the display and  
the CAT indicator (C) turns off, indicating  
that the CATEGORY function has been  
turned off.  
CH NUMBER  
TITLE  
CH NAME  
NAME  
66J130  
Preset memory  
1) Select the desired station.  
2) Select the preset button (7) to which  
you want to store the station and press  
NOTE:  
The first time you use the radio, turn the  
category function on.  
5-26  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to Audio for AUX (Option)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
66J221  
(1) Aux button (CD/AUX)  
(A) Mode indicator  
Aux function  
This system has an external input terminal  
so you can listen to audio from an external  
device connected to this unit.  
(1)  
Press the aux button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected mode is switched as follows:  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
CD  
AUX  
66J123  
(1)  
79K111  
5-27  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option)  
(G)  
(E) (F)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A) (B)  
(D)  
(C)  
(5)  
66J113  
(3)  
(4)  
(1) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)  
(1)  
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(4) Track down button/Rewind button  
(5) Repeat button (RPT)  
(6)  
(6) Category button (CAT)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Disc number  
(2)  
(C) Track number  
(D) Play time  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(E) Repeat indicator  
(F) Random indicator  
(G) CD changer number  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(1)  
(6)  
(2)  
79K112  
5-28  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Selecting a CD changer mode  
Press the disc button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected CD plays as follows:  
Selecting a track  
To cancel random play, press the category  
button (6) several times to change the ran-  
dom play mode to OFF.  
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (4) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
• TRACK RANDOM  
When the track down button (4) is  
pressed once, the track currently being  
played will start again at the beginning.  
The tracks in the disc that is loaded are  
played at random.  
• DISC RANDOM  
Built-in CD player  
CD changer 1  
CD changer 2  
The tracks in all discs are played at ran-  
dom.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a  
track.  
NOTE:  
The random play can be operated with the  
External CD Changer (Option) only.  
Random play  
Repeat play  
Press the category button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, the mode  
changes in the following order.  
Press the repeat button (5).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
52D300  
• When only one CD changer is con-  
nected to this unit, CD changer 2 is  
skipped.  
TRACK RANDOM  
TRACK REPEAT  
• When no CD is loaded in the built-in CD  
player, the built-in CD player is skipped.  
OFF  
DISC RANDOM  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
Selecting a disc  
66J131  
66J144  
Press the disc select button (2) corre-  
sponding to the disc number you want to  
listen to.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
Play starts from the first track on the disc. If  
a disc number having no disc is pressed,  
the selection will be invalid.  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (5) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
5-29  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
• TRACK REPEAT  
To control the volume:  
Remote Audio Controls  
(if equipped)  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (E) lights.  
To increase the volume, push the upper  
part of the switch (1). The volume contin-  
ues to increase until you release the  
switch.  
The track being currently played is  
played repeatedly.  
To decrease the volume, push the lower  
part of the switch (1). The volume contin-  
ues to decrease until you release the  
switch.  
• DISC REPEAT  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (E) lights.  
To mute, push the switch (2).  
When all the tracks on a disc being cur-  
rently played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
To select the mode (AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2,  
XM (option), CD, External CD-changer  
(option), AUX (option)), push the switch  
(3).  
You can also turn on the audio system by  
pushing the switch (3).  
To change the radio station:  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
(4)  
To advance to the next preset station,  
push the upper part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
To select the previous preset station,  
push the lower part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-  
tion, push and hold the upper part of the  
switch (4).  
To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-  
tion, push and hold the lower part of the  
switch (4).  
79K052  
You can control basic functions of the  
audio system with the switches on the  
steering wheel.  
5-30  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
To change the selection on a CD:  
Anti-Theft Feature  
To advance to the next track on a CD,  
push the upper part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
To select the previous track on a CD,  
push the lower part of the switch (4).  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
79K113  
5-31  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
EXAMPLE  
(1) Power on/off knob  
(2) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(3) Preset buttons (1 to 6)  
NOTE:  
Establish your PIN by combining numbers  
from 1 to 6 into any 4-digit number. If you  
forget your PIN, when you remove the bat-  
tery for repair etc., you will no longer be  
able to operate the audio system.  
The anti-theft feature is intended to dis-  
courage theft or the audio system by pre-  
venting the system from operating when it  
is moved to a different vehicle.  
This feature works by allowing you to enter  
a Personal Identification Number (PIN).  
When the audio system is disconnected  
from its power source, such as when the  
audio system is removed or the battery is  
disconnected, the system will not operate  
again unless the PIN is reentered.  
EXAMPLE  
66J117  
5) Input the same 4-digit number you pre-  
viously entered.  
66J117  
3) Input the four digit PIN using preset but-  
tons 1 to 6.  
Setting the Anti-Theft Function  
1) Turn off the power by pressing the  
power on/off knob (1).  
66J120  
6) The power of the audio system will turn  
off.  
NOTE:  
Write down your PIN for the future use.  
66J118  
4) After you enter your four digit PIN, the  
display will return to “0000”.  
Canceling Your Established PIN  
Setting  
66J118  
This operation is to be done when you  
want to cancel the anti-theft function or  
change your PIN.  
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while  
pressing and holding the track up but-  
ton (2). The “ENTRY 0000” will blink  
and the audio system enter PIN-input  
mode.  
1) Turn off the power by pressing the  
power on/off knob (1).  
5-32  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
registered PIN, the power of the audio  
system will turn off, and you will be able  
to operate the audio system.  
Confirming Your Personal Identifi-  
cation Number (PIN)  
When the main power source is discon-  
nected such as when you exchange your  
battery, etc, you will have to confirm your  
PIN to be able to use the audio system.  
NOTE:  
• If you input your PIN incorrectly, ----” will  
be displayed and the anti-theft function  
lock mode is entered. If you enter an  
incorrect PIN fewer than 6 times, the  
locking time will be for 15 seconds; if you  
enter an incorrect PIN more than 6  
times, the locking time will be for 15 min-  
utes.  
To confirm your PIN:  
66J121  
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while  
pressing and holding the track up but-  
ton (2). The “DELETE 0000” will blink  
and the audio system will enter the can-  
cel mode.  
• If you forget your PIN and enter a wrong  
PIN, you cannot perform any further  
operation.  
EXAMPLE  
66J122  
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”  
position.  
EXAMPLE  
66J124  
3) Input your PIN. The power of the audio  
system will turn off and your PIN will be  
deleted.  
To change your PIN, first delete your  
current PIN, then set a new one.  
66J125  
2) Input your PIN.  
If the PIN that you input matches the  
5-33  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Troubleshooting  
Applicable to every device  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Power is not turned on.  
(No sound is produced)  
Fuse is blown.  
Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
Connections are not properly made.  
Radio  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Too much noise.  
Not tuned correctly to the frequency of a sta- Tune correctly to the station frequency.  
tion.  
Stations cannot be selected by There is no station with strong radio waves.  
seek tuning.  
Select stations by manual tuning.  
CD  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Compact disc cannot be loaded. Another compact disc is already loaded.  
Eject the compact disc before loading a new  
one.  
Sound skips or is noisy.  
Compact disc is dirty.  
Clean the compact disc with a soft cloth.  
Compact disc is heavily scratched or warped.  
Replace with a compact disc with no scratches.  
Sound is bad directly after power Water droplets may form on the internal lens Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.  
is turned on.  
when the car is parked in a humid place.  
5-34  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Error display  
This unit has a number of self-diagnostic functions to protect the system.  
If a problem should occur, the display shows the type of error. Refer to the table below and take proper measures to correct the problem.  
If the problem is corrected, the unit will operate normally.  
Error display  
Measures to be taken  
CD/CD changer “Mechanical error”.  
This error display indicates a mechanical failure in the CD changer  
(failure to change or eject a disc).  
The mechanism is probably damaged. Contact your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
CD/CD changer “Focus error”.  
The pick-up-focus is not properly functioning during playback due to  
damage on the disc or for other reasons.  
Check disc for damage.  
CD/CD changer “Disc error”.  
The CD is inserted upside down or only an eight-centimeter CD  
adapter is equipped.  
Check disc for correct loading.  
If an error display not listed above appears, turn off the unit and contact your SUZUKI dealer.  
5-35  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Cautions on Handling  
Precautions  
Audio Systems (type B)  
• When the inside of the car is very cold  
and the player is used soon after switch-  
ing on the heater, moisture may form on  
the disc or the optical parts of the player  
and proper playback may not be possi-  
ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it  
off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on  
the optical parts of the player, do not use  
the player for about one hour. This will  
allow the condensation to disappear nor-  
mally.  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER  
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(Built-in CD Player)  
(A)  
52D274  
This unit has been designed specifically for  
playback of compact discs bearing the  
mark (A).  
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which  
cause severe vibrations may cause  
sound to skip.  
No other discs can be played.  
• This unit uses a precision mechanism.  
Even in the event that trouble arises,  
never open the case, disassemble the  
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.  
Please bring the unit to an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer or a Clarion service  
Department.  
Removing the disc  
Proper way to hold  
the compact disc  
79KA001  
52D275  
To remove the compact disc from its stor-  
age case, press down on the center of the  
case and lift the disc out, holding it care-  
fully by the edges.  
Always handle the compact disc by the  
edges.  
5-36  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Never touch the surface.  
prevent the system from operating prop-  
erly.  
52D348  
52D347  
Never stick labels on the surface of the  
compact disc or mark the surface with a  
pencil or pen.  
52D351  
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a  
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from  
the center of the compact disc to the cir-  
cumference.  
Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-  
light or any heat source.  
NOTE:  
• Do not use commercially available CD  
protection sheets or discs equipped with  
stabilizers, etc.  
These may get caught in the internal  
mechanism and damage the disc.  
• CD-R discs may not be able to playback  
in this unit due to the recording condi-  
tions.  
(B)  
(B)  
(C)  
52D349  
Do not use any solvents such as commer-  
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,  
or thinner to clean compact discs.  
• CD-RW discs cannot playback in this  
unit.  
52D277  
New discs may have some roughness  
around the edges. The unit may not work  
or the sound may skip if such discs are  
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to  
remove the roughness (C) from edges of  
the disc before insertion inside the unit.  
52D350  
Do not use compact discs that have large  
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.  
Use of such discs will cause damage or  
5-37  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Basic Operations  
(A)  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
79K086  
(1) Power on/off knob  
Volume control knob  
(2) Tone/balance/fader control knob  
(3) Preset button 5  
(4) Preset button 6  
(5)  
(6)  
(5) Clock button H  
(6) Clock button M  
(1)  
(2)  
(A) Clock display  
(4)  
(3)  
79KA002  
5-38  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Turning power on/off  
• When minutes are between 30 and 59,  
the clock will reset to the next hour.  
(example: 12:38 1:00)  
Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-  
trol)  
Press the power on/off knob (1).  
The unit starts in the function mode it was  
in when the power was turned off last.  
The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function  
automatically  
adjusts  
(increases/  
Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2).  
decreases) the sound volume in accor-  
dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control  
is provided with three selectable levels  
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume  
adjustment increases together with the  
LEVEL number,  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume control knob (1).  
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;  
turning it counterclockwise decreases the  
volume.  
Each time it is pressed, sound adjust-  
ment is changed as follows:  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode  
is selected.  
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) to select the desired AVC  
adjustment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL  
2)  
NOTE:  
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)  
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)  
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)  
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)  
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)  
Original mode  
While driving, adjust the volume to an  
extent that sound and/or noise coming  
from outside the car can be heard.  
Adjusting the clock  
1) Press the clock button H (5) to adjust  
the hours.  
Press the clock button M (6) to adjust  
the minutes.  
2) Hold the button depressed to automati-  
cally increment the number.  
3) To reset the clock to an hour signal,  
press the clock button H (5) while hold-  
ing the clock button M (6) depressed.  
Adjusting the contrast of the display  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) and preset button 5 (3), preset  
button 6 (4) simultaneously.  
2) To adjust the contrast of the display,  
turn the power on/off knob (1).  
66J224  
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) to adjust the sound.  
NOTE:  
When the clock has not been set, the time  
“12:00” will flash in the display.  
Clock reset is effected as follows:  
• When minutes are between 00 and 29,  
the clock will reset to the current hour.  
(example: 12:23 12:00)  
5-39  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to the Radio  
(C)  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
(A)  
(B)  
(D)  
66J097  
(1) Band switch button (FM/AM)  
(2) Seek up button  
(3) Seek down button  
(4) Manual tuning knob  
(5) Preset buttons (1 to 6)  
(6) Auto store button (AS)/  
Scan button (SCAN)  
(2)  
(3)  
(6)  
(1)  
(A) Band  
(4)  
(B) Preset channel number  
(C) Stereo indicator  
(D) Frequency  
(5)  
79KA003  
5-40  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Selecting the reception band  
Preset memory  
Scan tuning  
Press the band switch button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the recep-  
tion band is switched as follows:  
1) Select the desired station.  
2) Select the preset button (5) to which  
you want to store the station and press  
and hold the button for 2 seconds or  
longer.  
1) Press the scan button (6).  
Stations are automatically sought for in  
a sequential order, starting from a sta-  
tion being currently received, and scan  
stops for 5 seconds at a frequency  
where there is a station available.  
2) Press the scan button (6) again to stop  
scanning at the frequency being cur-  
rently received.  
Auto store  
Press and hold the auto store button (6) for  
2 seconds or longer.  
Six stations in total are automatically  
stored to the preset buttons (5) in sequen-  
tial order, starting from the lower frequen-  
cies.  
Receiving a stereo broadcast station  
If a stereo broadcast station is received,  
the stereo indicator will light.  
66J098  
Seek tuning  
Press the seek up button (2) or the seek  
down button (3).  
The unit stops searching for a station at a  
frequency where a broadcast station is  
available.  
NOTE:  
• When the auto store is performed, the  
station previously stored in the memory  
at the position is overwritten.  
• When there are fewer than 6 stations  
that can be stored even if 2 rounds of  
auto store operation are performed, the  
stations previously stored at the remain-  
ing preset buttons (5) are not overwrit-  
ten.  
Manual tuning  
Turn the manual tuning knob (4).  
The frequency being received is displayed.  
5-41  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
CAUTION  
Radio Reception  
Listening to a CD  
Radio reception can be affected by envi-  
ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio  
signal’s power and distance from the sta-  
tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may  
interfere or deflect radio reception, causing  
poor reception. Poor reception or radio  
static can also be caused by electric cur-  
rent from overhead wires or high voltage  
power lines.  
• Never insert your finger or hand  
into the CD insertion slot. Never  
insert foreign objects.  
• Never insert a CD with glue coming  
out from adhesive tape or a rental  
CD label or with a trace indicating  
that adhesive tape or a rental CD  
(A)  
52D274  
label has been removed. This may  
cause the CD not to eject or result  
in a malfunction.  
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)  
cannot be used.  
• Some discs previously recorded in CD-  
R\CD-RW format may not be used.  
52D291  
• A CD is inserted with its label facing  
upward.  
• When there is a CD already loaded in  
the unit, another CD cannot be loaded at  
the same time. Do not use force when  
inserting the CD into the CD insertion  
slot.  
• If a blank disc (non-recorded CD-R) is  
loaded in the unit, the disc will be  
ejected.  
5-42  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
Display  
(D)  
(A)  
(C)  
(B)  
66J100  
(1) CD insertion slot  
(2) CD eject button  
(3) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(1)  
(6)  
(3)  
(2)  
(4) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(5) Track down button/Rewind button  
(6) Repeat button (RPT)  
(4)  
(5)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Track number  
(C) Play time  
(D) Repeat indicator  
NOTE:  
About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)  
• No adapter is required to play a single  
CD.  
• A single CD is inserted from the center  
of the CD insertion slot.  
• Since an ejected single CD is not auto-  
matically reloaded, be sure to remove  
the ejected single CD.  
79KA004  
5-43  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Loading a CD  
Listening to a CD  
Repeat play  
Insert a CD in the CD insertion slot (1).  
When a CD is loaded, play starts and the  
CD indicator (A) lights.  
When a CD is inserted, it is automatically  
played back.  
Press the repeat button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
When a CD is already inside the unit,  
press the disc button (3) to play back the  
CD. When a CD is inside the unit, the CD  
indicator (A) is lit on the display unit.  
Ejecting a CD  
Press the CD eject button (2).  
If you left a CD ejected for a period of  
about 15 seconds, it will be automatically  
drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-  
tion)  
TRACK REPEAT  
Selecting a track  
• Press the track up button (4) to listen to  
the next track.  
OFF  
• Press the track down button (5) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (5) is  
pressed once, the track being currently  
played will return to the beginning.  
64J287  
The backup eject function:  
This function allows you to eject a CD with  
the power turned off by pressing the CD  
eject button (2).  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
CAUTION  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (6) to change the repeat play mode to  
OFF.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (4) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (5) to rewind a  
track.  
If you forcefully try to push an ejected  
CD inside the unit before auto reload-  
ing, the disc surface might be  
scratched.  
• TRACK REPEAT  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
The track currently being played is  
played repeatedly.  
5-44  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc  
(D)  
(E) (F)  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
66J104  
(1) Sound control knob  
(2) Repeat button (RPT)  
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(4) Track down button/Rewind button  
(5) Display button (DISP)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(A) Folder number  
(B) Track number  
(C) Play time  
(5)  
(1)  
(D) Repeat indicator  
(E) WMA indicator  
(F) MP3 indicator  
79KA005  
5-45  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
What is MP3/WMA?  
Points to remember when making MP3/  
WMA files  
Recording MP3/WMA files on a CD-  
media  
MP3 (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer-III) and WMA  
TM  
(Windows Media  
Audio) are the com-  
You are recommended to minimize the  
chances of making a disc that contains  
both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA files.  
• If CD-DA files are on the same disc as  
MP3 or WMA files, the songs may not  
play in the intended order, or some  
songs may not play at all.  
Common  
pression formats of digital audio. The  
former is developed by MPEG (Motion Pic-  
ture Experts Group), and the latter is  
developed by Microsoft Corporation. Using  
these compression formats, you can  
record the contents of about 10 music CDs  
on a single CD media (This figures refer to  
data recorded on a 650 MB CD-R or CD-  
RW at a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a  
sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).  
• High bit rate and high sampling fre-  
quency are recommended for high qual-  
ity sounds.  
• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not  
recommended because playing time is  
not displayed properly and sound may  
be skipped.  
• The playback sound quality differs  
depending on the encoding circum-  
stances. For details, refer to the user  
manual of your own encoding software  
and writing software.  
• When storing MP3 data and WMA data  
on the same disc, use different folders  
for each data.  
• Do not record files other than MP3/WMA  
files and unnecessary folder on a disc.  
• The name of an MP3/WMA file should  
be added by rules as shown in the fol-  
lowing descriptions and also comply with  
the rules of each file system.  
• The file extension “.mp3” or “.wma”  
should be assigned to each file depend-  
ing on the file format.  
You may encounter trouble in playing  
MP3/WMA files or displaying the infor-  
mation of MP3/WMA files recorded with  
certain writing software or CD recorders.  
• This unit does not have a play list func-  
tion.  
MP3  
• It is recommended to set the bit rate to  
“128 kbps or more” and “fixed”.  
WMA  
• It is recommended to set the bit rate to  
“64 kbps or more” and “fixed”.  
• Do not set the copy protect attribute on  
the WMA file to enable this unit to play  
back.  
NOTE:  
• Although Multi-session recording is sup-  
ported, the use of Disc-at-Once is rec-  
ommended.  
Never assign the “.mp3”, or “.wma” file  
name extension to a file that is not in the  
MP3/WMA format. This may not only pro-  
duce noise from the speaker damage, but  
also damage your hearing.  
5-46  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Compression formats  
Maximum number of files/folders  
• Maximum number of files:  
999(files + folders)  
• Maximum number of files in one folder:  
255  
• Maximum depth of trees: 8  
• Maximum number of folders: 255  
(Root folder is included.)  
MP3/WMA MODE  
MP3  
• Bit rate  
Selecting a folder  
Turn the sound control knob (1) to select a  
folder.  
MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 32 k - 320 kbps  
MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 8 k - 160 kbps  
• Sampling frequency  
MPEG1 Audio Layer III : 44.1 k/48 k/32  
kHz  
MPEG2 Audio Layer III : 22.05 k/24 k/16  
kHz  
Repeat play  
Press the repeat button (2).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
WMA (Ver.7, Ver.8, Ver.9*)  
• Bit rate  
32 k - 192 kbps  
TRACK REPEAT  
• Sampling frequency  
44.1 k/48 k/32 kHz  
OFF  
FOLDER REPEAT  
* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are  
not supported.  
66J128  
Supported file systems  
ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Apple Extension  
to ISO 9660, Joliet, Romeo  
5-47  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
NOTE:  
Selecting a track  
Displaying CD titles  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to  
the next track.  
Press the display button (5).  
Each time the button is pressed, the title  
changes as follows:  
• Press the track down button (4) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (4) is  
pressed once, the track currently being  
played will start again at the beginning.  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (2) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
OFF  
ALBUM TITLE  
FOLDER TITLE  
FILE TITLE  
• TRACK REPEAT  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
The track currently being played is  
played repeatedly.  
• FOLDER REPEAT  
• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a  
track.  
The indication “FOLDER RPT” appears  
in the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
All the tracks in the folder currently being  
played are played repeatedly.  
ARTIST TITLE  
TRACK TITLE  
66J146  
Forwarding a title  
If there is a title with 12 letters or more,  
each press will show next letters in the dis-  
play. (No scrolling is made.)  
Press and hold the display button (5) for 2  
seconds or longer. A title is changed.  
5-48  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to Audio for AUX  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
(A)  
80JA007  
(1) Aux button (CD/AUX)  
(2) Aux input connector  
(A) Mode indicator  
(1)  
(2)  
79KA006  
5-49  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
CAUTION  
Aux function  
NOTE:  
This system has an external input terminal  
so you can listen to audio from an external  
device connected to this unit.  
• AUX1 is displayed when an external  
component is connected to the front-  
panel AUX input connector.  
• Do not attempt to connect or oper-  
ate an external component while  
engaged in driving.  
• Use a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug cord to  
connect external components to the  
AUX input connector.  
Press the aux button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected mode is switched as follows:  
• Do not allow the cord to interfere  
with the driver’s actions.  
• If an external component is con-  
nected when its audio volume has  
been set to a high level, a loud  
sound volume may suddenly be  
produced.  
CD  
AUX1  
80JA008  
5-50  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option)  
(C)  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
(A)  
(B)  
66J107  
(1) XM button  
(2) Category button (CAT)  
(3) Seek up button  
(4) Seek down button  
(5) Manual tuning knob  
(6) Display button (DISP)  
(7) Preset button (1 to 6)  
(8) Scan button (SCAN)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1)  
(5)  
(2)  
(8)  
(6)  
(A) Band  
(B) Channel number  
(C) Category indicator  
If you want to purchase XM Satellite Radio  
Service, contact your SUZUKI dealer.  
It is necessary to buy a special tuner to  
receive XM broadcasting.  
(7)  
Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM  
Satellite Radio anywhere in the United  
States except Hawaii, Alaska, and Can-  
ada.  
79KA007  
5-51  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
XM MODE  
Selecting a category  
and hold the button for 2 seconds or  
longer.  
Press the seek up button (3) or seek down  
button (4) to select a category.  
Selecting a band  
Press the XM button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the band  
changes in the following order.  
Scan tuning  
Displaying the category  
1) Press the scan button (8).  
Stations are automatically searched for  
in a sequential order, starting from the  
station being currently received, and  
scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at the  
frequency where there is a station avail-  
able.  
Press the category button (2) to have the  
currently selected category appear on the  
display.  
XM1  
XM2  
XM3  
Selecting a channel  
Turn the manual tuning knob (5) to select a  
channel.  
2) Press the scan button (8) again to stop  
scanning at the frequency currently  
being received.  
66J129  
NOTE:  
When the category function is on, only  
those channels included in the selected  
category can be selected.  
Selecting a category  
Satellite Radio Reception  
Press the seek up button (3) or the seek  
down button (4). The category is changed.  
Satellite radio receives signals from two  
satellites in orbit over the equator. There-  
fore, satellite radio reception can be inter-  
rupted when there are objects south of  
your vehicle. To help compensate for this,  
ground-based repeaters are placed in  
major metropolitan areas, but depending  
on the geographic situation (for example, if  
mountains or buildings are on the south  
side of your vehicle), you may experience  
reception problems.  
Selecting the item to be displayed  
Press the display button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, the item  
on display changes in the following order.  
Turning the category function on/off  
Press and hold the category button (2) for  
2 seconds or longer, and “CATEGORY  
ON” appears on the display, the CAT indi-  
cator (C) lights up and the CATEGORY  
function is activated.  
Press and hold the category button (2) for  
2 seconds or longer again, and “CATE-  
GORY OFF” appears on the display and  
the CAT indicator (C) turns off, indicating  
that the CATEGORY function has been  
turned off.  
CH NUMBER  
TITLE  
CH NAME  
NAME  
66J130  
Preset memory  
1) Select the desired station.  
2) Select the preset button (7) to which  
you want to store the station and press  
NOTE:  
The first time you use the radio, turn the  
category function on.  
5-52  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to Audio for AUX (Option)  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
(A)  
80JA011  
(1) Aux button (CD/AUX)  
(A) Mode indicator  
Aux function  
This system has an external input terminal  
so you can listen to audio from an external  
device connected to this unit.  
(1)  
Press the aux button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected mode is switched as follows:  
CD  
AUX2  
80JA012  
79KA008  
NOTE:  
• AUX2 is displayed when an external  
component is connected to the AUX  
(Option) input connector.  
• Use a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug cord to  
connect external components to the  
AUX input connector.  
5-53  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Display  
Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option)  
(G)  
(E) (F)  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
(A) (B)  
(D)  
(C)  
66J113  
(1) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)  
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(4) Track down button/Rewind button  
(5) Repeat button (RPT)  
(5)  
(3)  
(4)  
(6) Category button (CAT)  
(1)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Disc number  
(6)  
(C) Track number  
(D) Play time  
(E) Repeat indicator  
(F) Random indicator  
(G) CD changer number  
(2)  
79KA009  
5-54  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Selecting a CD changer mode  
Press the disc button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected CD plays as follows:  
Selecting a track  
To cancel random play, press the category  
button (6) several times to change the ran-  
dom play mode to OFF.  
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (4) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
• TRACK RANDOM  
When the track down button (4) is  
pressed once, the track currently being  
played will start again at the beginning.  
The tracks in the disc that is loaded are  
played at random.  
• DISC RANDOM  
Built-in CD player  
CD changer 1  
CD changer 2  
The tracks in all discs are played at ran-  
dom.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a  
track.  
NOTE:  
The random play can be operated with the  
External CD Changer (Option) only.  
Random play  
Repeat play  
Press the category button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, the mode  
changes in the following order.  
Press the repeat button (5).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
52D300  
• When only one CD changer is con-  
nected to this unit, CD changer 2 is  
skipped.  
TRACK RANDOM  
TRACK REPEAT  
• When no CD is loaded in the built-in CD  
player, the built-in CD player is skipped.  
OFF  
DISC RANDOM  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
Selecting a disc  
66J131  
66J144  
Press the disc select button (2) corre-  
sponding to the disc number you want to  
listen to.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
Play starts from the first track on the disc. If  
a disc number having no disc is pressed,  
the selection will be invalid.  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (5) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
5-55  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
• TRACK REPEAT  
To control the volume:  
Remote Audio Controls  
(if equipped)  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (E) lights.  
To increase the volume, push the upper  
part of the switch (1). The volume contin-  
ues to increase until you release the  
switch.  
The track being currently played is  
played repeatedly.  
To decrease the volume, push the lower  
part of the switch (1). The volume contin-  
ues to decrease until you release the  
switch.  
• DISC REPEAT  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (E) lights.  
To mute, push the switch (2).  
When all the tracks on a disc being cur-  
rently played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
To select the mode (AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2,  
XM (option), CD, AUX1, External CD-  
changer (option), AUX2 (option)), push the  
switch (3).  
You can also turn on the audio system by  
pushing the switch (3).  
To change the radio station:  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
(4)  
To advance to the next preset station,  
push the upper part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
To select the previous preset station,  
push the lower part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-  
tion, push and hold the upper part of the  
switch (4).  
To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-  
tion, push and hold the lower part of the  
switch (4).  
79K052  
You can control basic functions of the  
audio system with the switches on the  
steering wheel.  
5-56  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
To change the selection on a CD:  
Anti-Theft Feature  
To advance to the next track on a CD,  
push the upper part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Player)  
To select the previous track on a CD,  
push the lower part of the switch (4).  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
79KA010  
5-57  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
EXAMPLE  
(1) Power on/off knob  
(2) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(3) Preset buttons (1 to 6)  
NOTE:  
Establish your PIN by combining numbers  
from 1 to 6 into any 4-digit number. If you  
forget your PIN, when you remove the bat-  
tery for repair etc., you will no longer be  
able to operate the audio system.  
The anti-theft feature is intended to dis-  
courage theft or the audio system by pre-  
venting the system from operating when it  
is moved to a different vehicle.  
This feature works by allowing you to enter  
a Personal Identification Number (PIN).  
When the audio system is disconnected  
from its power source, such as when the  
audio system is removed or the battery is  
disconnected, the system will not operate  
again unless the PIN is reentered.  
EXAMPLE  
66J117  
5) Input the same 4-digit number you pre-  
viously entered.  
66J117  
3) Input the four digit PIN using preset but-  
tons 1 to 6.  
Setting the Anti-Theft Function  
1) Turn off the power by pressing the  
power on/off knob (1).  
66J120  
6) The power of the audio system will turn  
off.  
NOTE:  
Write down your PIN for the future use.  
66J118  
4) After you enter your four digit PIN, the  
display will return to “0000”.  
Canceling Your Established PIN  
Setting  
66J118  
This operation is to be done when you  
want to cancel the anti-theft function or  
change your PIN.  
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while  
pressing and holding the track up but-  
ton (2). The “ENTRY 0000” will blink  
and the audio system enter PIN-input  
mode.  
1) Turn off the power by pressing the  
power on/off knob (1).  
5-58  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
registered PIN, the power of the audio  
system will turn off, and you will be able  
to operate the audio system.  
Confirming Your Personal Identifi-  
cation Number (PIN)  
When the main power source is discon-  
nected such as when you exchange your  
battery, etc, you will have to confirm your  
PIN to be able to use the audio system.  
NOTE:  
• If you input your PIN incorrectly, ----” will  
be displayed and the anti-theft function  
lock mode is entered. If you enter an  
incorrect PIN fewer than 6 times, the  
locking time will be for 15 seconds; if you  
enter an incorrect PIN more than 6  
times, the locking time will be for 15 min-  
utes.  
To confirm your PIN:  
66J121  
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while  
pressing and holding the track up but-  
ton (2). The “DELETE 0000” will blink  
and the audio system will enter the can-  
cel mode.  
• If you forget your PIN and enter a wrong  
PIN, you cannot perform any further  
operation.  
EXAMPLE  
66J122  
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”  
position.  
EXAMPLE  
66J124  
3) Input your PIN. The power of the audio  
system will turn off and your PIN will be  
deleted.  
To change your PIN, first delete your  
current PIN, then set a new one.  
66J125  
2) Input your PIN.  
If the PIN that you input matches the  
5-59  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Troubleshooting  
Applicable to every device  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Power is not turned on.  
(No sound is produced)  
Fuse is blown.  
Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
Connections are not properly made.  
Radio  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Too much noise.  
Not tuned correctly to the frequency of a sta- Tune correctly to the station frequency.  
tion.  
Stations cannot be selected by There is no station with strong radio waves.  
seek tuning.  
Select stations by manual tuning.  
CD  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Compact disc cannot be loaded. Another compact disc is already loaded.  
Eject the compact disc before loading a new  
one.  
Sound skips or is noisy.  
Compact disc is dirty.  
Clean the compact disc with a soft cloth.  
Compact disc is heavily scratched or warped.  
Replace with a compact disc with no scratches.  
Sound is bad directly after power Water droplets may form on the internal lens Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.  
is turned on.  
when the car is parked in a humid place.  
5-60  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Error display  
This unit has a number of self-diagnostic functions to protect the system.  
If a problem should occur, the display shows the type of error. Refer to the table below and take proper measures to correct the problem.  
If the problem is corrected, the unit will operate normally.  
Error display  
Measures to be taken  
CD/CD changer “Mechanical error”.  
This error display indicates a mechanical failure in the CD changer  
(failure to change or eject a disc).  
The mechanism is probably damaged. Contact your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
CD/CD changer “Focus error”.  
The pick-up-focus is not properly functioning during playback due to  
damage on the disc or for other reasons.  
Check disc for damage.  
CD/CD changer “Disc error”.  
The CD is inserted upside down or only an eight-centimeter CD  
adapter is equipped.  
Check disc for correct loading.  
If an error display not listed above appears, turn off the unit and contact your SUZUKI dealer.  
5-61  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
of the driver’s seat and can be locked by  
simply closing the door.  
Fuel Filler Cap  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
EXAMPLE  
Open  
Close  
(2)  
78K156  
NOTE:  
78K145  
79K053  
The cap holder (1) can hold the fuel filler  
cap (2) when refueling.  
To remove the fuel filler cap:  
1) Open the fuel filler door.  
EXAMPLE  
2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-  
clockwise.  
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:  
1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear  
several clicks.  
2) Close the fuel filler door.  
WARNING  
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The  
fuel may be under pressure and may  
spray out, causing injury.  
WARNING  
Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not  
smoke when refueling, and make  
sure there are no open flames or  
sparks in the area.  
64J253  
The fuel filler cap is located on the right  
rear side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door  
can be unlocked by pulling up on the  
opener lever located on the outboard side  
5-62  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Engine Hood  
WARNING  
If you need to replace the fuel cap,  
use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an  
improper cap can result in a malfunc-  
tion of the fuel system or emission  
control system. It may also result in  
fuel leakage in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
64J111  
2) Push the under-hood release lever  
sideways with your finger, as shown in  
the illustration. While pushing the lever,  
lift up the engine hood.  
64J110  
To open the engine hood:  
1) Pull the hood release handle located on  
the outboard side of the driver’s side of  
the instrument panel. This will disen-  
gage the engine hood lock halfway.  
5-63  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Sun Visor  
Interior Light Switch  
Center  
EXAMPLE  
(3) (2) (1)  
(1)  
64J112  
3) Continue to lift up the hood until it is  
high enough to support with the prop  
rod.  
79K055  
64J104  
The sun visors can be pulled down to block  
glare coming through the windshield, or  
they can be unhooked and turned to the  
side to block glare coming through the side  
window.  
Rear  
To close the engine hood:  
1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the  
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod  
back to the holding clip.  
The extension (1) can be drawn out to  
block glare widely.  
(3) (2) (1)  
2) Lower the hood close to the bumper,  
then let it drop down.  
Make sure the hood is securely latched  
after closing.  
CAUTION  
When unhooking and hooking a sun  
visor, be sure to handle it by the hard  
plastic parts or the sun visor can be  
damaged.  
WARNING  
Make sure the hood is fully closed  
and latched before driving. If it is not,  
it can fly up unexpectedly during  
driving, obstructing your view and  
resulting in an accident.  
64J211  
This light switch has three positions which  
function as described below:  
5-64  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
ON (1)  
Luggage Compartment Light  
The light comes on and stays on regard-  
less of whether the door is open or closed.  
EXAMPLE  
(2)  
(1)  
DOOR (2)  
The light comes on when the door is  
opened.  
After closing all doors (including the tail-  
gate), the light will remain on for about 15  
seconds and then fade out. If you push in  
the ignition switch or insert the key during  
this time, the light will start to fade out  
immediately.  
After removing the key from the ignition  
switch, the light will turn on for about 15  
seconds and then fade out.  
78K146  
NOTE:  
66J047  
The number of doors involved in the light-  
ing operation of the interior light depends  
on the vehicle specification. If there is a  
switch (rubber projection) at the door  
opening as shown, the door is involved in  
the lighting operation.  
The luggage compartment light is located  
at the left side of the rear luggage com-  
partment.  
When you open any of the doors including  
the tailgate with the luggage compartment  
light switch in the “DOOR” position (1), the  
light comes on and remains on as long as  
you keep the door open.  
OFF (3)  
The light remains off even when the door is  
opened.  
After closing all doors, the light will remain  
on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.  
If you push in the ignition switch or insert  
the key during this time, the light will start  
to fade out immediately.  
After removing the key from the ignition  
switch, the light will turn on for about 15  
seconds and then fade out.  
When the luggage compartment light  
switch is in the “OFF” position (2), the light  
5-65  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
remains off regardless of whether the  
door(s) is(are) opened or closed.  
Spot Light  
Accessory Socket  
(if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
EXAMPLE  
65J093  
Push the switch (1) to turn on the light and  
push it again to turn off the light.  
78K141  
EXAMPLE  
64J120  
5-66  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
The accessory socket will work when the  
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-  
tion.  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray  
(if equipped)  
CAUTION  
• To avoid damage to the cigarette  
lighter socket, do not use it as  
other accessories’ power source.  
Some accessories’ power plug can  
damage the inner mechanism of  
the cigarette lighter socket.  
• Holding the cigarette lighter in can  
overheat and damage the lighter.  
Release the lighter after you push it  
in.  
12-volt accessory sockets are located both Cigarette Lighter  
on the center console and on the left side  
of the luggage compartment.  
EXAMPLE  
Depending on the specification, there are  
two sockets on the center console.  
Each socket can be used to provide 12  
volt/120 watt power for electrical accesso-  
ries when used alone. Make sure that the  
cap remains on the socket when the socket  
is not in use.  
CAUTION  
• To prevent the fuse from being  
blown, when using sockets at the  
same time, do not exceed the total  
78K139  
The cigarette lighter will work when the  
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-  
tion.  
combined power capacity of 120  
watts.  
• Use of inappropriate electrical  
accessories can cause damage to  
your vehicle’s electrical system.  
Make sure that any electrical acces-  
sories you use are designed to  
plug into this type of socket.  
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the  
way into the receptacle and release it. It  
will automatically heat up and will pop out  
to its normal position when it is ready for  
use.  
5-67  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Ashtray  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
You can tilt or slide the sunroof by operat-  
ing the “TILT” part of the sunroof switch or  
the “SLIDE” part of the sunroof switch  
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
EXAMPLE  
There is a system to prevent being pinched  
by the sunroof.  
When the system senses that something is  
pinched when the sunroof is sliding for-  
ward, the sunroof will automatically reverse  
direction and slide rearward. This system  
will operate when the sunroof is closing  
automatically. This system does not oper-  
ate when tilting the sunroof down.  
(2)  
(1)  
79K097  
64J201  
To tilt the sunroof up, slide the sun shade  
rearward by hand and push the “TILT UP”  
part (1) of the sunroof switch. To tilt the  
sunroof down, push the “SLIDE OPEN”  
part (2) of the sunroof switch.  
If you push the switch for more than a sec-  
ond, the sunroof will automatically tilt up or  
down fully. To stop the sunroof halfway,  
push the switch briefly.  
You can fit the ashtray into any of the cup  
holders on the center console.  
Make sure there are no hands or other  
obstructions in the path of the sunroof  
when you close the sunroof even though  
there is a system to prevent being pinched  
by the sunroof.  
WARNING  
Make sure tobacco is fully extin-  
guished before closing the ashtrays.  
Never throw waste in the ashtrays: it  
could create a fire hazard.  
WARNING  
• The system to prevent being  
pinched by the sunroof does not  
work in the area where the sunroof  
is almost completely closed.  
• The system to prevent being  
pinched by the sunroof may not  
work if the battery is not suffi-  
ciently charged.  
5-68  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
movement stops completely, release  
the switch. The features are reacti-  
vated.  
3) Make sure you can open or close the  
sunroof automatically by pushing the  
sunroof switch for more than about a  
second.  
(2)  
(1)  
79K098  
64J109  
To slide the sunroof rearward, push the  
“SLIDE OPEN” part (2) of the sunroof  
switch. To side the sunroof forward, push  
the “TILT UP” part (1) of the sunroof  
switch.  
If you push the switch for more than a sec-  
ond, the sunroof will automatically slide  
fully rearward or forward. To stop the sun-  
roof halfway, push the switch briefly.  
The sun shade will open automatically and  
cannot be closed when the sunroof is slid  
rearward.  
How to reactivate the system to prevent  
being pinched by the sunroof  
When you disconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal from the battery or change the fuses,  
the features below will not operate.  
• The system to prevent being pinched by  
the sliding sunroof.  
65D612  
WARNING  
• Never allow any part of your body  
such as hands or head to get out of  
the sunroof opening while the vehi-  
cle is moving.  
• Be sure there are no hands or other  
obstructions in the path of the sun-  
roof when you close the sunroof.  
(Continued)  
• The system to automatically open or  
close the sunroof fully.  
In this case, you must reactivate the fea-  
tures using the following procedures.  
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”  
position.  
2) Push and hold the “TILT UP” part (1) of  
the sunroof switch, the sunroof will tilt  
up fully and then down slightly. After the  
5-69  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Assist Grips (if equipped)  
Coat Hooks (if equipped)  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
• Always remove the ignition key  
when leaving the vehicle even if for  
a short time. Also do not leave chil-  
dren alone in a parked vehicle.  
Unattended children could use the  
sunroof switches and get trapped  
by the sunroof.  
CAUTION  
Do not put your body weight on the  
roof around the sunroof such as by  
sitting on it.  
64J136  
64J137  
Assist grips are provided for convenience.  
You can hang clothing on the coat hooks.  
These hooks are not designed for large or  
heavy items.  
• Be sure to close the sunroof when you  
leave the vehicle unattended.  
• Periodically inspect the guide rail for dirt  
and clean it if any dirt has accumulated.  
WARNING  
If your vehicle is equipped with side  
curtain air bags, do not hang sharp  
items like a hanger on the coat hook.  
When hanging the clothes, hang it on  
the hook without using a hanger.  
5-70  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Glove Box  
Overhead Console Box  
(if equipped)  
CAUTION  
If you park your vehicle outdoors in  
direct sunlight or in hot weather, the  
eyeglasses compartment can get  
very hot since it is close to the roof.  
So, when parking in such conditions:  
• Do not leave eyeglasses in the  
compartment. The heat may distort  
plastic lenses or frames.  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
(2)  
• Do not place flammable items, such  
as a lighter, in the compartment.  
The heat may cause a fire.  
(1)  
NOTE:  
78K136  
An aftermarket garage door opener can be  
installed in the front side overhead console  
box.  
(1) LOCK  
79K056  
(2) UNLOCK  
To use the overhead console box, push on  
the front edge (1) and open the lid. To  
close the lid, push the front edge (1) until it  
latches. Do not put heavy or sharp items in  
the box.  
To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.  
To close it, push the lid until it latches  
securely. If a lock is equipped on the latch  
lever, lock the glove box by inserting the  
key and turning it clockwise and unlock the  
glove box by turning the key counterclock-  
wise.  
WARNING  
Never drive with the overhead con-  
sole box lid open. It could cause  
injury if an accident occurs.  
WARNING  
Never drive with the glove box lid  
open. It could cause injury if an acci-  
dent occurs.  
5-71  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
WARNING  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin  
(if equipped)  
Do not use the cup holder or the stor-  
age bin to hold cups containing hot  
liquids or sharp-edged, hard or  
breakable objects. Objects in these  
bins may be thrown about during a  
sudden stop or impact, and could  
cause personal injury.  
Cup holders and a storage bin are pro-  
vided as shown.  
EXAMPLE  
Bottle holder  
64J115  
To use the console bin, pull the lever up  
and open the lid.  
79K140  
To access a bin, push the release button.  
EXAMPLE  
64J200  
You should hold a bottle with a cap in the  
bottle holder.  
64J116  
To use the rear cup holders, open the lid.  
5-72  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Front Seat Back Pocket  
(if equipped)  
Shopping Hook (if equipped)  
Armrest  
CAUTION  
EXAMPLE  
To avoid damage to the armrest, do  
not lean on it or allow a child to sit on  
it.  
EXAMPLE  
Center Console Armrest  
66J049  
The shopping hooks are located on both  
sides of the luggage compartment.  
64J127  
This pocket is provided for holding light  
and soft things such as gloves, newspa-  
pers or magazines.  
You can hang the shopping bag or other  
suitable objects on the hook. This hook is  
not designed for large or heavy items.  
WARNING  
64J263  
Do not put hard or breakable objects  
in the pocket. If an accident occurs,  
objects such as bottles, cans, etc.  
can injure the occupants in the rear  
seat.  
5-73  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Floor Mats (if equipped)  
Luggage Compartment Cover  
WARNING  
Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-  
gage compartment can be hidden from  
view by a luggage compartment cover.  
However, the luggage compartment covers  
are not designed to support items loaded  
on top of them, and may get damaged if  
used as a shelf.  
Failure to take the following precau-  
tions may result in the driver’s side  
floor mat interfering with the pedals  
and causing a loss of vehicle control  
or an accident.  
• Make sure that the floor mat grom-  
met(s) is(are) hooked to the fas-  
tener(s).  
• Never place additional floor mats  
on top of the existing floor mats.  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
Do not carry items on top of the lug-  
gage compartment cover, even if they  
are small and light. Objects on top of  
the cover could be thrown about in an  
accident, causing injury, or could  
obstruct the driver’s rear view.  
80J2014  
Your vehicle has a fastener to keep the  
driver’s side floor mat from sliding forward  
and possibly interfering with the pedals.  
Whenever you put the driver’s side floor  
mat back in the vehicle after it has been  
removed, be sure to hook the floor mat  
grommet(s) to the fastener(s) and position  
the floor mat properly in the footwell.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the luggage com-  
partment cover:  
• Do not place items on top of it.  
• Do not push down on it or lean on  
it.  
When you replace the floor mats in your  
vehicle with a different type such as all-  
weather floor mats, we highly recommend  
using genuine SUZUKI floor mats for  
proper fitting.  
• Handle it carefully when installing  
or removing.  
NOTE:  
The seatback should always be securely  
latched in a fairly upright position when  
removing or installing the luggage com-  
partment cover.  
5-74  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
To remove the luggage compartment  
cover:  
rear  
front  
(b)  
(a)  
66J205  
(a)  
3) Lift up both ends of the cover to disen-  
gage the attachment points (b).  
66J203  
1) Release the three hooks (a) from the  
rear seat backs.  
(c)  
66J204  
2) Fold and roll the cover forward.  
66J228  
4) Place one end of the cover in the quar-  
ter window opening (c) so enough  
5-75  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
clearance is established on the other  
end to swing the cover down and out.  
To stow a luggage compartment cover  
on the floor of the rear luggage room:  
To reinstall the luggage compartment  
cover:  
(c)  
78K147  
78K148  
5) Tilt the luggage compartment cover,  
and then remove the compartment  
cover from the vehicle.  
1) Fold/roll the luggage compartment  
cover, and place one end in the quarter  
window opening (c) to swing the other  
end into position.  
CAUTION  
When you place the end of the cover  
in the quarter window opening (c), be  
careful not to damage the window or  
other materials while positioning the  
compartment cover.  
66J207  
Tilt the cover, and fit it onto floor of the rear  
luggage room.  
5-76  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Underfloor Bins (if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
(d)  
(e)  
(A)  
(b)  
66J209  
66J210  
2) Align the attachment points (d) on the  
cover with the attachment points (b) on  
the vehicle and push down both ends.  
Make sure that the cover securely fits in  
the attachment points.  
3) Unroll/unfold the cover as you secure  
the other latches (e).  
64J132  
Pull up the strap (A) to open the bin.  
CAUTION  
Do not allow items in the bins to  
extend above the top of the bin. Oth-  
erwise, the bin or luggage floor may  
be damaged.  
(a)  
(a)  
66J229  
4) Reattach the three hooks (a) to the rear  
seat backs.  
5-77  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Luggage Restraint Loops  
(if equipped)  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack  
Anchors (if equipped)  
WARNING  
The luggage restraint loops and  
optional rubber net can be used to  
help keep lightweight cargo from  
moving around in the luggage com-  
partment during normal driving. They  
are neither capable of nor intended  
for preventing cargo from being  
thrown around in a crash.  
Roof rails  
Place heavier objects on the floor  
and as far forward in the cargo area  
as possible. Never pile cargo higher  
than the top of the seat backs.  
WARNING  
64J129  
Do not attach the child restraint top  
strap to the luggage restraint loops.  
Incorrectly attached top strap will  
reduce the intended effectiveness of  
the child restraint system.  
64J133  
Four luggage restraint loops are provided  
on the luggage compartment floor. An  
optional rubber net can be hooked to these  
loops to help keep cargo from moving  
around in the luggage compartment during  
normal driving.  
Roof rack anchors  
(1)  
64J224  
5-78  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
You can use the roof rails or the roof rack  
anchors to attach the optional roof rack  
which is available at your SUZUKI dealer. If  
you use a roof rack, observe the instruc-  
tions and precautions in this section and  
provided with the roof rack.  
• Mount and secure the cargo onto the  
roof rack properly according to the  
instructions provided. Be sure to stow  
the heaviest items at the bottom and dis-  
tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.  
• Do not carry items so large that they  
hang over the bumpers or the sides of  
the vehicle, or block your view.  
• Secure the front and rear ends of long  
items – such as wood panels, surfboards  
and so forth – to both the front and rear  
of the vehicle. You should protect the  
painted surfaces of the vehicle from  
scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.  
• Check periodically to make sure the roof  
rack is securely installed and free from  
damage.  
WARNING  
• Abrupt maneuvers or failure to  
properly secure cargo can allow the  
cargo to fly off the vehicle and hit  
others, causing personal injury or  
property damage.  
• Mount cargo securely and avoid  
abrupt maneuvers such as “jack-  
rabbit” starts, sharp turns, fast cor-  
nering and sudden braking. Check  
periodically to make sure that  
cargo is securely fastened.  
• Large, bulky, long, or flat items can  
affect vehicle aerodynamics or be  
caught by the wind, and can reduce  
vehicle control resulting in an acci-  
dent and personal injury. Drive cau-  
tiously at reduced speed when  
carrying this type of cargo.  
(For vehicles with roof rack anchors)  
To remove the cap, slide the cap in the  
direction of the arrow (1) and then lift the  
edge of the cap up as shown in the illustra-  
tion. To install the cap, put in the front part  
of the cap, slide the cap in the opposite  
direction of the arrow (1) and then push  
down the rear part of the cap.  
• Make sure the roof rack is securely  
installed.  
• For vehicles with roof rack anchors,  
make sure the anchors are covered with  
the caps when not in use.  
To mount various types of cargo (such  
as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit-  
able attachments which are available  
from your SUZUKI dealer. Be sure to  
install the attachments properly and  
securely according to the instructions  
provided. Do not mount cargo directly on  
the roof panel. The cargo can damage  
the roof panel.  
• The gross weight of the roof rack plus  
cargo must not exceed the loading  
capacity (75 kg (165 lbs)). Also, do not  
let the gross vehicle weight (fully loaded  
vehicle including driver, passengers,  
cargo, roof load and trailer tongue  
weight) exceed the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) listed on the  
driver’s door lock pillar.  
5-79  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
®
®
any garage door opener model manufac-  
tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door  
that cannot detect an object – signaling the  
door to stop and reverse – does not meet  
current U.S. federal safety standards. For  
HomeLink button. Begin with “Program-  
HomeLink (if equipped)  
®
ming HomeLink ” – step 2).  
®
more information, contact HomeLink at  
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-  
355-3515.  
Retain the original transmitter of the RF  
device you are programming for use in  
other vehicles as well as for future  
66J092  
®
®
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are  
registered  
trademarks  
of  
Johnson  
®
HomeLink programming. It is also sug-  
Controls, Inc.  
gested that upon the sale of the vehicle,  
®
the programmed HomeLink buttons be  
erased for security purposes. Refer to  
®
The HomeLink Wireless Control System  
provides a convenient way to replace up to  
three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)  
transmitters used to activate devices such  
as gate operators, garage door openers,  
entry door locks, security systems, even  
®
“Programming HomeLink ” (step 1) only)  
66J050  
®
or, for assistance, contact HomeLink at  
1) Press and hold the two outer  
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-  
355-3515.  
®
HomeLink buttons (buttons one and  
three) – releasing only when the indica-  
tor light begins to flash (after 20 sec-  
onds). Do not hold the buttons for  
longer than 30 seconds and do not  
repeat step 1) to program a second  
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the  
®
Programming HomeLink  
®
home lighting. Additional HomeLink infor-  
mation can be found on the Internet at  
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-  
355-3515.  
NOTE:  
Some vehicles may require the ignition  
switch to be turned to the second (or  
“accessories”) position or the “on” position  
for programming and/or operation of  
®
®
remaining two HomeLink buttons.  
Before programming HomeLink  
to  
a
2) Position the end of your hand-held  
transmitter 5–14 cm (1–3 inches) away  
garage door opener or gate operator, make  
sure that people and objects are out of the  
way of the device to prevent potential harm  
or damage. When programming a garage  
door opener, it is advised to park outside of  
®
HomeLink . It is also recommended that a  
®
new battery be placed in the hand-held  
transmitter of the device being pro-  
from the HomeLink button you wish to  
program while keeping the indicator  
light in view.  
®
grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-  
ing and accurate transmission of the radio-  
frequency signal. Do not repeat “Program-  
®
3) Simultaneously press and hold both the  
the garage. Do not use HomeLink with  
®
chosen HomeLink  
and hand-held  
any garage door opener that lacks safety  
stop and reverse features as required by  
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes  
®
ming HomeLink ” – step 1) to train addi-  
transmitter buttons. Do not release the  
buttons until step 4) has been com-  
pleted.  
tional devices to  
a
second or third  
5-80  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
®
NOTE:  
HomeLink ” steps 6–8 to complete the  
programming of rolling code  
6) At the garage door opener receiver  
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate  
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can  
usually be found where the hanging  
antenna wire is attached to the motor-  
head unit.  
Some gate operators and garage door  
openers may require you to replace this  
Programming step 3) with procedures  
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian  
Programming” section.  
a
equipped device (most commonly a  
garage door opener).  
7) Firmly press and release the “learn” or  
“smart” button. (The name and color of  
the button may vary by manufacturer.)  
®
4) After the HomeLink indicator light  
changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-  
®
ing light, release both the HomeLink  
and hand-held transmitter buttons.  
NOTE:  
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate  
step 8).  
NOTE:  
®
If the HomeLink indicator light does not  
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact  
8) Return to the vehicle and firmly press,  
®
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call  
hold for two seconds and release the  
®
1-800-355-3515 for assistance.  
programmed  
Repeat the  
HomeLink  
button.  
“press/hold/release”  
66J051  
5) Press and hold the just-trained  
sequence a second time, and, depend-  
ing on the brand of the garage door  
opener (or other rolling code equipped  
device), repeat this sequence a third  
time to complete the programming pro-  
cess.  
®
HomeLink button and observe the  
indicator light.  
– If the indicator light stays on con-  
stantly, programming is complete and  
your device should activate when the  
®
®
HomeLink button is pressed and  
released.  
HomeLink should now activate your  
rolling code equipped device.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons, begin with “Programming  
HomeLink ” – step 2). Do not repeat step  
1).  
®
®
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons,  
begin  
with  
“Programming  
®
®
HomeLink ” – step 2). Do not repeat step  
1).  
– If the indicator light blinks rapidly for  
two seconds and then turns to a con-  
stant light continue with “Programming  
For questions or comments, please con-  
66J052  
®
tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or  
1-800-355-3515.  
5-81  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Reprogramming a Single  
®
Gate Operator / Canadian Program-  
ming  
Using HomeLink  
®
To operate, simply press and release the  
HomeLink Button  
®
®
programmed HomeLink button. Activation  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)  
after several seconds of transmission –  
which may not be long enough for  
To program a device to HomeLink using a  
®
will now occur for the trained device (i.e.  
garage door opener, gate operator, secu-  
rity system, entry door lock, home/office  
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-  
held transmitter of the device may also be  
used at any time. In the event that there  
HomeLink button previously trained, fol-  
low these steps:  
®
1) Press and hold the desired HomeLink  
®
HomeLink to pick up the signal during  
button. DO NOT release the button.  
2) The indicator light will begin to flash  
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the  
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,  
some U.S. gate operators are designed to  
“time-out” in the same manner.  
are still programming difficulties or ques-  
®
HomeLink button, proceed with “Pro-  
gramming HomeLink ” – step 2).  
®
tions,  
contact  
HomeLink  
at  
®
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-  
culties programming a gate operator by  
using the Programming procedures  
(regardless of where you live), replace  
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.  
For questions or comments, contact  
®
Erasing HomeLink Buttons  
®
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-  
To erase programming from the three but-  
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased  
but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined  
below), follow the step noted:  
®
“Programming HomeLink ” step 3) with  
800-355-3515.  
the following:  
NOTE:  
®
If programming a garage door opener or  
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the  
device during the “cycling” process to pre-  
vent possible overheating.  
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink  
buttons until the indicator light begins to  
flash-after 20 seconds. Release both but-  
tons. Do not hold for longer that 30 sec-  
onds. HomeLink is now in the train (or  
learning) mode and can be programmed at  
any time beginning with “Programming  
®
3) Continue to press and hold the  
®
HomeLink button while you press and  
®
release – every two seconds (“cycle”)  
your hand-held transmitter until the fre-  
quency signal has successfully been  
HomeLink ” – step 2).  
®
accepted by HomeLink . (The indicator  
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.)  
®
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink ”  
step 4) to complete.  
5-82  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Frame hooks are provided at the front and  
rear of the vehicle.  
Frame Hooks  
Front  
To access the front hook, unhook the lower  
part of the cover (1) and then remove the  
cover (1).  
(1)  
WARNING  
Do not use the frame hooks to tow  
another vehicle or to have your vehi-  
cle towed on the road or highway.  
The hooks are designed for use in  
emergency situations only, such as if  
your vehicle or another vehicle gets  
stuck in deep mud or snow.  
(2)  
(2)  
78K052  
Rear  
78K053  
The frame hooks (2) are provided for ship-  
ping purposes only.  
78K149  
5-83  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1  
Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-2  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) ...................... 6-7  
6
54G215  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vehicle Loading: 11  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-  
missible weight on an individual axle.  
Vehicle Loading  
WARNING  
Vehicle Capacity Weight – Maximum per-  
missible load weight a vehicle can carry  
including the weight of all the occupants,  
accessories, cargo, plus trailer tongue  
weight (if towing a trailer).  
Never overload your vehicle. The  
gross vehicle weight (sum of the  
weights of the loaded vehicle, driver  
and passengers) must never exceed  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
(GVWR) listed on the Safety Certifica-  
tion Label. In addition, never distrib-  
ute a load so that the weight on either  
the front or rear axle exceeds the  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)  
listed on the Safety Certification  
Label.  
The weight of any accessories already  
installed on your vehicle at the time of pur-  
chase, or that you or the dealer install after  
purchase, must be subtracted from the  
Vehicle Capacity Weight to determine how  
much capacity remains available for occu-  
pants, cargo, and trailer tongue weight (if  
towing a trailer).  
54G307  
Contact your dealer for further information.  
WARNING  
Your vehicle was designed for specific  
weight capacities. The weight capacities of  
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), the Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR, front and rear)  
and the Vehicle Capacity Weight. The  
GVWR and GAWR (front and rear) are  
listed on the Safety Certification Label  
which is located below the driver’s side  
door latch striker. The Vehicle Capacity  
Weight is listed on the Tire Information  
Label which is located below the Safety  
Certification Label.  
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and  
actual loads at the front and rear axles can  
only be determined by weighing the vehicle  
using a vehicle scale. To measure the  
weight and load, try taking your vehicle to  
a highway weighing station, shipping com-  
pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.  
Compare these weights to the GVWR and  
GAWR (front and rear) listed on the Safety  
Certification Label. If the gross vehicle  
weight or the load on either axle exceeds  
these ratings, you must remove enough  
weight to bring the load down to the rated  
capacity.  
• Always distribute cargo evenly.  
• To avoid personal injury or damage  
to your vehicle, always secure  
cargo to prevent it from shifting if  
the vehicle moves suddenly.  
• Place heavier objects on the floor  
and as far forward in the cargo area  
as possible. Never pile cargo  
higher than the top of the seat  
backs.  
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall  
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including  
all the occupants, accessories and cargo  
plus the trailer tongue weight if towing a  
trailer).  
6-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
WARNING  
cool down. Refer to “If the Engine Over-  
heats” section for details on how to deal  
with overheating.  
Trailer Towing  
You can use your SUZUKI to tow a trailer,  
but you should always observe the require-  
ments and recommendations in this sec-  
tion. If you intend to tow a trailer, it is  
essential to select a trailer and trailer tow-  
ing equipment which are compatible. A  
reputable trailer dealer can help you.  
Never attach safety chains to the  
bumper of your vehicle. Secure con-  
nections so that they can’t come  
loose.  
CAUTION  
Towing in “D” range up a steep hill  
can cause coolant overheating which  
may result in engine/automatic trans-  
mission damage.  
Trailer Lights  
Make sure your trailer is equipped with  
lights which meet federal, state and local  
requirements. Always check for the proper  
operation of all trailer lights before you  
start to tow.  
CAUTION  
Hitches  
Trailer towing puts additional stress  
on the engine, drive train and brakes  
of your vehicle. Never tow a trailer  
during the first 960 km (600 miles) of  
vehicle operation.  
Use only a trailer hitch bracket that is  
designed to bolt to the frame of your vehi-  
cle, and a hitch that is designed to bolt to  
this bracket. We recommend that you use  
a genuine SUZUKI trailer hitch bracket and  
trailer hitch (available as options), or equiv-  
alent.  
WARNING  
Never splice trailer lights directly into  
your vehicle’s electrical system, or  
electrical system damage may occur.  
CAUTION  
Because towing a trailer puts addi-  
tional stress on your vehicle, more  
WARNING  
Brakes  
frequent  
maintenance  
will  
be  
Never use a bumper hitch or a hitch  
which attaches to the axle of your  
vehicle.  
required than under normal driving  
conditions. Follow the schedule for  
Maintenance Recommended Under  
Severe Driving Conditions or perform  
more frequent maintenance as nec-  
essary.  
WARNING  
If trailer brakes are used, you should  
follow all instructions provided by the  
manufacturer. Never tap into the  
brake system of your vehicle.  
Safety Chains  
Always attach safety chains between your  
vehicle and trailer. Cross safety chains  
under the tongue of the trailer so that the  
tongue will not drop to the road if the trailer  
becomes separated from the hitch. Follow  
the manufacturer’s recommendation for  
attaching safety chains. Always leave just  
enough slack to permit full turning. Never  
allow safety chains to drag on the road.  
For Automatic transmission vehicles, shift  
into “3” (Low 2) or “L(Low 1) (if necessary)  
and frequently monitor the coolant temper-  
ature gauge when towing up a steep hill. If  
the gauge indicates overheating, park the  
vehicle in a safe place and let the engine  
6-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Gross Trailer Weight  
Gross Combined Weight  
Tires  
WARNING  
When towing a trailer, it is very  
important for your vehicle and trailer  
to have properly inflated tires. Your  
vehicle’s tires should be inflated to  
the recommended pressures listed  
on your vehicle’s Tire Inflation Pres-  
sure label. Inflate trailer tires accord-  
ing to the specifications provided by  
the trailer manufacturer.  
Mirrors  
60A378  
60A381  
Check to see if your vehicle’s mirrors meet  
federal, state and local requirements for  
mirrors used on towing vehicles. If they do  
not, you must install required mirrors  
before you tow.  
Gross Trailer Weight is the weight of the  
trailer plus all cargo in it (measured with  
the trailer disconnected from the towing  
vehicle). Gross trailer weight must never  
exceed 1360 kg (3000 pounds).  
Gross Combined Weight is the weight of  
the fully loaded vehicle (including all the  
occupants, accessories and cargo) plus  
the weight of the fully loaded trailer. Gross  
combined weight must never exceed:  
• 2.4 L – 3460 kg (7628 pounds)  
Vehicle/Trailer Weight Limits  
If you intend to tow a trailer having a gross  
trailer weight greater than 450 kg (1000  
pounds), the trailer must be equipped with  
trailer brakes.  
• 3.2 L – 3530 kg (7782 pounds)  
Before towing, you must make sure that  
gross trailer weight, gross combined  
weight, trailer tongue weight, gross vehicle  
weight and gross axle weight (front and  
rear) are within specified limits as  
described below. You can measure vehicle  
and trailer weights using a vehicle scale  
and can measure tongue weight using a  
bathroom scale.  
6-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Tongue Weight  
Gross Vehicle Weight  
Gross Axle Weight  
60A380  
60A379  
60A382  
Tongue Weight is the downward force  
exerted on the hitch by the trailer coupler,  
with the trailer fully loaded and the coupler  
at its normal towing height. Cargo should  
be distributed so that tongue weight is  
approximately 10% of gross trailer weight.  
Gross Vehicle Weight is the weight of the  
fully loaded vehicle (including all the occu-  
pants, accessories and cargo plus the  
trailer tongue weight). The gross vehicle  
weight must never exceed the Gross Vehi-  
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed on the  
Safety Certification Label.  
Gross Axle Weight (Front and Rear) is the  
weight supported by an individual axle with  
the vehicle fully loaded and the trailer con-  
nected. Gross axle weight for the front and  
rear axles must never exceed the Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the  
Safety Certification Label.  
NOTE:  
You can usually get tongue weight to be  
about 10% of gross trailer weight by plac-  
ing about 60% of the total cargo weight in  
the front half of the trailer. You should mea-  
sure gross trailer weight and tongue weight  
before towing, however, to make sure that  
your load is properly distributed.  
WARNING  
Improper distribution of cargo in your  
trailer may result in poor vehicle han-  
dling and swaying of the trailer.  
Always make sure that trailer tongue  
weight is about 10% of gross trailer  
weight. Failure to observe this  
requirement may result in an acci-  
dent.  
6-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
WARNING  
Additional Trailer Towing Warnings  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Never overload your trailer or your  
vehicle. Gross Trailer Weight must  
never exceed 1350 kg (3000 pounds).  
Gross Combined Weight must never  
exceed 3400 kg (7500 pounds) for  
2WD or 3450 kg (7600 pounds) for  
4WD.  
Gross vehicle weight must never  
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-  
ing (GVWR) listed on the Safety Certi-  
fication Label. Gross axle weight for  
the front and rear axles must not  
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR) listed on the Safety Certifica-  
tion Label.  
(Continued)  
• Allow adequate stopping distance.  
Stopping distance is increased  
when you tow a trailer. For each 16  
km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at  
least one vehicle and trailer length  
between you and the vehicle ahead.  
Follow at a greater distance if roads  
are wet or slippery.  
• Slow down when making turns.  
Remember that a larger than nor-  
mal turning radius is needed  
because the trailer wheels will be  
closer than the vehicle wheels to  
the inside of the turn.  
• Avoid sudden acceleration and  
stopping of the vehicle. Do not  
make quick maneuvers unless they  
are necessary.  
• Slow down in cross winds and be  
prepared for wind blasts from large  
passing vehicles.  
Connect trailer lights and hook up  
safety chains every time you tow.  
WARNING  
Your vehicle will handle differently  
when towing a trailer. For your safety  
and the safety of others, you should  
observe the following precautions:  
• Practice turning, stopping and  
backing up before you begin tow-  
ing in traffic. Do not tow in traffic  
until you are confident that you can  
handle the vehicle and trailer  
safely.  
• Never exceed posted towing speed  
limits or 72 km/h (45 mph), which-  
ever is lower.  
WARNING  
Do not tow a trailer having a gross  
trailer weight greater than 450 kg  
(1000 pounds) unless the trailer is  
equipped with trailer brakes.  
• Never drive at a speed that causes  
shaking or swaying of the trailer. If  
you notice even the slightest sign  
of shaking or swaying, slow down.  
• Always have someone guide you  
when backing.  
• Be careful when passing other  
vehicles. Be sure to allow enough  
room for your trailer before you  
change lanes, and signal well in  
advance.  
(Continued)  
• Slow down and shift into a lower  
gear before you reach long or steep  
downhill grades. It is hazardous to  
attempt downshifting while you are  
descending a hill.  
(Continued)  
6-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Avoid “riding” the brakes. “Riding”  
the brakes could cause the brakes  
to overheat, resulting in reduced  
braking efficiency. Use engine  
braking as much as possible.  
6) If you have a 4-wheel drive vehi-  
cle, make sure the transfer switch  
is not in “N” (Neutral).  
When starting out after parking:  
1) Push in the clutch (if equipped)  
and start the engine.  
2) Depress the brake pedal, shift into  
gear, release the parking brake  
and slowly pull away from the  
chocks.  
3) Stop, apply the brakes firmly and  
hold the brakes while you have  
another person remove the  
chocks.  
• Because of the added trailer  
weight, your engine may overheat  
on hot days when going up long or  
steep hills. Pay attention to your  
engine temperature gauge. If it indi-  
cates overheating, pull off the road  
and stop in a safe place. Refer to  
the “If the Engine Overheats” in  
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section  
for details on how to proceed.  
60A186  
WARNING  
When parking your vehicle and con-  
nected trailer, always use the follow-  
ing procedure:  
1) Apply the vehicle’s brakes firmly.  
2) Have another person place wheel  
chocks under the wheels of the  
vehicle and the trailer while you  
are holding the brakes.  
3) Slowly release the brakes until the  
wheel chocks absorb the load.  
4) Fully engage the parking brake.  
5) Manual transmission – turn off the  
engine, then shift into reverse or  
first gear.  
Automatic transmission  
shift  
into “P” (Park) and turn off the  
engine.  
(Continued)  
6-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE  
4WD Vehicle With a Transfer Switch  
Towing Your Vehicle  
(recreational towing)  
TRANS-  
TOWING  
DRIVE TRAIN  
Your vehicle may be towed behind another  
vehicle (such as a motorhome), provided  
you use the proper towing method speci-  
fied for your vehicle. The towing method  
you must use depends on the specifica-  
tions of your vehicle: whether it is a 2-  
wheel drive (2WD), 4-wheel drive (4WD)  
with a transfer switch or 4-wheel drive  
(4WD) without a transfer switch vehicle.  
MISSION METHOD  
4WD  
with a transfer  
switch  
A/T  
M/T  
A/T  
M/T  
A
A
4WD  
none  
none  
without a  
transfer switch  
A/T  
B
B
Use the towing instruction table to select  
the proper towing method for your vehicle,  
and carefully follow the corresponding  
instructions. Be sure to use proper towing  
equipment designed for recreational tow-  
ing and make sure that towing speed does  
not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).  
2WD  
M/T  
54G585  
CAUTION  
Never tow your 4WD vehicle without  
a transfer switch using recreational  
towing methods. If you do, the trans-  
mission will be permanently dam-  
aged.  
64J234  
6-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Before towing  
To tow a vehicle equipped with a trans-  
fer switch with all four wheels on the  
ground:  
WARNING  
When you tow your vehicle, follow  
the instructions below to avoid acci-  
dents and damage to your vehicle. In  
addition, be sure to observe govern-  
ment and local requirements regard-  
ing vehicle lighting and trailer hitches  
or tow bars.  
1) Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
2) Place the transmission in “N” (Neutral)  
and depress the brake pedal and the  
clutch pedal fully (if equipped).  
3) Use the transfer switch to shift into neu-  
tral.  
(1)  
WARNING  
A safety chain should always be used  
when you tow your vehicle.  
64J147  
Vehicles equipped with a transfer switch  
may be towed from the front with all four  
wheels on the ground. Be sure to use  
proper towing equipment designed for rec-  
reational towing and make sure that towing  
speed does not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).  
CAUTION  
64J218  
Do not tow your vehicle with either  
front wheels or rear wheels directly  
on the ground (and the transmission  
in neutral). If you do, the transmis-  
sion will be damaged fatally.  
NOTE:  
First, push in and turn the switch to the  
mark (1) at the left of the “N” position, and  
hold the switch in this position for 5 sec-  
onds until the “N” indicator blinks, then turn  
the switch to the “N” position.  
When you turn the transfer switch to the  
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with  
the buzzer sound.  
4) Make sure the “N” light on the instru-  
ment cluster comes on.  
5) Shift the manual transmission lever into  
2nd gear or the automatic transmission  
lever into “P” (Park).  
6) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-  
tion to unlock the steering wheel.  
6-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
7) Release the parking brake.  
TOWING METHOD A  
Stop towing the vehicle every 300 km (200  
miles). Start the engine. With the manual  
transmission lever in 2nd gear (or the auto-  
matic transmission lever in “D”) and the  
transfer switch in neutral, rev the engine for  
about one minute with the clutch engaged  
(if equipped), to circulate oil in the transfer  
case.  
FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND  
64J148  
6-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
4WD Vehicle Without a Transfer  
Switch  
2WD Vehicle  
1) Secure the rear wheels on a towing  
dolly according to the instructions pro-  
vided by the dolly manufacturer.  
2) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-  
tion to unlock the steering wheel.  
3) Make sure the front wheels are facing  
straight forward and secure the steering  
wheel with a steering wheel clamping  
device designed for towing.  
CAUTION  
The steering column is not strong  
enough to withstand shocks trans-  
mitted from the front wheels during  
towing. Always unlock the steering  
wheel before towing.  
64J234  
You cannot tow your vehicle behind  
another vehicle using recreational towing  
methods.  
54G586  
CAUTION  
Never tow your vehicle using recre-  
ational towing methods. If you do, the  
transmission will be permanently  
damaged.  
54G585  
6-10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
TOWING METHOD B  
FRONT WHEELS ON THE GROUND  
AND REAR WHEELS ON A DOLLY.  
52D082  
6-11  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-3  
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving  
Conditions ........................................................................... 7-7  
Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-9  
Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-10  
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-13  
Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-16  
Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-16  
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-17  
Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-20  
Automatic Transmission Fluid ........................................... 7-20  
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-22  
Steering Wheel .................................................................... 7-24  
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-25  
Battery .................................................................................. 7-36  
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-36  
Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 7-39  
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-40  
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-46  
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-49  
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-49  
7
60G410  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Do not leave the engine running in  
garages or other confined areas.  
• When the engine is running, keep  
hands, clothing, tools and other  
objects away from the moving fan  
and fan belt.  
• Be careful not to cause accidental  
short circuits between the positive  
and negative battery terminals.  
• Keep used oil, engine coolant and  
other fluids away from children and  
pets. Dispose of used fluids prop-  
erly; never pour them on the  
ground, into sewers, etc.  
• When it is necessary to do service  
work with the engine running, make  
sure that the parking brake is set  
fully and the transmission is in  
Neutral (for manual transmission  
vehicles) or Park (for automatic  
transmission vehicles).  
60A187S  
WARNING  
• Do not touch ignition wires or other  
ignition system parts when starting  
the engine or when the engine is  
running, or you could receive an  
electric shock.  
• Be careful not to touch a hot  
engine, exhaust manifold and  
pipes, muffler, radiator and water  
hoses.  
• Do not allow smoking, sparks or  
flames around fuel or the battery.  
Flammable fumes are present.  
• Do not get under your vehicle if it is  
supported only with the portable  
jack provided in your vehicle.  
(Continued)  
You should take extreme care when  
working on your vehicle to prevent  
accidental injury. Here are a few pre-  
cautions that you should be espe-  
cially careful to observe:  
• To prevent damage or unintended  
inflation of the air bag system, be  
sure the battery is disconnected  
and the ignition switch has been in  
the “LOCK” position for at least 90  
seconds before performing any  
electrical service work on your  
SUZUKI. Do not touch air bag sys-  
tem components or wires. The  
wires are wrapped with yellow tape  
or yellow tubing, and the couplers  
are yellow for easy identification.  
(Continued)  
7-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
NOTICE (for U.S.A.)  
Maintenance Schedule  
Maintenance, replacement or repair of  
the emission control devices and sys-  
tems may be performed by any automo-  
bile repair establishment or individual  
using any part which has been certified  
under the provisions in the Clean Air  
Act sec. 207. (a) (2).  
The following table shows the times when  
you should perform regular maintenance  
on your vehicle. This table shows in miles,  
kilometers and months when you should  
perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica-  
tion and other services. These intervals  
should be shortened if driving is usually  
done under severe conditions (refer to  
The shock absorbers are filled with  
high pressure gas. Never attempt to  
disassemble them or throw them into  
a fire. Avoid storing them near a  
heater or heating device. When  
scrapping the absorber, the gas must  
be released from the absorber safely.  
Ask your dealer for assistance.  
“Maintenance  
Recommended  
Under  
Severe Driving Conditions”).  
WARNING  
SUZUKI recommends that mainte-  
nance on items marked with an aster-  
isk (*) be performed by your  
authorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali-  
fied service technician. If you are  
qualified, you may perform mainte-  
nance on the unmarked items by  
referring to the instructions in this  
section. If you are not sure whether  
you can successfully complete any of  
the unmarked maintenance jobs, ask  
your authorized SUZUKI dealer to do  
the maintenance for you.  
CAUTION  
Whenever it becomes necessary to  
replace parts on your vehicle, it is  
recommended that you use genuine  
SUZUKI replacement parts or their  
equivalent.  
7-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by miles (x 1000)  
7.5  
12.5  
7.5  
15  
25  
15  
22.5  
37.5  
22.5  
30  
50  
30  
37.5  
62.5  
37.5  
45  
75  
45  
52.5  
87.5  
52.5  
60  
100  
60  
67.5  
112.5  
67.5  
75  
125  
75  
odometer reading or months, whichever comes  
first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL  
1. Drive belt  
Inspect for damage  
*2. Valve lash (clearance) (for 2.4 L engine)  
3. Engine oil and oil filter  
*4. Cooling system hoses and connections  
5. Engine coolant  
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
I
I
R
I
R
R
R
I
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green)  
R
R
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#2) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 90 months  
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 45 months  
*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings  
*7. EVAP canister  
I
I&(R)  
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes  
9. Spark plugs  
*10. Ignition coil (Plug cap)  
*11. Fuel tank & cap  
12. Air cleaner filter element  
*13. Fuel filter  
*14. Fuel lines and connections  
*15. Canister air suction filter  
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
#2: Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green).  
7-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by miles (x 1000)  
82.5  
137.5  
82.5  
90  
150  
90  
97.5  
162.5  
97.5  
105  
175  
105  
112.5  
187.5  
112.5  
120  
200  
120  
127.5  
212.5  
127.5  
135  
225  
135  
142.5  
237.5  
142.5  
150  
250  
150  
odometer reading or months, whichever comes  
first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL  
1. Drive belt  
Inspect for damage  
*2. Valve lash (clearance) (for 2.4 L engine)  
3. Engine oil and oil filter  
*4. Cooling system hoses and connections  
5. Engine coolant  
R
I
R
R
R
I
I
R
I
R
R
R
I
R
I
R
I
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green)  
R
R
R
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#2) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 90 months  
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 45 months  
*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings  
*7. EVAP canister  
I
I&(R)  
I
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes  
9. Spark plugs  
*10. Ignition coil (Plug cap)  
*11. Fuel tank & cap  
12. Air cleaner filter element  
*13. Fuel filter  
*14. Fuel lines and connections  
*15. Canister air suction filter  
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I (#1)  
R
R
R
I
R
I
I (#1)  
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
#1: Inspect at 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months.  
#2: Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
If you replace the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green).  
NOTE:  
The maintenance services enclosed with rectangle are recommended maintenance items.  
Item 6 (R) is applicable to the exhaust mounting rubber only.  
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform recom-  
mended maintenance items enclosed with a rectangle will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion  
of the vehicle’s useful life. SUZUKI, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated inter-  
vals and the maintenance recorded.  
7-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by miles (x 1000)  
7.5  
12.5  
7.5  
15  
25  
15  
22.5  
37.5  
22.5  
30  
50  
30  
37.5  
62.5  
37.5  
45  
75  
45  
52.5  
87.5  
52.5  
60  
100  
60  
67.5  
112.5  
67.5  
75  
125  
75  
odometer reading or months, whichever comes  
first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
CHASSIS AND BODY  
1. Clutch (for manual transmission)  
Pedal and fluid level  
*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear)  
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped)  
*3. Brake hoses and pipes  
4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement  
5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment  
6. Parking brake lever and *cable  
Lever movement check, *adjustment  
7. Tires (including tire rotation)  
*8. Wheel discs  
*9. Wheel bearings  
*10. Suspension system  
*11. Propeller shafts/Drive shafts  
*12. Manual transmission oil  
13. Automatic transmission (A/T)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
Fluid level  
*Fluid change  
*Fluid hose  
Replace every 175000 km (105000 miles)-----4-speed A/T or 5-speed A/T  
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
*14. Transfer oil  
*15. Differential & Extension (for 2WD) oil  
16. Steering system  
R
I
Steering wheel movement,  
*linkage  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*17. Power steering (if equipped)  
18. All Latches, Hinges and Locks  
19. Air conditioner filter (if equipped)  
R
R
7-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by miles (x 1000)  
82.5  
137.5  
82.5  
90  
150  
90  
97.5  
162.5  
97.5  
105  
175  
105  
112.5  
187.5  
112.5  
120  
200  
120  
127.5  
212.5  
127.5  
135  
225  
135  
142.5  
237.5  
142.5  
150  
250  
150  
odometer reading or months, whichever comes  
first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
CHASSIS AND BODY  
1. Clutch (for manual transmission)  
Pedal and fluid level  
*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear)  
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped)  
*3. Brake hoses and pipes  
4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement  
5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment  
6. Parking brake lever and *cable  
Lever movement check, *adjustment  
7. Tires (including tire rotation)  
*8. Wheel discs  
*9. Wheel bearings  
*10. Suspension system  
*11. Propeller shafts/Drive shafts  
*12. Manual transmission oil  
13. Automatic transmission (A/T)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
Fluid level  
*Fluid change  
*Fluid hose  
Replace every 175000 km (105000 miles)-----4-speed A/T or 5-speed A/T  
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
*14. Transfer oil  
*15. Differential & Extension (for 2WD) oil  
16. Steering system  
Steering wheel movement,  
*linkage  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*17. Power steering (if equipped)  
18. All Latches, Hinges and Locks  
19. Air conditioner filter (if equipped)  
R
R
R
NOTE:  
This table shows the service schedule up to 250000 km (150000 miles).  
Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.  
Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), the maintenance services enclosed with a rectangle are required.  
Item 9 *I - inspect for wear.  
7-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-  
tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions  
If the vehicle is usually used under the conditions corresponding to any severe condition code given below, it is recommended that appli-  
cable maintenance operation be performed at the particular interval shown in the chart below.  
Severe condition code  
A – Repeated short trips  
B – Driving on rough and/or muddy roads  
C – Driving on dusty roads  
D – Driving in extremely cold weather and/or on salted roads  
E – Repeated short trips in extremely cold weather  
H – Towing a trailer  
Severe  
Condition Code  
Maintenance  
Operation  
Maintenance  
Maintenance Interval  
Every 5000 km (3000 miles)  
or 3 months  
A
A
C D E H Engine oil and oil filter  
R
I
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
B
D – H Exhaust pipes and mountings  
Every 5000 km (3000 miles)  
or 3 months  
I
C –  
Air cleaner filter element *1  
Canister air suction filter  
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
R
R
I
Every 100000 km (60000 miles)  
or 60 months  
A
C –  
C –  
Brake discs and pads (front)  
Brake drums and shoes (rear)  
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
B
B
B
H
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
D E H Propeller shafts/Drive shafts  
H Manual transmission oil  
I
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
E
R
7-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-  
tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Severe  
Maintenance  
Operation  
Maintenance  
Condition Code  
Maintenance Interval  
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
B
B
B
B
E
E
H Automatic transmission (A/T) fluid  
R
R
T
I
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
H Transfer, Differential and Extension oil  
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
Bolts and nuts on suspension  
Drive belt (Engine accessory)  
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
C D –  
C D –  
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
I
Air conditioner filter element *2  
Every 50000 km (30000 miles)  
or 30 months  
R
NOTE:  
I – Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
T – Tighten to the specified torque  
R – Replace or change  
L – Lubricate  
*1 Inspect more frequently if the vehicle is used under dusty conditions.  
*2 Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.  
7-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Belt: 1, 2  
Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Drive Belt  
L4 2.4 L  
V6 3.2 L  
WARNING  
When the engine is running, keep  
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away  
from the moving fan and drive belts.  
PS  
ADB  
Check the accessory drive belt only for  
damage. You do not need check it for ten-  
sion as it has an automatic tensioner.  
PS  
ADB  
GE  
GE  
If you need to replace or adjust the belt  
have it done by your SUZUKI dealer.  
AC  
AC  
: 100 N (22 lbs, 10 kg) press  
ADB: Accessory drive belt  
GE: Generator  
PS: Power steering pump  
AC: Air conditioner compressor  
79K041  
7-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Oil Level Check  
Engine oil dipstick  
Engine Oil and Filter  
FULL  
ADD  
EXAMPLE  
Specified Oil  
“Starburst”  
52D084  
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-  
ored yellow for easy identification.  
Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a  
clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way  
into the engine, then remove it again. The  
oil on the stick should be between the  
upper and lower limits shown on the stick.  
52D030  
79K096  
It is important to keep the engine oil at the  
correct level for proper lubrication of your  
vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with  
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level  
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle  
is on a slope. The oil level should be  
checked either before starting the engine  
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the  
engine.  
Use engine oil with the American Petro-  
leum Institute Certified For Gasoline  
Engines “Starburst” symbol.  
We highly recommend you use SAE 5W-  
30 oil.  
If the oil level indication is near the lower  
limit, add enough oil to raise the level to the  
upper limit.  
CAUTION  
Failure to use the recommended oil  
can result in engine damage.  
7-10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Refilling  
Changing Engine Oil and Filter  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
EXAMPLE  
New and used oil and solvent can be  
hazardous. Children and pets may be  
harmed by swallowing new or used  
oil or solvent. Repeated, prolonged  
contact with used engine oil may  
cause skin cancer. Brief contact with  
used oil or solvent may irritate skin.  
• Keep new and used oil and solvent  
away from children and pets.  
• Wear a long-sleeve shirt and water-  
proof gloves.  
• Wash with soap if oil or solvent  
contacts your skin.  
Open  
Close  
81A147  
60G306  
Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly  
through the filler hole to bring the oil level  
to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful  
not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as  
bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the  
engine and allow it to idle for about a  
minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 min-  
utes and check the oil level again.  
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still  
warm.  
5) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket.  
Tighten the plug with a wrench to the  
specified torque.  
1) Remove the oil filler cap.  
2) Remove the engine under cover.  
3) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.  
4) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug  
and drain out the engine oil.  
6) Reinstall the engine under cover.  
Tightening torque specification  
35 Nm (25.3 lb-ft, 3.5 kg-m)  
WARNING  
The engine oil temperature may be  
high enough to burn your fingers  
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait  
until the drain plug is cool enough to  
touch with your bare hands.  
7-11  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
NOTE:  
Replace the Oil Filter  
2.4 L engine  
• When it is difficult to remove the oil filter,  
we recommend you take your vehicle to  
your SUZUKI dealer for oil filter replace-  
ment.  
EXAMPLE  
• For 3.2 L engine, since special proce-  
dures are required, we recommend you  
take your vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer  
for oil filter replacement.  
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks  
1) Pour oil through the filler hole and  
install the filler cap.  
For the approximate capacity of the oil,  
refer to the “Capacities” item in the  
“SPECIFICATIONS” section.  
54G093  
(1) Oil filter  
(2) 3/4 turn  
78K055  
2) Start the engine and look carefully for  
leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run  
the engine at various speeds for at least  
5 minutes.  
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-  
utes. Check the oil level again and add  
oil if necessary. Check for leaks again.  
1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-  
ter counterclockwise and remove it.  
2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-  
ing surface on the engine where the  
new filter will be seated.  
3) Smear a little engine oil around the rub-  
ber gasket of the new oil filter.  
4) Screw on the new filter by hand until the  
filter gasket contacts the mounting sur-  
face.  
5) Tighten the filter 3/4 turn from the point  
of contact with the mounting surface (or  
to the specified torque) using an oil filter  
wrench.  
6) Reinstall the engine under cover.  
CAUTION  
Tightening torque specification  
14 Nm (10.1 lb-ft, 1.4 kg-m)  
When replacing the oil filter, it is rec-  
ommended that you use a genuine  
SUZUKI replacement filter. If you use  
an after-market filter, make sure it is  
of equivalent quality and carefully fol-  
low the manufacturer’s instructions  
and precautions.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
To tighten the oil filter properly, it is  
important to accurately identify the  
position at which the filter gasket  
first contacts the mounting surface.  
To prevent oil leakage, make sure  
that the oil filter is tight, but do not  
overtighten it.  
7-12  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Gear Oil: 6, 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Selection of Coolant  
CAUTION  
Engine Coolant  
EXAMPLE  
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant;  
SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant is  
already diluted to the proper percent-  
age. Do not dilute with distilled water  
additionally. Doing so may result in  
the possibility of freezing coolant  
and/or overheating.  
To maintain optimum performance and  
durability of your engine, use SUZUKI  
Genuine Coolant or equivalent.  
83E010  
64J151  
NOTE:  
CAUTION  
If you replace the engine coolant other  
than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue), follow  
the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Standard  
(Green). To see the detail of the mainte-  
nance schedule, refer to “Periodic Mainte-  
nance Schedule” in this section.  
Oil leaks from around the oil filter or  
drain plug indicate incorrect installa-  
tion or gasket damage. If you find any  
leaks or are not sure that the filter  
has been properly tightened, have  
the vehicle inspected by your SUZUKI  
dealer.  
EXAMPLE  
This type of coolant is best for your cooling  
system as it:  
• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-  
ture.  
• Gives proper protection against freezing  
and boiling.  
FULL  
LOW  
• Gives proper protection against corro-  
sion and rust.  
60A208  
Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-  
age your cooling system. Your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer can help you select the  
proper coolant.  
7-13  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Gear Oil: 6, 10  
Automatic Transmission Fluid: 10  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Check the engine coolant level at the  
reserve tank, not at the radiator. With the  
engine cool, the engine coolant level  
should be between the “FULLand “LOW”  
marks.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging your cooling sys-  
tem:  
Engine coolant is harmful or fatal if  
swallowed or inhaled. Do not drink  
antifreeze or coolant solution. If swal-  
lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme-  
• Always use a high quality ethylene  
glycol base phosphate type coolant  
diluted with distilled water at the  
correct mixture concentration.  
• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/  
50 coolant to distilled water and in  
no case higher than 70/30. Concen-  
trations greater than 70/30 coolant  
to distilled water will cause over-  
heating conditions.  
diately contact  
a
poison control  
Adding Engine Coolant  
center or a physician. Avoid inhaling  
mist or hot vapors; if inhaled, remove  
to fresh air. If coolant gets in eyes,  
flush eyes with water and seek medi-  
cal attention. Wash thoroughly after  
handling. Solution can be poisonous  
to animals. Keep out of the reach of  
children and animals.  
If the engine coolant level is below the  
“LOW” mark, more engine coolant should  
be added. Remove the reserve tank cap  
and add engine coolant until the reserve  
tank level reaches the “FULLmark. Never  
fill the reserve tank above the “FULLmark.  
• Do not use straight coolant nor  
plain water (except SUZUKI LLC:  
Super (Blue)).  
• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi-  
tives. They may not be compatible  
with your cooling system.  
• Do not mix different types of base  
coolants. Doing so may result in  
accelerated seal wear and/or the  
possibility of severe overheating  
and extensive engine/automatic  
transmission damage.  
CAUTION  
• The mixture you use should con-  
tain 50% concentration of anti-  
freeze.  
• If the lowest ambient temperature  
in your area is expected to be –35  
°C (–31°F) or below, use higher  
concentrations up to 60% following  
the instructions on the antifreeze  
container.  
• When putting the cap on the  
reserve tank, line up the arrow on  
the cap and the arrow on the tank.  
Failure to follow this can result in  
coolant leakage.  
7-14  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic Transmission Fluid: 10  
Engine Coolant: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Engine Coolant Replacement  
EXAMPLE  
Open  
Close  
66J191  
64J191  
66J151  
3) Loosen the drain plug attached to the  
lower part of the radiator and drain the  
engine coolant into a suitable container.  
4) Reinstall the reservoir and fill it with  
engine coolant to the “FULLline.  
5) Tighten the drain plug on the radiator,  
fill the radiator with engine coolant and  
install the radiator cap.  
6) After filling, let the engine idle for about  
2 – 3 minutes to get rid of air in the  
cooling system. Then, stop the engine.  
7) Check the engine coolant level in the  
radiator again. If the level has gone  
down, add more engine coolant.  
1) When the engine is cool, remove the  
radiator cap by turning it slowly to the  
left until a “stop” is felt. Do not press  
down while turning the cap. Wait until  
any pressure is released, then press  
down on the cap and continue turning it  
to the left.  
WARNING  
It is hazardous to remove the radiator  
cap when the engine coolant temper-  
ature is high, because scalding fluid  
and steam may be blown out under  
pressure. Wait until the engine cool-  
ant temperature has lowered before  
removing the cap.  
2) Remove the reservoir by lifting it up,  
and drain the reservoir completely.  
CAUTION  
The engine coolant must be replaced  
with the vehicle on level ground.  
7-15  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Air Cleaner  
Spark Plugs  
CAUTION  
The air cleaner element should be  
replaced every 50000 km (30000  
miles). More frequent replacement is  
necessary when you drive under  
dusty conditions.  
EXAMPLE  
66J167  
78K056  
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there  
will be greater intake resistance, resulting  
in decreased power output and increased  
fuel consumption.  
NOTE:  
For 3.2 L engine, to approach the spark  
plugs, you need to remove the bolts shown  
in the illustration.  
Check and clean periodically according to  
the following procedure:  
1) Take off the air cleaner case cover.  
Remove the element from the air  
cleaner case cover.  
2) This air cleaner element is of dry type.  
Remember that it needs cleaning  
according to the following method.  
3) Blow off dust on cleaner element by  
compressed air from inside the ele-  
ment, or replace the element as neces-  
sary.  
7-16  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Engine Coolant: 1, 2  
Windshield Washer Fluid: 3  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Gear Oil  
Specified Gear Oil  
When replacing gear oil, use gear oil with  
the appropriate viscosity and grade as  
shown in the charts below. We highly rec-  
ommend you use SAE 75W-90 gear oil  
(SAE 80W-90 for front differential oil, rear  
differential oil and transfer gear oil).  
1.0 – 1.1 mm  
(0.039 – 0.043 in.)  
Transmission/Extension case  
65D434  
80G093  
You should inspect spark plugs periodically  
for carbon deposits. When carbon accu-  
mulates on a spark plug, a strong spark  
may not be produced. Remove carbon  
deposits with a wire or pin and adjust the  
spark plug gap.  
CAUTION  
54G095  
When replacing spark plugs, you  
should use the brand and type speci-  
fied for your vehicle. For the speci-  
Differential/Transfer case  
fied  
plugs,  
refer  
to  
the  
To access the spark plugs:  
1) Remove the engine cover.  
2) Disconnect the coupler (1) while push-  
ing the release lever.  
“SPECIFICATIONS” section at the  
end of this book. If you wish to use a  
brand of spark plug other than the  
specified plugs, consult your SUZUKI  
dealer.  
3) Remove the bolt.  
4) Pull the ignition coil out.  
65D594  
7-17  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Windshield Washer Fluid: 3  
Air Cleaner: 1, 2  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Manual transmission  
Extension case (2WD)  
API GRADE  
(1)  
Transmission/  
Extension case  
GL-4  
Transfer case  
GL-5  
(Hypoid gear oil)  
Front  
Rear  
Differential  
(2)  
52D087  
66J165  
Transfer case  
(1) Oil filler and level plug  
(2) Oil drain plug  
(1)  
(2)  
66J005  
(1) Oil filler and level plug  
(2) Oil drain plug  
7-18  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spark Plugs: 1, 2  
Brakes: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Front differential  
Gear Oil Level Check  
Gear Oil Replacement  
The manual transmission, transfer gears,  
extension case and differentials (front and  
rear) are lubricated with gear oil. To check  
the gear oil level in any of the above loca-  
tions, use the following procedure:  
To change the gear oil in the manual trans-  
mission, transfer case, extension case or  
differential(s), use the following procedure:  
1) Remove the oil filler plug (1).  
2) Remove the drain plug (2), drain the oil  
and reinstall the drain plug.  
3) Pour new gear oil of the specified type  
through the filler hole until the oil level  
reaches the bottom of the filler hole.  
4) Reinstall the filler plug.  
(1)  
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Set  
parking brake and stop the engine.  
2) Remove the oil filler plug (1).  
3) Check the inside of the hole with your  
finger. If the oil level comes up to the  
bottom of the plug hole, the oil level is  
correct. If so, reinstall the plug.  
4) If the oil level is low, add gear oil  
through the filler plug hole (1) until the  
oil level reaches the bottom of the filler  
hole, then reinstall the plug.  
(2)  
WARNING  
After driving the vehicle, gear oil tem-  
perature may be high enough to burn  
you. Wait until the oil filler plug is  
cool enough to touch with your bare  
hands before inspecting or replacing  
gear oil.  
79K133  
(1)  
Rear differential  
(2)  
CAUTION  
When tightening these plugs, apply  
sealing compound “SUZUKI Bond  
No. 1217G” or equivalent to the plug  
threads to prevent oil leakage and  
tighten them to the specified torque  
shown below.  
79K134  
(1) Oil filler and level plug  
(2) Oil drain plug  
7-19  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Brakes: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Tightening torque  
Clutch Pedal  
Automatic Transmission  
Fluid  
Oil Filler  
Plug  
Oil Drain  
Plug  
Specified Fluid  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Use an automatic transmission fluid  
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309.  
Manual  
transmission  
Fluid Level Check  
CAUTION  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Transfer  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Driving with too much or too little  
fluid can damage the transmission.  
Extension  
case  
You must check the fluid level with the  
automatic transmission fluid at normal  
operating temperature.  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Front  
64J154  
differential  
Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-  
tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.  
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully  
depressed, have the clutch inspected by  
your SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch fluid level  
is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the “MAX”  
line with DOT3 brake fluid.  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
To check the fluid level:  
Rear  
differential  
1) To warm up the transmission fluid, drive  
the vehicle or idle the engine until the  
temperature gauge indicates normal  
operating temperature.  
2) Then drive for ten more minutes.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the specified auto-  
matic transmission fluid. Using auto-  
matic transmission fluid other than  
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309  
may damage the automatic transmis-  
sion of your vehicle.  
7-20  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Brakes: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
NOTE:  
The fluid level should be between the  
two marks in the “HOT” range on the  
dipstick.  
Do not check the fluid level if you have just  
driven the vehicle for a long time at high  
speed, if you have driven in city traffic in  
hot weather, or if the vehicle has been pull-  
ing a trailer. Wait until the fluid cools down  
(about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indica-  
tion will not be correct.  
EXAMPLE  
or  
7) Add just enough specified fluid through  
the dipstick hole to fill the transmission  
to the proper level.  
CAUTION  
After checking or adding oil, be sure  
to insert the dipstick securely.  
3) Park your vehicle on level ground.  
4) Apply the parking brake and then start  
the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for  
two minutes and keep it running during  
the fluid level check.  
5) With your foot on the brake pedal, move  
the gearshift lever through each gear,  
pausing for about three seconds in  
each range. Then move it back to the  
“P” (Park) position.  
Changing Oil  
Since special procedures, materials and  
tools are required to change the automatic  
transmission oil, it is recommended that  
you trust this job to your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
60A205  
The handle of the A/T fluid dipstick is col-  
ored red for easy identification.  
WARNING  
FULL HOT  
LOW HOT  
Be sure to depress the brake pedal  
when moving the gearshift lever, or  
the vehicle can move suddenly.  
65D109  
6) Remove the dipstick, clean it and push  
it back in until the cap seats. Pull out  
the dipstick and read the fluid level.  
7-21  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steering Wheel: 6  
Clutch Pedal: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
(Continued)  
• Do not use any fluid other than  
DOT3 brake fluid. Do not use  
reclaimed fluid or fluid that has  
been stored in old or open contain-  
ers. It is essential that foreign parti-  
cles and other liquids are kept out  
of the brake fluid reservoir.  
65D477  
WARNING  
Failure to follow the guidelines below  
can result in personal injury or seri-  
ous damage to the brake system.  
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir  
drops below a certain level, the  
brake warning light on the instru-  
ment panel will come on (the  
engine must be running with the  
parking brake fully disengaged.)  
Should the light come on, immedi-  
ately ask your SUZUKI dealer to  
inspect the brake system.  
• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in  
the brake system which should be  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer  
immediately.  
• Brake fluid can harm your eyes and  
damage painted surfaces. Use cau-  
tion when refilling the reservoir.  
(Continued)  
WARNING  
Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-  
lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-  
tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,  
do not induce vomiting. Immediately  
contact a poison control center or a  
physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,  
flush eyes with water and seek medi-  
cal attention. Wash thoroughly after  
handling. Solution can be poisonous  
to animals. Keep out of the reach of  
children and animals.  
64J154  
Check the brake fluid level by looking at  
the reservoir in the engine compartment.  
Check that the fluid level is between the  
“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluid  
level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the  
“MAX” line with DOT3 brake fluid.  
CAUTION  
The brake fluid should be replaced  
according to the maintenance sched-  
ule. Have the brake fluid replaced by  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
7-22  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
NOTE:  
measured above is less than the minimum  
distance required, have your vehicle  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.  
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be  
expected to gradually fall as the brake  
pads wear.  
NOTE:  
When measuring the distance between the  
brake pedal and floor wall, push in the floor  
carpet as far as it goes and measure the  
distance between the carpet surface and  
the brake pedal.  
Brake Pedal  
60G104  
“a”  
WARNING  
If you experience any of the following  
problems with your vehicle’s brake  
system, have the vehicle inspected  
immediately by your SUZUKI dealer.  
• Poor braking performance  
• Uneven braking (brakes not work-  
ing uniformly on all wheels.)  
• Excessive pedal travel  
Floor carpet  
79K138  
Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance  
“a”  
80 mm (3.1 in.)  
• Brake dragging  
• Excessive noise  
With the engine running and the parking  
brake set, measure the distance between  
the brake pedal and floor carpet when the  
pedal is depressed with approximately 300  
N (66 lbs, 30 kg) of force. The minimum  
distance required is as specified. Since  
your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjust-  
ing, there is no need for pedal adjustment.  
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as  
• (Except ABS equipped vehicle)  
Pedal pulsation (pedal pulsates  
when pressed for braking.)  
7-23  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Power Steering (if equipped)  
Parking Brake Lever  
EXAMPLE  
Steering Wheel  
EXAMPLE  
200 N (44 lbs, 20 kg)  
(1)  
“c”  
“b”  
(2)  
60A226  
64J155  
78K080  
(1) UPPER  
(2) LOWER  
Ratchet tooth specification “b”  
5th – 7th  
Steering wheel play “c”  
Check the steering box case, vane pump  
and hose connections for leaks or damage.  
0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)  
Check the parking brake for proper adjust-  
ment by counting the number of clicks  
made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly  
pull up on the parking brake lever to the  
point of full engagement. The parking  
brake lever should stop between the speci-  
fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels  
should be securely locked. If the parking  
brake is not properly adjusted or the  
brakes drag after the lever has been fully  
released, have the parking brake inspected  
and/or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer.  
Check the play of the steering wheel by  
gently turning it from left to right and mea-  
suring the distance that it moves before  
you feel slight resistance. The play should  
be between the specified values. Check  
that the steering wheel turns easily and  
smoothly without rattling by turning it all the  
way to the right and to the left while driving  
very slowly in an open area. If the amount  
of free play is outside the specification or  
you find anything else to be wrong, an  
inspection must be performed by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
Power Steering Fluid  
Check the fluid level by looking at the res-  
ervoir in the engine compartment when the  
fluid is cold (about room temperature).  
Check that the fluid level is between the (1)  
and (2) lines. If the fluid level is near the (2)  
line, fill it up to the (1) line with an auto-  
matic transmission fluid equivalent to ATF  
®
®
DEXRON -II (Esso JWS 2326) or  
DEXRON -III. Do not overfill.  
7-24  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
B. Tire Name/Model  
F. Load Rating  
Tires  
The tire name or model is shown  
here.  
Load rating is the maximum  
weight a tire is designed to sup-  
port in normal service.  
For safe operation of your vehicle, it is  
important that the tires be the correct  
type and size, in good condition, and  
properly inflated. Be sure to follow the  
requirements and recommendations in  
this section.  
C. Tire Size  
The tire size code is a combina-  
tion of letters and numbers used  
to define a particular tire’s width,  
height, aspect ratio, construction  
type, and service description. See  
the “Tire Size” explanation later in  
this section for more details.  
D. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Num-  
ber  
G. Max Inflation Pressure  
Max inflation pressure is the max-  
imum inflation pressure a tire is  
designed for.  
H. Tire Ply Material  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
These tire markings describe the  
type of cord and number of plies  
in the sidewall and under the  
tread.  
Useful information about a tire is  
molded into its sidewall. The example  
below shows a typical passenger car  
tire.  
The Department of Transportation  
(DOT) marking indicates that the  
tire is in compliance with the U.S.  
Department of Transportation  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.  
The letters and numbers following  
the DOT marking is the Tire Iden-  
tification Number (TIN). The TIN  
identifies the tire manufacturer  
and plant, tire size, and date the  
tire was manufactured.  
I. Load Index and Speed Rating  
The two- or three-digit number is  
the tire’s load index, the maximum  
load a tire can carry at the speed  
indicated by its speed symbol at  
the maximum inflation pressure.  
The higher the number is, the  
greater the load carrying capacity.  
The letter symbol denotes the  
speed at which a tire is designed  
to be driven for extended periods  
of time. (Ratings are listed below.)  
Typical Passenger Car Tire Sidewall  
I
C
D
J
B
H
G
E. Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
(UTQG)  
A
E
Tire manufacturers are required to  
grade tires based on three perfor-  
mance factors: treadwear, traction  
EXAMPLE  
F
67D027  
and  
temperature  
resistance.  
A. Tire Manufacturer  
Refer to the “Uniform Tire Quality  
Grading” section for more details.  
The name of the tire manufacturer  
is shown here.  
7-25  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
D. Construction Code  
Tire Size  
Letter Rating  
Speed Rating  
99 mph  
This letter code is used to indicate  
the type of ply construction in the  
tire. The letter “R” means radial  
ply tire construction, the letter “D”  
means diagonal or bias ply con-  
struction, and the letter “B” means  
belted-bias ply construction.  
E. Rim Diameter  
The following illustration shows an  
example of a typical passenger car tire  
size.  
Q
R
S
T
106 mph  
112 mph  
118 mph  
124 mph  
130 mph  
149 mph  
168 mph*  
186 mph*  
EXAMPLE  
U
H
V
W
Y
This two-digit number is the wheel  
or rim diameter in inches.  
WARNING  
A
B
C
D
E
Your SUZUKI is equipped with  
tires which are all the same type  
and size. This is important to  
ensure proper steering and han-  
dling of the vehicle. Never mix  
tires of different size or type on  
the four wheels of your vehicle.  
Mixing tires could cause you to  
lose control while driving which  
may lead to an accident. The size  
and type of tires used should be  
only those approved by SUZUKI  
Motor Corporation as standard or  
optional equipment for your vehi-  
cle.  
67D028  
*The letters ZR may be used on tires  
with a maximum speed capability over  
149 mph and will always be used on  
tires with a maximum speed capability  
over 186 mph.  
A. Tire Type  
This letter code indicates the pri-  
mary intended use of the tire. The  
letter “P” identifies a tire primarily  
intended for use on a passenger  
vehicle.  
J. M+S Marking  
This marking indicates the tire  
has some mud and snow capabili-  
ties and is designed for all-season  
use.  
B. Tire Width  
This three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millime-  
ters from sidewall to sidewall.  
C. Aspect Ratio  
This two-digit number represents  
the tire section height divided by  
the tire section width.  
7-26  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
• Recommended Cold Tire Inflation temperature. If you adjust the tire  
Tire Inflation Pressure  
Pressure of Original Tires  
pressure in a garage that is warmer  
than the outside temperature, you  
should add 1 psi to the recommended  
cold tire inflation pressure for every  
10°F difference between garage tem-  
perature and outside temperature.  
Tire inflation pressure should be  
checked when the tire is cold. “Cold  
tire inflation pressure” is the pressure  
in a tire that has been driven less than  
1 mile (1.6 km) or has been standing  
for three hours or more.  
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation  
Pressures  
230 kPa  
Front Tires  
33 psi  
Measuring air pressure  
230 kPa  
Rear Tires  
Use the following steps to achieve  
proper tire inflation:  
33 psi  
230 kPa  
1) Identify the recommended tire pres-  
sure on the vehicle’s Tire and Load-  
ing Information Label or in the  
owner’s manual.  
Spare  
33 psi  
NOTE:  
The tire inflation pressure will change  
due to changes in atmospheric pres-  
sure, temperature or tire temperature  
when driving. To reduce the chance  
that the low tire pressure warning light  
will come on due to normal changes in  
temperature and atmospheric pres-  
sure, it is important to check and  
adjust the tire pressures when the tires  
are cold. Tires that appear to be at the  
specified pressure when checked after  
driving, when the tires are warm, could  
have pressure below the specification  
when the tires cool down. Also, tires  
that are inflated to the specified pres-  
sure in a warm garage may have pres-  
sure below the specification when the  
vehicle is driven outside in very cold  
2) Remove the valve cap from the tire  
valve stem.  
3) Using a reliable pressure gauge,  
measure the tire inflation pressure  
by pressing the tire gauge firmly  
onto the valve to get a pressure  
measurement. Remember that  
inflation pressures should be  
checked when the tires are “cold”,  
meaning before they have been  
driven one mile or after sitting for  
three hours or more allowing the  
tire to cool to ambient air tempera-  
ture.  
54G307  
The front, rear and spare tire pressure  
specifications for your vehicle are  
shown below and are listed on the Tire  
and Loading Information Label, which  
is located on the driver’s door lock pil-  
lar. The Tire and Loading Information  
Label contains the following informa-  
tion:  
• Seating Capacity  
4) If the air pressure is too high, slowly  
release the air by pressing on the  
tire valve stem with the edge of the  
• Maximum  
Allowed  
Combined  
Weight of Occupants and Cargo  
• Original Tire Size  
7-27  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
tire gauge until you reach the cor-  
rect pressure.  
5) If the air pressure is too low, fill the  
tire with air at a service station until  
it reaches the recommended pres-  
sure.  
6) Make sure all tires have the same  
air pressure (unless the owner’s  
manual indicates otherwise).  
Tire Inspection  
WARNING  
Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least  
once a month by performing the fol-  
lowing checks:  
(Continued)  
• Never underinflate or overin-  
1) Measure the air pressure with a tire  
gauge. Adjust the pressure if nec-  
essary. Remember to check the  
spare tire, too. Refer to the “Mea-  
suring Air Pressure” section.  
flate the tires.  
Underinflation  
can  
cause  
unusual handling characteris-  
tics or can cause the rim to slip  
on the tire bead, resulting in an  
accident or damage to the tire  
or rim.  
Underinflation can also cause  
tires to overheat, leading to tire  
failure.  
Overinflation can cause the tire  
to burst, resulting in personal  
injury.  
Overinflation can also cause  
unusual handling characteris-  
tics which may result in an acci-  
dent.  
WARNING  
• Air  
pressures  
should  
be  
checked when the tires are cold  
or you may get inaccurate read-  
ings.  
• Check the inflation pressure  
from time to time while inflating  
the tire gradually, until the spec-  
ified pressure is obtained.  
(Continued)  
54G136  
(1) Tread wear indicator  
(2) Indicator location mark  
2) Check that the depth of the tread  
groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06  
in.). To help you check this, the tires  
have molded-in tread wear indica-  
tors in the grooves. When the indi-  
cators appear on the tread surface,  
the remaining depth of the tread is  
7-28  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less and the  
tire should be replaced.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks  
and damage. Any tires with cracks  
or other damage should be  
replaced. If any tires show abnor-  
mal wear, have them inspected by  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
Your SUZUKI is equipped with  
tires which are all the same type  
and size. This is important to  
ensure proper steering and han-  
dling of the vehicle. Never mix  
tires of different size or type on  
the four wheels of your vehicle.  
The size and type of tires used  
should be only those approved by  
SUZUKI Motor Corporation as  
standard or optional equipment  
for your vehicle.  
Replacing the wheels and tires  
equipped on your vehicle with  
certain combinations of aftermar-  
ket wheels and tires can signifi-  
cantly change the steering and  
handling characteristics of your  
vehicle. Oversized tires may also  
rub against the fender over  
bumps, causing vehicle damage  
or tire failure. Therefore, use only  
those wheel and tire combina-  
tions approved by SUZUKI Motor  
Corporation as standard or  
optional equipment for your vehi-  
cle. For information regarding the  
specified tires, refer to the Tire  
Information Label located on the  
driver’s side door pillar or the  
“SPECIFICATIONS” section.  
WARNING  
Hitting curbs and running over  
rocks can damage tires and affect  
wheel alignment. Be sure to have  
tires  
and  
wheel  
alignment  
checked periodically by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
4) Check for loose wheel nuts.  
5) Check that there are no nails,  
stones or other objects sticking into  
the tires.  
CAUTION  
Replacing the original tires with  
tires of a different size may result  
in false speedometer or odometer  
readings. Check with your  
SUZUKI dealer before purchas-  
ing replacement tires that differ in  
size from the original tires.  
7-29  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
course. For example, a tire graded 150 Temperature – A, B, C  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) The temperature grades are A (the  
times as well on the government highest), B and C, representing the  
course as a tire graded 100. The rela- tire’s resistance to the generation of  
tive performance of tires depends heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
upon the actual conditions of their use, when tested under controlled condi-  
however and may depart significantly tions on a specified indoor laboratory  
from the norm due to variations in driv- test wheel. Sustained high tempera-  
ing habits, service practices and differ- ture can cause the material of the tire  
ences in road characteristics and to degenerate and reduce tire life, and  
The U.S. National Highway Traffic  
Safety Administration has developed a  
grading system for evaluating the per-  
formance of passenger car tires. The  
following information will help you  
understand the grading system, which  
applies to vehicles sold in the U.S.  
Consult your SUZUKI dealer or tire  
retailer for help in choosing the correct  
replacement tires for your vehicle.  
climate.  
excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-  
sponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must  
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B  
and A represent higher levels of per-  
formance on the laboratory test wheel  
than the minimum required by law.  
Quality grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall between  
tread shoulder and maximum section  
width. For example:  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to  
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those  
grades represent the tire’s ability to  
stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on speci-  
fied government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-  
ture A  
DOT Quality Grades  
WARNING  
Treadwear  
Traction AA A B C  
The temperature grade for this  
tire is established for a tire that is  
properly inflated and not over-  
loaded. Excessive speed, under-  
inflation or excessive loading,  
either separately or in combina-  
tion, can cause heat buildup and  
possible tire failure.  
WARNING  
Temperature A B C  
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform  
To Federal Safety Requirements in  
Addition To These Grades  
The traction grade assigned to  
this tire is based on straight-  
ahead braking traction tests, and  
does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning or peak  
traction characteristics.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative  
rating based on the wear rate of the  
tire when tested under controlled con-  
ditions on a specified government test  
7-30  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires: 6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Tire Rotation  
4-tire rotation  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the  
parts to which it is fastened, can  
make wheel nuts become loose  
after a time. The wheel could  
come off and cause an accident.  
Vehicle equipped with P225/  
65R17 tires have a spare wheel  
and tire that are a different size  
than the wheels and tires on the  
vehicle. The spare wheel and tire  
on these vehicles are intended for  
temporary emergency use only.  
The wheel is painted yellow to  
remind you that the wheel and  
tire are for temporary use only.  
Continuous use of this spare can  
result in tire failure and loss of  
control. Always observe these  
precautions when using this  
spare:  
• Be aware that your vehicle will  
handle differently with this tem-  
porary spare.  
• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)  
speed.  
• Replace the temporary spare  
with a standard tire and wheel  
as soon as possible.  
When you change  
a
wheel,  
remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches  
to the vehicle. In an emergency,  
you can use a cloth or a paper  
towel to do this; but be sure to  
use a scraper or wire brush later,  
if you need to, to get all the rust  
or dirt off.  
65D459  
To avoid uneven wear of your tires and  
to prolong their life, rotate the tires as  
illustrated. Tires should be rotated as  
recommended in the periodic mainte-  
nance schedule. After rotation, adjust  
front and rear tire pressures to the  
specification listed on your vehicle’s  
Tire and Loading Information Label.  
• Do not operate your vehicle in  
“4H LOCK” or “4L LOCK” with  
this temporary spare.  
(Continued)  
7-31  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery: 9  
Fuses: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
always face outward when mounted  
on a vehicle.  
GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMI-  
NOLOGY  
WARNING  
Accessory Weight – the combined  
weight (in excess of those standard  
items which may be replaced) of auto-  
matic transmission, power steering,  
power brakes, power windows, power  
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent  
that these items are available as fac-  
tory-installed equipment (whether  
installed or not).  
(Continued)  
Maximum Inflation Pressure – the  
maximum cold inflation pressure a tire  
is designed to support in normal ser-  
vice.  
• Do not use tire chains on the  
spare tire. If you must use tire  
chains, rearrange the wheels so  
standard tires and wheels are  
fitted to the rear axle.  
• Replace the spare tire with a  
new one as soon as the tread  
wear indicator appears.  
• When replacing the spare tire,  
use a replacement tire with the  
exact same size and construc-  
tion.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight –  
the sum of curb weight, accessory  
weight, vehicle capacity weight (total  
load capacity), and production options  
weight.  
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure – the pres-  
sure in a tire that has been driven less  
than 1 mile or has been standing for  
three hours or more.  
Normal Occupant Weight – 68 kilo-  
grams times the number of occupants  
specified in the second column of  
Table 1 (shown below).  
Curb Weight – the weight of a motor  
vehicle with standard equipment  
including the maximum capacity of  
fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so  
equipped, air conditioning and addi-  
tional weight optional engine.  
Snow Tires  
Occupant distribution – distribution of  
occupants in a vehicle as specified in  
the third column of Table 1 (shown  
below).  
Your vehicle is equipped with all-sea-  
son tires which are designed for use in  
summer and most winter conditions.  
For improved traction in severe winter  
conditions, SUZUKI recommends  
mounting radial snow tires on all four  
wheels. Snow tires must be the same  
size as the standard tires. Also be sure  
to use the tires of the same type and  
brand on all four wheels of your vehi-  
cle.  
Production Options Weight – the com-  
bined weight of those installed regular  
production options weighing over 2.3  
kilograms in excess of those standard  
items which they replace, not previ-  
ously considered in curb weight or  
accessory weight, including heavy  
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,  
heavy duty battery, and special trim.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall – (1) the  
sidewall that contains a whitewall,  
bears white lettering or bears manu-  
facturer, brand, and/or model name  
molding that is higher or deeper than  
the same molding on the other side-  
wall of the tire, or (2) the outward fac-  
ing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire  
that has a particular side that must  
7-32  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fuses: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Recommended Inflation Pressure – TABLE 1 – Occupant Loading and which is located below the Safety Cer-  
the cold tire inflation pressure recom- Distribution For Vehicle Normal tification Label. The cargo load capac-  
mended by a manufacturer.  
Load For Various Designated Seat- ity can be determined as described  
ing Capacities  
below.  
Rim – metal support for a tire or tire  
and tube assembly upon which the tire  
beads are seated.  
Cargo Load Capacity – Maximum  
weight of cargo and luggage that the  
vehicle can safely carry. Cargo load  
capacity is the difference between the  
total load capacity of the vehicle and  
the total combined weight of all vehicle  
occupants. Refer to “Steps for Deter-  
mining Correct Load Limit” for details  
on how to determine cargo load  
capacity.  
Designated Vehicle  
Occupant  
distribution  
in a  
seating  
normal  
load,  
number of normally  
occupants loaded  
vehicle  
capacity,  
number of  
occupants  
Vehicle Capacity Weight – the rated  
cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo-  
grams (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s  
designated seating capacity.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire –  
the load on an individual tire that is  
determined by distributing to each axle  
its share of the maximum loaded vehi-  
cle weight and dividing by two.  
2 through 4  
2
3
2 in front  
5 through 10  
2 in front,  
1 in sec-  
ond seat  
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall  
weight of the fully loaded vehicle  
(including all the occupants, accesso-  
ries and cargo plus the trailer tongue  
weight if towing a trailer).  
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire – the  
load on an individual tire that is deter-  
mined by distributing to each axle its  
share of the curb weight, accessory  
weight, and normal occupant weight  
(distributed in accordance with Table 1  
shown below) and dividing by 2.  
Vehicle Loading  
Your vehicle was designed for specific  
load capacities. The load capacities of  
your vehicle are indicated by the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR,  
front and rear), and the total load  
capacity, the seating capacity, and the  
cargo load capacity. The GVWR and  
GAWR (front and rear) are listed on  
the Safety Certification Label which is  
located below the driver’s side door  
latch striker. The total load capacity  
and seating capacity are listed on the  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum  
permissible weight on an individual  
axle.  
Seating Capacity – Maximum number  
of occupants the vehicle is designed to  
carry.  
NOTE:  
Even though the number of occupants  
is within the seating capacity, you still  
must make sure that you do not  
7-33  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
exceed the total load capacity of the bring the load down to the rated  
vehicle. capacity.  
• Always distribute cargo evenly.  
• To avoid personal injury or  
damage to your vehicle, always  
secure cargo to prevent it from  
shifting if the vehicle moves  
suddenly.  
• Place heavier objects on the  
floor and as far forward in the  
cargo area as possible. Never  
pile cargo higher than the top of  
the seatbacks.  
Total Load Capacity – Maximum per-  
missible weight a vehicle can carry  
including the weight of all the occu-  
pants, accessories, cargo, plus trailer  
tongue weight (if towing a trailer).  
WARNING  
Never overload your vehicle.  
Overloading your vehicle can  
cause damage to your tires and  
lead to poor steering and braking  
which can result in an accident.  
The gross vehicle weight (sum of  
the weights of the loaded vehicle,  
driver and passengers) must  
never exceed the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) listed on  
the Safety Certification Label. In  
addition, never distribute a load  
so that the weight on either the  
front or rear axle exceeds the  
The weight of any accessories already  
installed on your vehicle at the time of  
purchase, or that you or the dealer  
install after purchase, must be sub-  
tracted from the total load capacity to  
determine how much capacity remains  
available for occupants, cargo, and  
trailer tongue weight (if towing a  
trailer). Contact your dealer for further  
information.  
Steps for Determining Correct Load  
Limit  
1) Locate the statement “The com-  
bined weight of occupants and  
cargo should never exceed XXX kg  
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s plac-  
ard.  
2) Determine the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers that will  
be riding in your vehicle.  
3) Subtract the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers from  
XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
Gross  
Axle  
Weight  
Rating  
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle  
and actual loads at the front and rear  
axles can only be determined by  
weighing the vehicle using a vehicle  
scale. To measure the weight and  
load, try making your vehicle to a high-  
way weighing station, shipping com-  
pany or inspection station for trucks,  
etc. Compare these weights to the  
GVWR and GAWR (front and rear)  
listed on the Safety Certification Label.  
If the gross vehicle weight or the load  
on either axle exceeds these ratings,  
you must remove enough weight to  
(GAWR) listed on the Safety Certi-  
fication Label.  
4) The resulting figure equals the  
available amount of cargo and lug-  
gage load capacity. For example, if  
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs  
and there will be five 150 lb passen-  
7-34  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses: 7  
Headlight Aiming:  
Bulb Replacement: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
gers in your vehicle, the amount of 600 lbs to 275 lbs (600 – 325 = 275 NOTE:  
available cargo and luggage load lbs). As you can see, as the number Use of replacement tires with a higher  
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 – 750 (5 x and combined weight of vehicle occu- load-carrying capacity than the origi-  
150) = 650 lbs).  
pants increase, the vehicle’s cargo nal tires, or using a tire inflation pres-  
sure higher than the recommended  
5) Determine the combined weight of and luggage capacity decreases.  
luggage and cargo being loaded on Suppose again, that you were to take tire inflation pressure, will not increase  
the vehicle. That weight may not a trip in your vehicle with the same the GVWR or GAWR limit of your vehi-  
safely exceed the available cargo three passengers described above, cle.  
and luggage load capacity calcu- and you decided to tow a trailer having  
lated in Step 4.  
a trailer tongue weight of 75 lbs. The  
6) If your vehicle will be towing a cargo and luggage capacity would be  
trailer, load from your trailer will be reduced again, to 200 lbs (275 – 75 =  
transferred to your vehicle. Consult 200 lbs).  
this manual to determine how this  
Determining Compatibility of Tire  
and Vehicle Load Limits  
The tires on your vehicle, when they  
are inflated to the recommended tire  
inflation pressure, have a load-carry-  
reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of your vehi-  
cle.  
Vehicle Loading Example  
As an example, suppose that the Tire ing capacity that is greater than the  
and Loading Information label on your load that will be on the tires when the  
vehicle indicates that your vehicle’s vehicle is at its GVWR or GAWR limit.  
total load capacity is 950 lbs. If you Never use replacement tires that have  
were to drive your vehicle with one a load-carrying capacity less than the  
passenger, and the total combined original tires on your vehicle. Tire load-  
weight of you and your passenger was carrying capacity information is  
350 lbs, then the cargo and luggage molded into the tire sidewall typically  
capacity of your vehicle would be 600 shown as “Max. Load”. Use of replace-  
lbs (950 – 350 = 600 lbs).  
ment tires with a lower load-carrying  
If you later added 2 more passengers, capacity than the original tires, or fail-  
having a combined weight of 325 lbs, ure to keep the tires inflated to recom-  
the cargo and luggage capacity of mended tire pressure, may reduce the  
your vehicle would be reduced from GVWR or GAWR limit of your vehicle.  
7-35  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb Replacement: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Battery  
Fuses  
WARNING  
Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as  
described below:  
To avoid harm to yourself or damage  
to your vehicle or battery, follow the  
jump starting instructions in the  
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section of  
this manual if it is necessary to jump  
start your vehicle.  
EXAMPLE  
Main Fuse – The main fuse takes current  
directly from the battery.  
Primary Fuses – These fuses are between  
the main fuse and individual fuses, and are  
for electrical load groups.  
Individual Fuses – These fuses are for indi-  
vidual electrical circuits.  
WARNING  
Battery posts, terminals and related  
accessories contain lead and lead  
compounds. Wash hands after han-  
dling.  
For details on protected circuits, refer to  
the “FUSES AND PROTECTED CIR-  
CUITS” section in this manual.  
60A269  
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery that  
requires infrequent maintenance. You will  
never have to add water. You should, how-  
ever, periodically check the battery, battery  
terminals and battery hold-down bracket  
for corrosion. Remove corrosion using a  
stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water,  
or baking soda mixed with water. After  
removing corrosion, rinse with clean water.  
WARNING  
Batteries produce flammable hydro-  
gen gas. Keep flames and sparks  
away from the battery or an explosion  
may occur. Never smoke when work-  
ing near the battery.  
WARNING  
The test indicator on the top of the battery  
provides information on the condition of  
the battery.  
When checking or servicing the bat-  
tery, disconnect the negative cable.  
Be careful not to cause a short circuit  
by allowing metal objects to contact  
the battery posts and the vehicle at  
the same time.  
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for  
a month or longer, disconnect the cable  
from the negative terminal of the battery to  
help prevent discharge.  
7-36  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Bulb Replacement: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Main Fuse Box  
(11) 50A ABS 1  
(12) 20A FI  
ABS actuator fuse  
Main fuse  
PRIMARY  
FUSE  
INDIVIDUAL FUSE  
(13)  
Blank  
60A LAMP  
Head light, Accessory,  
Dome light, Sunroof,  
Hazard light, Door lock,  
Rear fog light, Stop  
lamp, Tail light  
Head light high beam  
fuse, left  
(14) 10A H/L L  
(15) 10A H/L R  
Head light high beam  
fuse, right  
50A IGN 2  
40A 4WD  
Wiper/Washer, Power  
window, Seat heater  
(16) 10A H/L  
(17) 40A ST  
(18) 40A IGN  
Head light fuse  
Starter motor fuse  
Ignition fuse  
4WD actuator  
30A RDTR 1 Radiator fan  
30A RDTR 2 Radiator fan  
Head light low beam  
fuse, left  
(19) 15A H/L LO L  
(20) 15A H/L LO R  
64J157  
Head light low beam  
fuse, right  
Main Fuse / Primary Fuse  
WARNING  
(1) 15A CPRSR  
(2) 20A O2 HTR  
A/C compressor fuse  
If a fuse in the main fuse box blows,  
be sure to have your vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer. Always use a genuine SUZUKI  
replacement. Never use a substitute  
such as a wire even for a temporary  
fix, or extensive electrical damage  
and a fire can result.  
The main fuse, primary fuses and some of  
the individual fuses are located in the  
engine compartment. If the main fuse  
blows, no electrical component will func-  
tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical  
component in the corresponding load  
group will function. When replacing the  
main fuse or a primary fuse, use a genuine  
SUZUKI replacement.  
O2 sensor heater  
fuse  
(3) 15A THR MOT Throttle motor fuse  
Automatic transmis-  
(4) 20A AT  
sion fuse  
(5) 25A RR DEF  
(6) 15A HORN  
(7) 20A FR FOG  
Rear defogger fuse  
Horn fuse  
Front fog light fuse  
(8) 20A MRR HTR Mirror heater fuse  
Front blower motor  
(9) 40A FR BLW  
fuse  
(10) 30A ABS 2  
ABS actuator fuse  
7-37  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb Replacement: 7  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Fuse under the Dash Board  
Fuse box  
Radio, Remote door  
(T) 15A ACC  
(A) 10A DOME  
(B) 10A STOP  
Dome lamp fuse  
Stop lamp fuse  
Blank  
mirror fuse  
(U) 10A METER  
(V) 15A IG COIL  
Meter fuse  
(C)  
Ignition coil fuse  
Blank  
Accessory socket  
fuse  
(W)  
(D) 15A ACC 3  
(E) 10A CRUISE  
(F) 15A ACC 2  
(G) 20A WIP  
(X) 30A P/W  
Power window fuse  
Cruise control fuse  
Cigar or Accessory  
socket fuse  
Wiper fuse  
Ignition signal & Seat  
heater fuse  
(H) 15A IG2 SIG  
(I) 10A BACK  
(J) 10A ABS/ESP  
Back lamp fuse  
64J192  
ABS or ESP control-  
ler fuse  
(K) 10A A/B  
Air bag fuse  
(L) 15A RADIO  
(M) 15A HAZ  
(N) 7.5A ST SIG  
Radio fuse  
(K)  
(J) (I) (H) (G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B) (A)  
Hazard light fuse  
Starter signal fuse  
65D045  
The fuse box is located under the driver’s  
side of the dashboard. To remove a fuse,  
use the fuse puller provided in the fuse  
box.  
(V) (U) (T) (S) (R) (Q) (P) (O) (N) (M) (L)  
Engine control  
module fuse  
(O) 10A ECM  
(X)  
(W)  
(P) 25A S/R  
(Q) 25A B/U  
(R) 10A TAIL  
Sun roof motor fuse  
Buck up fuse  
Tail light fuse  
79K057  
Door lock actuator  
fuse  
(S) 20A D/L  
7-38  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bulb Replacement: 7  
Wiper Blades: 3  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
Headlight Aiming  
Since special procedures are required, we  
recommend you take your vehicle to your  
SUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment.  
Always be sure to replace a blown  
fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-  
age. Never use a substitute such as  
aluminum foil or wire to replace a  
blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and  
the new one blows in a short period  
of time, you may have a major electri-  
cal problem. Have your vehicle  
inspected immediately by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
OK  
BLOWN  
NOTE:  
60A243  
Make sure that the fuse box cover always  
carries spare fuses.  
OK  
BLOWN  
81A283  
7-39  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wiper Blades: 3  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Rear Interior Light (if equipped)  
Center Interior Light (if equipped)  
Bulb Replacement  
WARNING  
• Light bulbs can be hot enough to  
burn your finger right after being  
turned off. This is true especially  
for halogen headlight bulbs.  
Replace the bulbs after they  
become cool enough.  
• The headlight bulbs are filled with  
pressurized halogen gas. They can  
burst and injure you if they are hit  
or dropped. Handle them carefully.  
64J159  
64J160  
CAUTION  
Pull down the lens by using a flat blade  
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as  
shown. To install it, simply push it back in.  
Pull down the lens by using a flat blade  
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as  
shown. To install it, simply push it back in.  
The oils from your skin may cause a  
halogen bulb to overheat and burst  
when the lights are on. Grasp a new  
bulb with a clean cloth.  
The bulb can be removed by simply pulling  
it out. When replacing the bulb, make sure  
that the contact springs are holding the  
bulb securely.  
The bulb can be removed by simply pulling  
it out.  
CAUTION  
Frequent replacement of a bulb indi-  
cates the need for an inspection of  
the electrical system. This should be  
carried out by your SUZUKI dealer.  
NOTE:  
If it is difficult to replace headlight bulbs or  
clearance light bulbs due to under-hood  
components trust this job to your dealer.  
7-40  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wiper Blades: 3  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Open the engine hood. Disconnect the  
coupler. Remove the sealing rubber.  
Spot Light (if equipped)  
Pull down the lens by using a flat blade  
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as  
shown.  
Headlights  
Low beam  
(Halogen headlamp)  
Push the retaining spring forward and  
unhook it. Then remove the bulb. Install a  
new bulb in the reverse order of removal.  
Ceiling-mount type (if equipped)  
High beam  
79K089  
79K061  
Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-  
terclockwise. Pull out the bulb.  
78F072  
Open the engine hood. Disconnect the  
coupler while pushing the lock release.  
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise to  
remove it.  
66J108  
7-41  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wiper Blades: 3  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Front Fog Light  
(1)  
(4)  
(3)  
(2)  
65J357  
78F072  
79K090  
3) Remove the clip (4) with the same way  
as No.1).  
4) Open the fender cover. Disconnect the  
coupler with pushing the lock release.  
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise  
and remove it.  
1) Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the  
hole (2) and remove the clips (1) by  
twist the driver as shown in the illustra-  
tion.  
2) Remove the bolt (3) by a Phillips-head  
screwdriver.  
7-42  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Air Conditioning System: 4  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Bulb  
EXAMPLE  
Position/Turn signal light  
Other General Lights  
Bulb holder  
EXAMPLE  
(2)  
(1)  
(1)  
(3)  
(4)  
(2)  
(1)  
(2)  
54G124  
64J163  
(3) Removal  
(4) Installation  
To replace the bulb of position/turn signal  
light, follow the procedure for the bulb  
replacement of the “Front Fog Light”.  
54G123  
(1) Removal  
(2) Installation  
There are two types of bulb, “Full glass  
type” (1) and “Glass/metal type” (2).  
Rear combination light  
EXAMPLE  
To remove a bulb holder from a light hous-  
ing, turn the holder counterclockwise and  
pull it out. To install the holder, push the  
holder in and turn it clockwise.  
To remove and install a full glass type bulb  
(1), simply pull out or push in the bulb.  
To remove a glass metal type bulb (2) from  
a bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn it  
counterclockwise. To install a new bulb,  
push it in and turn it clockwise.  
You can access the individual bulb or bulb  
holders as follows.  
78K124  
7-43  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
License plate light  
Door illumination light  
High-mount stop light (if equipped)  
The followings are the general procedure  
for replace the bulbs of high-mount stop  
light.  
Since special procedures are required, we  
recommend you take your vehicle to your  
SUZUKI dealer for the bulbs of high-mount  
stop light replacement.  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
65J345  
64J165  
Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise to  
remove it.  
Luggage compartment light  
NOTE:  
When reinstalling, put the packing (2)  
between the cover and bulb holder.  
64J181  
To remove a high-mounted stop light hous-  
ing the following procedure:  
1) Open the tailgate, and remove the trim  
(1) as shown in the illustration.  
64J166  
7-44  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
(2)  
64J182  
64J183  
64J184  
2) Release the claws of the light housing  
by the flat head etc. through the service  
holes as shown in the illustration.  
3) Close the tailgate. Remove a high-  
mounted stop light housing (2) from the  
tailgate.  
4) Remove the each bulb.  
5) Replace the bulbs.  
To install a high-mounted stop light  
housing in the reverse order of removal.  
7-45  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
For windshield wipers:  
Wiper Blades  
52D102  
70G119  
2) Squeeze lock lever (1) towards wiper  
arm (2) and remove the wiper frame  
from the arm as shown.  
54G129  
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-  
dow.  
If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-  
aged, or make streaks when wiping,  
replace the wiper blades.  
To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-  
cedures below.  
CAUTION  
To avoid scratching or breaking the  
window, do not let the wiper arm  
strike the window while replacing the  
wiper blade.  
NOTE:  
Some wiper blades may be different from  
the ones described here depending on  
vehicle specifications. If so, consult your  
SUZUKI dealer for proper replacement  
method.  
7-46  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Installation  
60A260  
52D124  
52D125  
3) Pull the locked end of the wiper blade  
firmly to unlock the blade and slide the  
blade out as shown.  
(3) Retainer  
(4) Locked end  
4) If the new blade is provided without the  
two metal retainers, move them from  
the old blade to the new one.  
5) Install the new blade in the reverse  
order of removal, with the locked end  
positioned toward the wiper arm. Make  
sure the blade is properly retained by  
all the hooks. Grasp the blade near the  
locked end and pull in the direction of  
the arrows to lock the end into place.  
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making  
sure that the lock lever is snapped  
securely into the arm.  
7-47  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
For rear wipers:  
65D151  
54G135  
NOTE:  
(1) Retainer  
Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more  
than necessary. If you do, it can break off.  
4) If the new blade is provided without the  
two metal retainers, move them from  
the old blade to the new one.  
5) Install the new blade in the reverse  
order of removal.  
Make sure the blade is properly  
retained by all the hooks.  
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the  
reverse order of removal.  
80G146  
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-  
dow.  
2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm  
as shown.  
3) Slide the blade out as shown.  
7-48  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
fluid tank. If the fluid level is near empty,  
refill it.  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
Air Conditioning System  
If you do not use the air conditioner for a  
long period, such as during winter, it may  
not give the best performance when you  
start using it again. To help maintain opti-  
mum performance and durability of your air  
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.  
Operate the air conditioner at least once a  
month for one minute with the engine  
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil  
and helps protect the internal components.  
Front and rear (if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
Use a good quality windshield washer  
fluid, diluted with water as necessary.  
WARNING  
Do not use “anti-freeze” solution in  
the windshield washer reservoir. This  
can severely impair visibility when  
sprayed on the windshield, and also  
damage your vehicle’s paint.  
CAUTION  
(or opposite side)  
Damage may result if the washer  
motor is operated with no fluid in the  
washer tank.  
66J008  
66J116  
Check that there is washer fluid in the tank  
by looking at the washer fluid level gauge  
which is attached to the cap of the washer  
7-49  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1  
Spare Tire Nut Lock (if equipped) ...................................... 8-1  
Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-2  
Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-3  
Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-7  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle ................................................. 8-8  
If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-8  
If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-9  
If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-9  
8
60G411  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Jacking Instructions: 5  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
Tire Changing Tool  
Spare Tire Nut Lock  
(if equipped)  
WARNING  
After using the tire changing tools,  
be sure to stow them securely, or  
they could be thrown about in an  
accident, causing injury.  
To UNLOCK  
To LOCK  
64J124  
The jack, wheel brace and jack handle are  
stowed in the rear left corner of the lug-  
gage compartment. Remove the cover to  
access the tools.  
64J172  
A nut lock is used for the spare tire. To  
unlock the spare tire nut, insert the ignition  
key into the lock as far as the key will go  
and remove the lock with the key in. To lock  
the spare tire nut, put the lock on the nut  
and push the lock in.  
To remove the jack, turn its shaft counter-  
clockwise and pull the jack out of the stor-  
age bracket. To stow the jack, place it in  
the storage bracket and turn the shaft  
clockwise until the jack is securely held in  
place.  
WARNING  
The tire changing tools should be  
used only to change wheels. It is  
important to read the jacking instruc-  
tions in this section before attempt-  
ing to use the jack.  
8-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Jacking Instructions: 5  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
jack-head groove fits around the jacking  
point beneath the vehicle body.  
Jacking Instructions  
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
64J194  
75F062  
79K059  
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.  
2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift  
into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has an  
automatic transmission, or shift into “R”  
(Reverse) if your vehicle has a manual  
transmission.  
(2) Jack handle  
(3) Wheel brace  
7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and  
smoothly until the tire clears the  
ground. Do not raise the vehicle more  
than necessary.  
(1)  
3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if  
your vehicle is near traffic.  
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel  
diagonally opposite of the wheel being  
lifted.  
5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel  
being lifted as shown in the illustration  
in case that the jack slips.  
79K058  
(1) Jacking point  
6) Position the jack as shown in the illus-  
tration and raise the jack by turning the  
8-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Jump Starting Instructions: 7  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
WARNING  
Changing Wheels  
To change a wheel, use the following pro-  
cedure:  
• Use the jack only to change wheels  
on level, hard ground.  
• Never jack up the vehicle on an  
inclined surface.  
• Never raise the vehicle with the  
jack in a location other than the  
designated jacking point near the  
wheel to be changed.  
To remove the spare wheel:  
1) Remove the jack and tools from the  
vehicle.  
(2)  
(A)  
• Make sure that the jack is raised at  
least 51 mm (2 inches) before it  
contacts the flange. Use of the jack  
when it is within 51 mm (2 inches)  
of being fully collapsed may result  
in failure of the jack.  
(1)  
78K151  
3) Unhook the under claws (1) and the  
middle claws (2) one by one.  
• Never get under the vehicle when it  
is supported by the jack.  
• Never run the engine when the  
vehicle is supported by the jack  
and never allow passengers to  
remain in the vehicle.  
(3)  
78K150  
2) Release the lock at the underneath of  
the spare wheel full cover (A) as shown  
in the illustration.  
78K152  
4) Unhook the upper claws (3), and  
remove the wheel full cover.  
8-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Jump Starting Instructions: 7  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle: 6  
If the Starter Does Not Operate: 2, 9  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
NOTE:  
facing the wheel. Tighten each nut  
snugly by hand until the wheel is  
securely seated on the hub.  
Remove the full wheel cover from the bot-  
tom part to the upper part. Otherwise, the  
claws may be broken.  
(B)  
(Half cover type)  
78K153  
(4)  
5) Pull out the lock cover (B) fitted on the  
lock nut of the spare wheel while insert-  
ing the key full into the key hole of the  
lock cover (B).  
6) Remove the lock nut and wheel nuts of  
the spare wheel, then remove the spare  
wheel with both hands.  
EXAMPLE  
(5)  
81A057  
Tightening torque for wheel nut  
100 Nm (10.0 kg-m, 72.3 lb-ft)  
78K060  
NOTE:  
6) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts  
in a crisscross fashion with a wrench as  
shown in the illustration.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the half  
cover, remove the center bolt (4), then  
remove the outer cover (5) of the spare  
wheel half cover.  
To change the wheel:  
1) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel  
nuts.  
2) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking  
instructions in this section)  
3) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.  
4) Before installing the new wheel, clean  
any mud or dirt off from the surface of  
the wheel and hub with a clean cloth.  
Clean the hub carefully; it may be hot  
from driving.  
5) Install the new wheel and replace the  
wheel nuts with their cone shaped end  
8-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the Engine is Flooded: 2, 9  
If the Engine Overheats: 2, 9  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
WARNING  
Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten  
them to the specified torque as soon  
as possible after changing wheels.  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts may come  
loose or fall off, which can result in  
an accident. If you do not have a  
torque wrench, have the wheel nut  
torque checked by an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
(4)  
(5)  
To install the wheel:  
78K155  
78K063  
2) Put the spare tire nut lock (4) on the  
spare tire nut and push the lock in.  
3) Install the wheel cover in the reverse  
order to removal.  
NOTE:  
When you install the spare tire full cover,  
make sure the position of the upper claws  
marked on outside (5) and holes, then  
hook them first.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
78K154  
1) Install the wheel with both hands to the  
spare tire carrier (1) as shown in the  
illustration.  
Then tighten the wheel nuts (2) and  
spare tire nut (3).  
8-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the Engine Overheats: 2, 9  
If You Cannot Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift Le-  
ver Out of “P” (PARK): 2, 9  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
WARNING  
(3)  
WARNING  
Vehicle equipped with P225/65R17  
tires have a spare wheel and tire that  
are a different size than the wheels  
and tires on the vehicle. The spare  
wheel and tire on these vehicles are  
intended for temporary emergency  
use only. The wheel is painted yellow  
to remind you that the wheel and tire  
are for temporary use only. Continu-  
ous use of this spare can result in tire  
failure and loss of control. Always  
observe these precautions when  
using this spare:  
• Be aware that your vehicle will han-  
dle differently with this temporary  
spare.  
• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)  
speed.  
• Replace the temporary spare with a  
standard tire and wheel as soon as  
possible.  
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” with this tem-  
porary spare.  
(Continued)  
• Replace the spare tire with a new  
one as soon as the tread wear indi-  
cator appears.  
• When replacing the spare tire, use  
a replacement tire with the exact  
same size and construction.  
(4)  
Snow Tires  
Your vehicle is equipped with all-season  
tires which are designed for use in summer  
and most winter conditions. For improved  
traction in severe winter conditions,  
SUZUKI recommends mounting radial  
snow tires on all four wheels. Snow tires  
must be the same size as the standard  
tires. Also be sure to use the tires of the  
same type and brand on all four wheels of  
your vehicle.  
64J196  
CAUTION  
To avoid the removal of the spare  
wheel full cover while driving, be  
sure to fit the claws (3) of the outer  
cover of the spare wheel full cover to  
each hole (4) of the inner cover of the  
spare wheel full cover.  
• Do not use tire chains on the spare  
tire. If you must use tire chains,  
rearrange the wheels so standard  
tires and wheels are fitted to the  
rear axle.  
(Continued)  
8-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except  
those necessary for safety reasons (for  
example, headlights or hazard lights).  
Jump Starting Instructions  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Your vehicle should not be started by  
pushing or towing. This starting  
method could result in permanent  
damage to the catalytic converter.  
Use jumper cables to start a vehicle  
with a weak or run-down battery.  
Engine Hook  
• Never attempt to jump start your  
vehicle if the battery appears to be  
frozen. Batteries in this condition  
may explode or rupture if jump  
starting is attempted.  
EXAMPLE  
• When making jumper cable con-  
nections, be certain that your  
hands and the jumper cables  
remain clear from pulleys, belts or  
fans.  
Discharged  
Battery  
When jump starting your vehicle, use  
the following procedure:  
12V BATTERY  
• Batteries  
produce  
flammable  
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and  
sparks away from the battery or an  
explosion may occur. Never smoke  
when working near the battery.  
• If the booster battery you use for  
jump starting is installed in another  
vehicle, make sure the two vehicles  
are not touching each other.  
Charged Battery  
60A270  
• If your battery discharges repeat-  
edly, for no apparent reason, have  
your vehicle inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-  
age to your vehicle or battery, fol-  
low the jump starting instructions  
below precisely and in order. If you  
are in doubt, call for qualified road  
service.  
60A269  
1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start  
your vehicle. Position the good 12-volt  
battery close to your vehicle so that the  
jumper cables will reach both batteries.  
When using a battery installed on  
another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE  
VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking  
brakes fully on both vehicles.  
EXAMPLE  
52D129  
8-7  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
3) Make jumper cable connections as fol-  
lows:  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle  
If the Starter Does Not  
Operate  
1. Connect one end of the first jumper  
cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery (1).  
2. Connect the other end to the positive  
(+) terminal of the booster battery  
(2).  
3. Connect one end of the second  
jumper cable to the negative (–) ter-  
minal of the booster battery (2).  
4. Make the final connection to an  
unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.  
engine hook (3)) of the engine of the  
vehicle with the discharged battery  
(1).  
Emergency Towing  
1) Try turning the ignition switch to the  
“START” position with the headlights  
turned on to determine the battery con-  
dition. If the headlights go excessively  
dim or go off, it usually means that  
either the battery has run down or bat-  
tery terminal contact is poor. Recharge  
the battery or correct battery terminal  
contact if necessary.  
If your vehicle is disabled, it may be towed  
by a tow truck using one of the following  
methods:  
1) Tow the vehicle with two wheels lifted  
by the tow truck and the other two  
wheels on a towing dolly.  
2) Use the appropriate towing method  
specified for your vehicle in the “Towing  
Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-  
tion, but with the wheels lifted by the  
tow truck instead of on a towing dolly.  
Be sure to carefully follow the specific  
instructions provided in the “Towing  
Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-  
tion.  
2) If the headlights remain bright, check  
the fuses. If the reason for failure of the  
starter is not obvious, there may be a  
major electrical problem. Have the vehi-  
cle inspected by your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
WARNING  
Never connect the jumper cable  
directly to the negative (–) terminal of  
the discharged battery, or an explo-  
sion may occur.  
CAUTION  
If vehicle damage (such as steering  
or drivetrain damage, inability to  
operate free axle mechanism, etc.)  
prevent normal use of the towing pro-  
cedures for your vehicle described in  
the “Towing Your Vehicle (recre-  
ational towing)” section, have your  
vehicle towed with two wheels lifted  
by the tow truck and the other two  
wheels on a towing dolly.  
4) If the booster battery you are using is  
installed on another vehicle, start the  
engine of the vehicle with the booster  
battery. Run the engine at moderate  
speed.  
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the  
discharged battery.  
6) Remove the jumper cables in the exact  
reverse order in which you connected  
them.  
8-8  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
If the temperature indication does not  
come down to within the normal, accept-  
able range:  
If the Engine is Flooded  
If the Engine Overheats  
If the engine is flooded with gasoline, it  
may be hard to start. If this happens, press  
the accelerator pedal all the way to the  
floor and hold it there while cranking the  
engine. (Do not operate the starter motor  
for more than 15 seconds).  
The engine could overheat temporarily  
under severe driving conditions. If the  
engine coolant temperature gauge indi-  
cates overheating during driving:  
1) Turn off the engine and check that the  
water pump belt and pulleys are not  
damaged or slipping. If any abnormality  
is found, correct it.  
2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.  
If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”  
line, look for leaks at the radiator, water  
pump and radiator and heater hoses. If  
you locate any leaks that may have  
caused the overheating, do not run the  
engine until these problems have been  
corrected.  
3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add  
coolant to the reservoir and then the  
radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine  
Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE” section.)  
1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.  
2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and  
park.  
3) Let the engine run at normal idle speed  
for a few minutes until the indicator is  
within the normal, acceptable tempera-  
ture range shown by the white band  
between “H” and “C”.  
WARNING  
If you see or hear escaping steam,  
stop the vehicle in a safe place and  
immediately turn off the engine to let  
it cool. Do not open the hood when  
steam is present. When the steam  
can no longer be seen or heard, open  
the hood to see if the coolant is still  
boiling. If it is, you must wait until it  
stops boiling before you proceed.  
Also, be careful not to touch hot  
engine parts (radiator, water hoses,  
engine etc.).  
8-9  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
66J191  
WARNING  
• It is hazardous to remove the radia-  
tor cap when the water temperature  
is high, because scalding fluid and  
steam may be blown out under  
pressure. The cap should only be  
taken off when the coolant temper-  
ature has lowered.  
• To prevent personal injury, keep  
hands, tools and clothing away  
from the engine cooling fan and air-  
conditioner fan (if equipped). These  
electric fans can automatically turn  
on without warning.  
8-10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
MEMO  
8-11  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPEARANCE CARE  
APPEARANCE CARE  
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1  
Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-3  
9
60G412  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Corrosion Prevention: 5  
APPEARANCE CARE  
vehicle which are not well ventilated to  
permit quick drying.  
If you frequently drive on salted roads, your  
vehicle should be washed at least once a  
month during the winter. If you live near the  
ocean, your vehicle should be washed at  
least once a month throughout the year.  
Corrosion Prevention  
It is important to take good care of your  
vehicle to protect it from corrosion.  
Listed below are instructions for how to  
maintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion.  
Please read and follow these instructions  
carefully.  
Wash your vehicle immediately after using  
it off-road. For washing instructions, refer  
to the “Vehicle Cleaning” section.  
Important Information About Corro-  
sion  
Remove foreign material deposits  
Foreign material such as salts, chemicals,  
road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and  
industrial fall-out may damage the finish of  
your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.  
Remove these types of deposits as quickly  
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to  
wash off, an additional cleaner may be  
required. Be sure that any cleaner you use  
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is  
specifically intended for your purposes.  
Follow the manufacturer’s directions when  
using these special cleaners.  
Common causes of corrosion  
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture  
or chemicals in hard-to-reach areas of  
the vehicle underbody or frame.  
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to  
treated or painted metal surfaces  
resulting from minor accidents or  
impact from stones and gravel.  
52D151  
This information illustrates the necessity of  
keeping your vehicle (particularly the  
underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It  
is equally important to repair any damage  
to the paint or protective coatings as soon  
as possible.  
Environmental conditions which accel-  
erate corrosion  
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea  
air or industrial pollution will all acceler-  
ate the corrosion of metal.  
2) High humidity will increase the rate of  
corrosion particularly when the temper-  
ature range is just above the freezing  
point.  
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle  
for an extended period of time may pro-  
mote corrosion even though other body  
sections may be completely dry.  
WARNING  
How to Help Prevent Corrosion  
Foreign material can lodge between  
the fuel tank of your vehicle and the  
skid plate which covers it. You should  
periodically clean out any foreign  
material which has accumulated in  
this area, since it could create a fire  
hazard.  
Wash your vehicle frequently  
The best way to preserve the finish on your  
vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to  
keep it clean with frequent washing.  
Wash your vehicle at least once during the  
winter and once immediately after the win-  
ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the  
underside, as clean and dry as possible.  
4) High temperatures will cause an accel-  
erated rate of corrosion to parts of the  
9-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Corrosion Prevention: 5  
APPEARANCE CARE  
Repair finish damage  
authorized SUZUKI dealer for information  
on these shields.  
Cover your vehicle  
Carefully examine your vehicle for damage  
to the painted surfaces, especially if it is  
used off-road. Should you find any chips or  
scratches in the paint, touch them up  
immediately to prevent corrosion from  
starting. If the chips or scratches have  
gone through to the bare metal, have a  
qualified body shop make the repair.  
Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-  
lated area  
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly  
ventilated area. If you often wash your  
vehicle in the garage or if you frequently  
drive it in when wet, your garage may be  
damp. The high humidity in the garage  
may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet  
vehicle may corrode even in a heated  
garage if the ventilation is poor.  
Keep passenger and cargo compart-  
ments clean  
Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate  
under the floor mats and may cause corro-  
sion. Occasionally, check under these  
mats to ensure that this area is clean and  
dry. More frequent checks are necessary if  
the vehicle is used off road or in wet  
weather.  
WARNING  
50G203  
Do not apply additional undercoating  
or rust preventive coating on or  
around exhaust system components  
such as the catalytic converter,  
exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be  
started if the undercoating substance  
becomes overheated.  
If you cannot regularly park your vehicle in  
a garage, we recommend you use a vehi-  
cle cover. Years of exposure to midday sun  
can cause the colors in paint, plastic parts  
and fabrics to fade. Covering your vehicle  
with a high-quality, breathable” vehicle  
cover can help protect the finish from the  
harmful UV rays in sunlight, and can  
reduce the amount of dust and air pollution  
reaching the surface. Your SUZUKI dealer  
can help you select the right cover for your  
vehicle.  
Certain cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-  
ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-  
rosive by nature. These products should  
be transported in sealed containers. If a  
spill or leak does occur, clean and dry the  
area immediately.  
Use mud and gravel shields  
The use of mud and gravel shields will help  
protect your vehicle, especially if you fre-  
quently drive on gravel or salted roads.  
Full-size shields, which extend as close to  
the road as is practical, are the best. The  
fittings for such shields should also be cor-  
rosion resistant. Please check with your  
9-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Cleaning: 5  
APPEARANCE CARE  
damp cloth to remove dirt and the soap  
solution. If some dirt still remains on the  
surface, repeat this procedure.  
Vinyl floor mats  
Vehicle Cleaning  
Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl  
with water or mild soap. Use a brush to  
help loosen dirt. After dirt is loosened,  
rinse the mat thoroughly with water and  
dry it in the shade.  
Fabric upholstery  
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Using a mild soap solution, rub stained  
areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove  
soap, rub the areas again with a cloth  
dampened with water. Repeat this until the  
stain is removed, or use a commercial fab-  
ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a  
fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-  
facturer’s instructions and precautions.  
Carpets  
Remove dirt and soil as much as possible  
with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap  
solution, rub stained areas with a clean  
damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas  
again with a cloth dampened with water.  
Repeat this until the stain is removed, or  
use  
a
commercial carpet cleaner for  
Leather upholstery  
tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,  
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions and precautions.  
76G044S  
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,  
wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.  
To remove soap, wipe the areas again with  
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the  
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this  
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a  
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt  
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, care-  
fully follow the manufacture’s instructions  
and precautions. Do not use solvent type  
cleaners or abrasive cleaners.  
WARNING  
Instrument panel and console  
When cleaning the interior or exterior  
of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable  
solvents such lacquer thinners, gas-  
oline, benzene or cleaning materials  
such as bleaches and strong house-  
hold detergents. The materials could  
cause personal injury or damage to  
the vehicle.  
NOTE:  
Wipe up spills containing chemicals, alco-  
hol, etc., immediately with a soft, damp  
cloth. Use a mild soap solution if neces-  
sary. Do not use cleaners or polishes con-  
taining strong solvents or acidic solutions.  
These chemicals may stain and discolor  
the instrument panel and console.  
Cleaning Interior  
Seat belts  
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and  
water. Do not use bleach or dye on the  
belts. They may weaken the fabric in the  
belts.  
Vinyl upholstery  
Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-  
gent mixed with warm water. Apply the  
solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft  
cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to  
loosen dirt. Rub the surface with a clean,  
9-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Vehicle Cleaning: 5  
APPEARANCE CARE  
cloth should be frequently soaked in the  
soap solution.  
Cleaning the Exterior  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
When washing the vehicle:  
CAUTION  
• Avoid directing steam or hot water  
of more than 80°C (176°F) on plas-  
tic parts.  
It is important that your vehicle be  
kept clean and free from dirt. Failure  
to keep your vehicle clean may result  
in fading of the paint or corrosion to  
various parts of the vehicle body.  
When using a commercial car wash  
product, observe the cautions speci-  
fied by the manufacturer. Never use  
strong household detergents or  
soaps.  
• To avoid damaging engine compo-  
nents, do not use pressurized  
water in the engine compartment.  
• Do not pour the water on the bat-  
tery. And wipe off the water which  
remains on the battery. The water  
entering inside the battery possibly  
causes fluid leakage.  
Washing  
4) Once the dirt has been completely  
removed, rinse off the detergent with  
running water.  
5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body  
with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it  
to dry in the shade.  
6) Check carefully for damage to painted  
surfaces. If there is any damage,  
“touch-up” the damage following the  
procedure below:  
WARNING  
• Never attempt to wash and wax  
your vehicle with the engine run-  
ning.  
• When cleaning the underside of the  
body and fender, where there may  
be sharp-edged parts, you should  
wear gloves and a long-sleeved  
shirt to protect your hands and  
arms from being cut.  
• After washing your vehicle, care-  
fully test the brakes before driving  
to make sure they have maintained  
their normal effectiveness.  
2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.  
Remove dirt and mud from the body  
exterior with running water. You may  
use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use  
hard materials which can scratch the  
paint or plastic. Remember that the  
headlight covers or lenses are made of  
plastic in many cases.  
1. Clean all damaged spots and allow  
them to dry.  
2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the  
damaged spots lightly using a small  
brush.  
CAUTION  
3. Allow the paint to dry completely.  
To avoid damage to the paint or plas-  
tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off  
without ample water. Be sure to fol-  
low above procedure.  
When washing the vehicle, follow the  
instructions below:  
1) Flush the underside of body and wheel  
housings with pressurized water to  
remove mud and debris. Use plenty of  
water.  
3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild  
detergent or car wash soap using a  
sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or  
9-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
APPEARANCE CARE  
Waxing  
60B211S  
After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-  
ishing are recommended to further protect  
and beautify the paint.  
• Only use waxes and polishes of good  
quality.  
• When using waxes and polishes,  
observe the precautions specified by the  
manufacturers.  
9-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GENERAL INFORMATION  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Identification Numbers ....................................................... 10-1  
Safety Certification Label ................................................... 10-2  
Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 10-2  
Warranties ............................................................................ 10-2  
On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data  
Recorders ............................................................................ 10-3  
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 10-4  
54G072  
10  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Identification Numbers: 2, 5  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
may be found in the two locations shown in  
the above illustrations. This number is  
used to register the vehicle. It is also used  
to assist your dealer when ordering parts  
or referring to special service information.  
3.2 L engine model  
Identification Numbers  
Vehicle Identification Number  
EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)  
Engine Serial Number  
2.4 L engine model  
79K060  
The engine serial number is stamped on  
the cylinder block as shown in the above  
illustration.  
60G152  
60G128  
64J197  
10-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Safety Certification Label: 6  
Emission Compliance Label (For U.S.A.): 1, 2  
Warranties: NO  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Safety Certification Label  
Emission Compliance Label  
(for U.S.A.)  
Warranties  
The warranties covering your vehicle are  
explained in a separate New Vehicle War-  
ranty Information booklet given to you at  
the time of sale. Please read this booklet  
carefully so you can understand your rights  
and responsibilities.  
For U.S.A.  
The following warranties are provided with  
your vehicle:  
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
• Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or  
Accessories  
• Emission Components Defect Warranty  
• Emission Performance Warranty  
52D059  
This label contains important safety-  
related information about your vehicle. The  
label is located on the driver’s door lock pil-  
lar.  
60A412  
The EPA emission compliance label is  
located under the hood.  
10-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Reporting Safety Defects: NO  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
operation of the vehicle. This stored In addition, once SUZUKI collects or  
information can assist technicians in receives data, SUZUKI may use the  
repairing the vehicle when malfunc- data for research conducted by  
tions occur. Other information is stored SUZUKI, make the data available for  
only in the event of crash, by computer outside research if need is shown and  
systems that are commonly called confidentiality is assured, or make  
On-Board Vehicle Computers  
and Event Data Recorders  
Your vehicle is equipped with on-board  
computer systems which monitor and  
control several aspects of vehicle per-  
formance, including the following:  
• Emission-related components and  
engine parameters such as engine  
speed and throttle position are moni-  
tored to provide emissions control  
and to provide optimum fuel econ-  
omy. Your vehicle also has an on-  
board diagnostic system which mon-  
itors and records information about  
emission-related malfunctions.  
Event Data Recorders (EDRs).  
summary data which does not identify  
specific vehicles available for outside  
research.  
In a crash event, EDRs such as the  
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Mod-  
ule (SDM) in your vehicle may record Others, such as law enforcement per-  
information about the condition of the sonnel, may have access to the spe-  
vehicle and how it was operated, such cial equipment that can read the  
as data related to airbag readiness, information if they have access to the  
airbag performance, safety belt usage, vehicle or storage device.  
and the severity of the collision. These  
data can help provide a better under-  
• Signals from various sensors are  
monitored to provide air bag deploy-  
ment.  
standing of the circumstances in which  
crashes and injuries occur and lead to  
the designing of safer vehicles. The  
• If your vehicle is equipped with  
antilock brakes, conditions such as  
vehicle speed and brake perfor-  
mance are monitored, so that the  
ABS system can provide effective  
antilock braking. If your vehicle has  
an Electronic Stability Program  
SDM in your vehicle does not collect  
or store personal information.  
To read the stored information, special  
equipment is needed and access to  
the vehicle or storage device is  
required. SUZUKI will not access infor-  
mation about a crash event or share it  
with others other than with the consent  
of the vehicle owner or lessee, in  
response to an official request from  
the police or similar government office,  
as part of SUZUKI’s defense of litiga-  
tion through the discovery process, or  
as required by law.  
®
(ESP ) system, conditions such as  
yaw rate, lateral acceleration, and  
brake fluid pressure are monitored,  
®
so that the ESP system can help  
the driver control the vehicle in diffi-  
cult driving situations.  
Some information may be stored by  
the on-board computers during normal  
10-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GENERAL INFORMATION  
To contact American Suzuki, owners  
in the continental United States can  
call toll-free 1-800-934-0934, or write  
to:  
Reporting Safety Defects  
If you believe that your vehicle has a  
defect which could cause a crash or  
could cause injury or death, you  
should  
immediately  
inform  
the  
American Suzuki Motor Corporation  
Automotive Customer Relations  
3251 East Imperial Highway  
Brea, CA 92821-6795  
National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to  
notifying American Suzuki Motor Corp.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,  
it may open an investigation, and if it  
finds that a safety defect exists in a  
group of vehicles, it may order a recall  
and remedy campaign. However,  
NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your  
dealer, or American Suzuki Motor  
Corp.  
For owners outside the continental  
United States, please refer to the dis-  
tributor’s address listed in your War-  
ranty Information booklet.  
For vehicles registered for use and  
principally operated in Canada please  
contact Suzuki Canada Inc. at 1-905-  
889-2677 extension 2254 or write to:  
Suzuki Canada Inc.  
Customer Relations  
100 East Beaver Creek Road  
Richmond Hill, On  
L4B 1J6  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the  
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-  
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);  
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write  
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New  
Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, D.C.  
20590. You can also obtain other infor-  
mation about motor vehicle safety  
from http://www.safercar.gov.  
10-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GENERAL INFORMATION  
MEMO  
10-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
64J157  
FUSES  
PROTECTED CIRCUIT  
No.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
COLOR (AMPS)  
BLUE (15)  
CPRSR  
O2 HTR  
THR MOT  
AT  
A/C compressor fuse  
O2 sensor heater fuse  
Throttle motor fuse  
Automatic transmission fuse  
Rear defogger fuse  
Horn fuse  
YELLOW (20)  
BLUE (15)  
11  
YELLOW (20)  
CLEAR (25)  
BLUE (15)  
MAIN  
FUSE BOX  
In engine  
compartment  
RR DEF  
HORN  
YELLOW (20)  
YELLOW (20)  
GREEN (40)  
FR FOG  
MRR HTR  
FR BLW  
ABS 2  
Front fog light fuse  
Mirror heater fuse  
Front blower motor fuse  
ABS actuator fuse  
(10) PINK (30)  
11-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
64J157  
FUSES  
PROTECTED CIRCUIT  
No.  
COLOR (AMPS)  
(11) RED (50)  
ABS 1  
FI  
ABS actuator fuse  
(12) YELLOW (20)  
Main fuse  
(13)  
Blank  
(14) RED (10)  
(15) RED (10)  
(16) RED (10)  
(17) GREEN (40)  
(18) GREEN (40)  
(19) BLUE (15)  
(20) BLUE (15)  
H/L L  
H/L R  
H/L  
Head light high beam fuse, left  
Head light high beam fuse, right  
Head light fuse  
MAIN  
FUSE BOX  
In engine  
compartment  
ST MTR  
IGN  
Starter motor fuse  
Ignition fuse  
H/L LO L  
H/L LO R  
Head light low beam fuse, left  
Head light low beam fuse, right  
11-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
(K)  
(J) (I) (H) (G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B) (A)  
(V) (U) (T) (S) (R) (Q) (P) (O) (N) (M) (L)  
(X)  
(W)  
79K057  
FUSES IN FUSE BOX  
FUSES IN FUSE BOX  
(A) RED (10)  
(B) RED (10)  
DOME  
STOP  
Dome lamp fuse  
(M) BLUE (15)  
HAZ  
Hazard light fuse  
Stop lamp fuse  
Blank  
(N) BROWN (7.5) ST SIG  
Starter signal fuse  
Engine control module fuse  
Sun roof motor fuse  
Buck up fuse  
(C)  
(O) RED (10)  
ECM  
S/R  
(D) BLUE (15)  
(E) RED (10)  
ACC 3  
CRUISE  
Accessory socket fuse  
Cruise control fuse  
(P) CLEAR (25)  
(Q) CLEAR (25)  
B/U  
Cigar or Accessory socket  
fuse  
(F) BLUE (15)  
ACC 2  
(R) RED (10)  
TAIL  
Tail light fuse  
(G) YELLOW (20) WIP  
Wiper fuse  
(S) YELLOW (20) D/L  
Door lock actuator fuse  
Ignition signal  
heater fuse  
&
Seat  
Radio, Remote door mirror  
fuse  
(H) BLUE (15)  
IG2 SIG  
(T) BLUE (15)  
ACC  
(I) RED (10)  
(J) RED (10)  
(K) RED (10)  
(L) BLUE (15)  
BACK  
Back lamp fuse  
(U) RED (10)  
(V) BLUE (15)  
METER  
IG COIL  
Meter fuse  
ABS/ESP ABS or ESP controller fuse  
Ignition coil fuse  
Blank  
A/B  
Air bag fuse  
Radio fuse  
(W)  
RADIO  
(X) PINK (30)  
P/W  
Power window fuse  
11-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
MEMO  
11-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11  
SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS  
NOTE:  
Specifications are subject to change with-  
out notice.  
4WD: 4-wheel drive  
2WD: 2-wheel drive  
M/T: Manual transmission  
A/T: Automatic transmission  
ITEM: Dimensions  
Overall length  
Overall width  
UNIT: mm (in.)  
4500 (177.1)  
1810 (71.3)  
1695 (66.7)  
1683 (66.3)  
2640 (103.9)  
1540 (60.6)  
1560 (61.4)  
200 (7.9)  
Overall height  
4WD  
2WD  
Wheelbase  
Tread  
Front  
Rear  
4WD  
2WD  
Minimum running ground clearance  
188 (7.4)  
ITEM: Weight  
Gross axle weight rating  
Gross vehicle weight rating  
Vehicle capacity weight  
See the safety certification label and the tire information label which  
are located on the driver’s door lock pillar.  
12  
12-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11  
SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM: Engine  
Type  
J24B (16V DOHC)  
4
N32A (24V DOHC)  
6
Number of cylinders  
Bore  
92.0 mm (3.62 in.)  
90.0 mm (3.54 in.)  
89.0 mm (3.50 in.)  
85.6 mm (3.37 in.)  
Stroke  
3
3
Piston displacement  
Compression ratio  
2393 cm (146.0 cu.in, 2393 cc)  
3195 cm (194.9 cu.in, 3195 cc)  
10.0 : 1  
10.0 : 1  
ITEM: Electrical  
Ignition timing  
5° B.T.D.C.  
Standard spark plug  
2.4 L  
3.2 L  
NGK SILFR6A11  
AC DELCO 41-990  
12V GP24  
Battery  
Fuses  
See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” and “FUSES AND PRO-  
TECTED CIRCUITS” sections  
12-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11  
SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM: Lights  
WATTAGE  
12V 55W  
12V 60W  
12V 55W  
12V 21W  
12V 21W  
12V 5W  
BULB No.  
H7  
Headlight  
Low beam  
High beam  
Halogen  
HB3  
H11  
Front fog light  
Turn signal light  
Front  
Rear  
WY21W  
WY21W  
WY5W  
7443  
W5W  
7440  
W5W  
Position light  
Brake/tail light  
12V 21/5W  
12V 5W  
License plate light  
Reversing light  
High mount stop light  
Door illumination light  
Dome light  
12V 21W  
12V 5W  
12V 5W  
Spot light  
Center light  
Rear light  
12V 8W  
12V 10W  
12V 10W  
12V 5W  
Luggage compartment light  
W5W  
ITEM: Wheel  
Tire size, front and rear  
Tire pressure  
P225/70R16, P225/65R17, P225/60R18  
For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located  
on the driver’s door lock pillar.  
12-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM: Steering  
Toe-in  
Front  
Rear  
Front  
Rear  
Front  
0
6
2 mm (0 0.08 in.)  
2 mm (0.24 0.08 in.)  
Camber angle  
Caster angle  
0° 00’  
–1° 15’ 40’  
2° 30’  
ITEM: Capacities (approx.)  
Coolant  
2.4 L  
3.2 L  
7.3 L (15.4 US pt)  
9.5 L (20.1 US pt)  
66 L (17.4 US gal)  
4.8 L (10.1 US pt)  
6.0 L (12.7 US pt)  
1.9 L (4.0 US pt)  
2.5 L (5.3 US pt)  
3.0 L (6.3 US pt)  
0.95 L (2.0 US pt)  
Fuel tank  
Engine oil (replaced with filter)  
2.4 L  
3.2 L  
Transmission oil  
M/T  
A/T  
2.4 L  
3.2 L  
Differential gear oil  
Front  
Rear  
2WD  
4WD  
5M/T, 5A/T 1.1 L (2.3 US pt)  
4A/T  
0.8 L (1.7 US pt)  
0.8 L (1.7 US pt)  
1.5 L (3.2 US pt)  
1.6 L (3.4 US pt)  
0.47 L (1.0 US pt)  
Transfer gear box oil  
Extension case oil  
with a transfer switch  
without a transfer switch  
12-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
INDEX  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .................................. 2-28  
Automatic Transmission Fluid .......................................... 7-20  
Auto-On Headlight System ................................................ 2-77  
Average Speed .................................................................... 2-68  
B
Basic Operations .......................................................5-11, 5-38  
Battery .................................................................................. 7-36  
Brake Assist System .......................................................... 3-29  
Brake Fluid .......................................................................... 7-22  
Brake Pedal ..................................................................3-8, 7-23  
Brake System Warning Light ............................................. 2-57  
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-22  
Braking ................................................................................. 3-28  
Break-In ................................................................................ 4-2  
Brightness Control ............................................................. 2-66  
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-40  
C
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-2  
Changing Engine Oil and Filter ......................................... 7-11  
Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-3  
Charging Light .................................................................... 2-60  
Child Lock System (rear doors) ......................................... 2-3  
Child Restraint Systems ..................................................... 2-33  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray ........................................... 5-67 13  
Clutch Pedal .................................................................3-8, 7-20  
Coat Hooks .......................................................................... 5-70  
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1  
Cruise Control ..................................................................... 3-26  
Symbols  
“AIR BAG” Light ..................................................................2-61  
“CRUISE” Indicator Light ...................................................2-62  
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light ........................................2-59, 3-33  
“ESP” (Electronic Stability Program) Warning Light .......2-59  
“ESP” Warning Light ...........................................................3-33  
“SET” Indicator Light ..........................................................2-62  
Numerics  
4-Speed Automatic Transmission ......................................3-13  
5-Speed Automatic Transmission ......................................3-11  
A
A/T Selector Position ..........................................................2-68  
Accelerator Pedal ................................................................3-8  
Accessory Socket ................................................................5-66  
Adding Engine Coolant .......................................................7-14  
Adjusting Seat Position ......................................................2-19  
Adjusting Seatbacks .................................................2-19, 2-22  
Air Cleaner ...........................................................................7-16  
Air Conditioning System .....................................................7-49  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..........................................3-29  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .................2-58  
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) .......................................3-32  
Armrest .................................................................................5-73  
Assist Grips .........................................................................5-70  
Audio Systems (type A) ......................................................5-8  
Audio Systems (type B) ......................................................5-36  
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System  
(Climate Control) .................................................................5-1  
13-1  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INDEX  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin ...............................................5-72  
D
Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-18  
Fuel Consumption .............................................................. 2-68  
Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-62  
Fuel Gauge .......................................................................... 2-65  
Fuel Pump Labeling ............................................................ 1-1  
Fuel Recommendation ....................................................... 1-1  
Fuse under the Dash Board ............................................... 7-38  
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-36  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS ................................ 11-1  
G
Daily Inspection Checklist ..................................................3-2  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Indicator Light ...............2-63  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) System ............................2-78  
Door Locks ...........................................................................2-1  
Drive Belt ..............................................................................7-9  
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light .....................................2-61  
Driving Range ......................................................................2-68  
E
Gasoline Containing MTBE ................................................ 1-1  
Gasoline/Ethanol blends .................................................... 1-1  
Gasoline/Methanol blends ................................................. 1-1  
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-17  
Gear Oil Level Check .......................................................... 7-19  
Gear Oil Replacement ......................................................... 7-19  
GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY ............................... 7-32  
Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-71  
H
Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-79  
Head Restraints ..........................................................2-20, 2-23  
Headlight Aiming ................................................................ 7-39  
High Beam Indicator Light ................................................. 2-63  
Hill descent control Indicator Light ................................... 2-60  
Hill descent control System ............................................... 3-35  
Hill hold control System ..................................................... 3-37  
HomeLink® .......................................................................... 5-80  
Horn ...................................................................................... 2-82  
I
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) .................................3-31  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .................................2-28  
Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ...........................10-2  
Engine Block Heater ............................................................3-10  
Engine Coolant ....................................................................7-13  
Engine Coolant Level Check ..............................................7-14  
Engine Coolant Replacement .............................................7-15  
Engine Hood ........................................................................5-63  
Engine Oil and Filter ............................................................7-10  
Engine Serial Number .........................................................10-1  
Exhaust Gas Warning .........................................................3-1  
F
Floor Mats ............................................................................5-74  
Fluid Level Check ................................................................7-20  
Folding Rear Seats ..............................................................2-24  
Frame Hooks ........................................................................5-83  
Front Air Bags ......................................................................2-45  
Front Fog Light Switch .......................................................2-78  
Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light ...................2-55  
Front Seat Back Pocket ......................................................5-73  
Front Seat Heater .................................................................2-21  
Identification Numbers ....................................................... 10-1  
If the Engine is Flooded ..................................................... 8-9  
13-2  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
If the Engine Overheats ......................................................8-9  
If the Starter Does Not Operate ..........................................8-8  
If You Cannot Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift  
Lever Out of “P” (PARK) .....................................................3-15  
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ..................................................4-6  
Ignition Key Reminder ........................................................2-1  
Ignition Switch .....................................................................3-3  
Illumination Indicator Light ................................................2-64  
Important Vehicle Design Features To Know ...................4-1  
Improving Fuel Economy ....................................................4-3  
Information Display .............................................................2-67  
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................................................2-17  
Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts  
(Child Restraint with No Top Strap) ...................................2-35  
Installation with the LATCH System ..................................2-38  
Installation-Child Restraint with Top Strap .......................2-40  
Instrument Cluster ...............................................................2-54  
Interior Light Switch ............................................................5-64  
J
Jacking Instructions ............................................................8-2  
Jump Starting Instructions .................................................8-7  
K
Keyless Entry System Transmitter (Type B) .....................2-11  
Keyless Start System Indicator Light ................................2-63  
Keyless Start System Remote Controller (Type A) ..........2-5  
Keyless Start System Remote Controller/  
Keyless Entry System Transmitter ....................................2-4  
Keys ......................................................................................2-1  
L
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................................................2-28  
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................2-75  
Lighting Operation .............................................................. 2-76  
Lights “On” reminder ......................................................... 2-78  
Listening to a CD .......................................................5-15, 5-42  
Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer  
(Option) .......................................................................5-28, 5-54  
Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option) ..............5-25, 5-51  
Listening to Audio for AUX (Option) ..............5-27, 5-49, 5-53  
Listening to the Radio ...............................................5-13, 5-40  
Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................................... 2-62  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............................2-55, 3-38  
Luggage Compartment Cover ........................................... 5-74  
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................. 5-65  
Luggage Restraint Loops ................................................... 5-78  
M
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving  
Conditions ........................................................................... 7-7  
Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2  
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................................ 2-61  
Manual Transmission ......................................................... 3-11  
Master Warning Indicator Light ......................................... 2-64  
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-17  
N
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) ............................................................................... 10-4  
O
Odometer ............................................................................. 2-70  
Off-Road Driving ................................................................. 4-6  
Oil Level Check ................................................................... 7-10  
Oil Pressure Light ............................................................... 2-60  
On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data  
Recorders ............................................................................ 10-3  
13-3  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
On-Pavement Driving ..........................................................4-4  
Open Door Warning Light ...................................................2-62  
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................................................2-17  
Overhead Console Box .......................................................5-71  
P
Parking Brake Lever ....................................................3-7, 7-24  
Pedals ...................................................................................3-8  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule .........................................7-3  
Power Assisted Brakes .......................................................3-29  
Power Door Locking System ..............................................2-2  
Power Mirror Control ...........................................................2-18  
Power Steering ....................................................................7-24  
Power Steering Fluid ...........................................................7-24  
Power Window Controls .....................................................2-15  
R
Radio Antenna .....................................................................5-8  
Rear Seats ............................................................................2-22  
Rear Window Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Defroster Switch ..................................................................2-82  
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch ..................................2-81  
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks ....................................7-12  
Remote Audio Controls ............................................5-30, 5-56  
Replace the Oil Filter ...........................................................7-12  
Replacing Tires and/or Wheels ..........................................3-41  
Reporting Safety Defects ....................................................10-4  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors ......................................5-78  
S
Seat Belt Pretensioner System .......................................... 2-42  
Seat Belt Reminder ............................................................. 2-30  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-26  
Selection of Coolant ........................................................... 7-13  
Shopping Hook ................................................................... 5-73  
Shoulder anchor height adjuster ....................................... 2-32  
Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags ......................... 2-46  
Side Door Locks .................................................................. 2-1  
SLIP Indicator Light ...................................................2-58, 3-32  
Snow Tires ..................................................................7-32, 8-6  
Spare Tire Nut Lock ............................................................ 8-1  
Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-16  
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 12-1  
Specified Fluid .................................................................... 7-20  
Specified Gear Oil ............................................................... 7-17  
Specified Oil ........................................................................ 7-10  
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-65  
Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-66  
Stability Control System .................................................... 3-31  
Starting the Engine ............................................................. 3-9  
Steering Wheel .................................................................... 7-24  
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-64  
Sunroof ................................................................................ 5-68  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-43  
T
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-65  
Tailgate ................................................................................ 2-3  
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-66  
Theft Deterrent Light .......................................................... 2-15  
Thermometer ....................................................................... 2-70  
Tilt Steering Lock Lever ..................................................... 2-82  
Safety Certification Label ...................................................10-2  
Seat Adjustment ........................................................2-18, 2-22  
Seat Belt Extender ...............................................................2-41  
Seat Belt Inspection ............................................................2-33  
13-4  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Tire Chains ...........................................................................4-7  
Tire Changing Tool ..............................................................8-1  
Tire Inflation Pressure .........................................................7-27  
Tire Inspection .....................................................................7-28  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .........................3-38  
Tire Rotation ........................................................................7-31  
Tire Sidewall Labeling .........................................................7-25  
Tire Size ................................................................................7-26  
Tires ......................................................................................7-25  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle .................................................8-8  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) .......................6-7  
Traction Control System .....................................................3-31  
Trailer Towing ......................................................................6-2  
Transfer Position Indicator Light .......................................2-64  
Trip meter .............................................................................2-70  
Troubleshooting ..................................................................5-34,  
................................................................................................5-60  
Turn Signal Control Lever ..................................................2-78  
Turn Signal Indicators .........................................................2-63  
Turn Signal Operation .........................................................2-79  
U
W
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-55  
Warning and Indicator Messages ...................................... 2-72  
Warranties ........................................................................... 10-2  
Washing ............................................................................... 9-4  
Waxing ................................................................................. 9-5  
Windows .............................................................................. 2-15  
Windshield Washer ............................................................. 2-80  
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-49  
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-79  
Windshield Wipers .............................................................. 2-80  
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-46  
Underfloor Bins ...................................................................5-77  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .............................................7-30  
Using the Transfer Switch ..................................................3-15  
Using the Transmission ......................................................3-11  
V
Vehicle Cleaning ..................................................................9-3  
Vehicle Identification Number ............................................10-1  
Vehicle Loading ...........................................................6-1, 7-33  
Vehicle With Keyless Start System ....................................3-4  
Vehicle Without Keyless Start System ..............................3-3  
13-5  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
MEMO  
13-6  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prepared by  
June, 2009  
Part No. 99011-79K21-03E  
Printed in Japan  
TP334  
79K21-03E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Singer Sewing Machine 96 87 User Manual
Sony Camcorder NEX 3N User Manual
Sony Microphone ECM DS70P User Manual
Sony MiniDisc Player MDS PC2 User Manual
Sony Personal Computer VPCS13 User Manual
Soundstream Technologies Speaker 122 152 User Manual
SOYO Computer Hardware P54C User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Outdoor Shower 62044106 User Manual
Sub Zero Ventilation Hood PRO VENTILATION HOODS User Manual
Sylvania TV VCR Combo SRT22134 User Manual